IntroductionWelcome| 00:04 | Hello! My name is Paul F. Aubin, and
welcome to Revit Architecture 2013 Essential Training.
| | 00:09 | Over the last decade Revit has become
the de facto standard computer application
| | 00:13 | for architects and
building design professionals.
| | 00:15 | We'll start with basics like
walls, columns, doors, and windows.
| | 00:19 | We'll build four slabs and roofs and
learn how these forms interact with other
| | 00:23 | elements like the surrounding walls,
elevator shafts, and roof dormers.
| | 00:27 | And what building would be complete
without stairs, railings, plumbing,
| | 00:30 | and lighting fixtures.
| | 00:31 | And we'll even create our own custom pool table.
| | 00:34 | But using Revit is not just about modeling.
| | 00:36 | I'll also show you how to annotate your
drawings with text, dimensions and other
| | 00:41 | standard architectural symbols.
| | 00:42 | Revit allows us to generate live
schedules of just about any part of our
| | 00:46 | building, we'll create construction
details and compose sheets for printing
| | 00:49 | out our document sets.
| | 00:51 | Revit is a robust architectural design
and documentation package, and we have
| | 00:55 | quite a bit of ground to cover.
| | 00:56 | So if you're ready to begin your
journey into the world of Revit Architecture,
| | 01:00 | you've come to the right place.
| | 01:01 | Let's get started.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the exercise files| 00:01 | If you are a Premium member of the lynda.com
online training library, you have
| | 00:05 | access to exercise files
used throughout this course.
| | 00:07 | The exercise files are located in a
folder which I've placed on my Desktop. That
| | 00:12 | folder contains a subfolder for
each of the chapters in the course.
| | 00:15 | You open a particular folder for a
chapter and you will find a series of Revit
| | 00:19 | files in that folder.
| | 00:20 | In some cases you will find some
additional files that are not Revit format,
| | 00:24 | you'll be instructed on what to do with
those files in each of the movies that use them.
| | 00:28 | There's one more folder here called
Links and it contains a single Revit file
| | 00:33 | called Building Site. That file is
referenced by the projects in many of the
| | 00:38 | other folders. There's really nothing
for you to do in the Links folder, just
| | 00:42 | keep that file there in the same relative
location and the other projects will find it.
| | 00:46 | If you're a monthly or annual
subscriber to lynda.com, you don't have access
| | 00:50 | to the exercise files, but you can follow
along in your own work, so let's get started.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. Core ConceptsIntroducing building information modeling (BIM)| 00:00 | So I know you're probably anxious
to get into Revit right away,
| | 00:03 | but before we do, let's talk
about a few high-level concepts first.
| | 00:06 | For starters, just what is BIM?
| | 00:09 | Well BIM stands for Building
Information Modeling and it's a term that was
| | 00:13 | coined a few years back by Autodesk
to basically describe the process of
| | 00:16 | creating virtual models that
represent building facilities.
| | 00:20 | Now Revit is often heavily touted as
purpose-built for building information
| | 00:25 | modeling, and this is true, but that
often leads to confusion that somehow Revit
| | 00:30 | and BIM equal the same thing.
| | 00:32 | Revit and BIM are not the same thing.
Revit is a tool to help us achieve BIM.
| | 00:37 | And what BIM is, is a process that we
follow to create building model data that
| | 00:43 | is two things: coordinated and computable.
| | 00:47 | Those are the two most important tenants of BIM.
| | 00:50 | If all of the parts and pieces that
make up your BIM project are fully
| | 00:54 | coordinated with one another, and don't
require any manual updates to keep them
| | 01:00 | in sync, and if you've got a robust
rich data store of information that can be
| | 01:06 | used both internally by the system and
exported out to the larger project team
| | 01:10 | to do meaningful computations like
energy analysis, like structural loads,
| | 01:17 | like lighting analysis, air loads,
air cooling, any of those things, then
| | 01:25 | you've got BIM.
| | 01:27 | So there is a lot of different ways
that we can achieve BIM, and Revit is an
| | 01:31 | excellent tool to help us achieve that
because it does many of those things that
| | 01:35 | I just described natively.
| | 01:36 | Now it's important to understand that
3D is not the only component of BIM.
| | 01:42 | Often when you hear BIM in the same
sentence you'll hear people talk about 3D.
| | 01:46 | Now don't get me wrong, 3D is very important.
| | 01:48 | If your primary goal is to perform
clash detection between your structure and
| | 01:52 | your mechanical systems, or if you want
to make sure that your stair tower fits
| | 01:57 | into the overall
architecture, 3D is pretty important.
| | 01:59 | If you need to do visualization to get
high-quality renderings and so forth, 3D
| | 02:04 | is pretty important.
| | 02:06 | However, 3D is not the only aspect that
makes BIM special, 3D is just part of it.
| | 02:11 | I think that the I in BIM is sometimes
even more compelling than the M in BIM.
| | 02:17 | Think about cost-estimating tasks,
think about specification writing, think
| | 02:22 | about energy load analysis, think
about heating and cooling, think about
| | 02:26 | structural loads, all of
these things require data.
| | 02:29 | We have all this data instead of
manually computing all the various things that
| | 02:34 | we need to get a proper design, why
not let the computer do what computers do
| | 02:38 | best, compute stuff.
| | 02:40 | So this is what BIM is all about, so
again let's not focus just on the M, let's
| | 02:45 | also think about the I and if we've got
the two together in a fully coordinated
| | 02:49 | package in a way that Revit will
give us, then what we've got is a fully
| | 02:54 | implemented BIM solution.
| | 02:56 | So with that introduction in mind,
let's go ahead and get started.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working in one model with many views| 00:00 | So what's so special about Revit anyhow?
| | 00:02 | Well there are many possible answers
to that question, but in this movie
| | 00:06 | I'd like to focus on one of the
easiest and most immediate benefits of
| | 00:08 | using the software.
| | 00:09 | Whether you are an architect, an
interior designer or a draftsman, you spend a
| | 00:12 | lot of your time looking at
plans, sections, and elevations.
| | 00:16 | In Revit, work that you do and plan
is immediately reflected in elevation
| | 00:20 | section and vice versa.
| | 00:21 | In this movie I'll show you how Revit
makes it easy to keep all your changes
| | 00:26 | coordinated with a firsthand look at
what I think is one of the most fundamental
| | 00:29 | benefits of building information modeling,
the fully coordinated building model.
| | 00:32 | So I have here on screen a file called
Core Concepts, it's included with the
| | 00:36 | exercise files. Feel free to open this
file and follow along, or you can open up
| | 00:40 | any file of your choosing.
| | 00:41 | Now I have here a 3D view and a floor
plan, an elevation, and even a schedule.
| | 00:45 | Now what I'd like to show you first is,
if you select any object in any view,
| | 00:51 | like this door here, let me zoom in
just a little bit so we can get a better
| | 00:55 | look at that, notice that that door
selects in a bluish color here in the 3D
| | 00:59 | view, and we are going to talk more
about selection in a later movie, and it
| | 01:03 | also highlights here in the
Elevation and here in the Plan view.
| | 01:08 | So it doesn't matter which view I select it in,
if it's selected it's selected in all views.
| | 01:13 | Now that carries through
to modifications as well.
| | 01:16 | If I take this door and I move it
slightly, here in the Floor Plan view you are
| | 01:21 | going to see that change immediately take
place in both the Elevation and the 3D view.
| | 01:26 | Let me do it again and I'd like you to pay
attention, not to where I am here in the
| | 01:31 | floor plan; keep your eyes focused over
here in the 3D view and in the Elevation
| | 01:35 | view, as I make the change, like so.
| | 01:37 | And you'll see that it doesn't matter
that I made the change in floor plan, it's
| | 01:42 | immediately applied in the other views as well.
| | 01:44 | Now we are not limited to just
working in graphical views when we do this.
| | 01:48 | A really interesting and powerful
feature of working in software like Revit is
| | 01:52 | that schedules are actually live views as well.
| | 01:55 | I am going to focus my attention
over here in the conference room and you
| | 01:59 | could see I have a series of doors
over here in the conference room, door
| | 02:02 | number 110, 111, and 110A.
| | 02:04 | And I am going to look over here at the
schedule and you'll see a list of those
| | 02:09 | same doors, here is door
number 110, 110A, and 111.
| | 02:14 | And notice that as I select them, in the
schedule they highlight immediately in
| | 02:20 | the floor plan as well.
| | 02:21 | In fact, it is one and the same object.
| | 02:24 | This is door number 110 listed in
tabular format, as a list in the schedule,
| | 02:29 | this is door number 110 shown
graphically in a floor plan.
| | 02:33 | If I decided I wanted to
make a change to that door;
| | 02:36 | for example, perhaps I wanted it to be
another type of door, maybe a different
| | 02:41 | size, I could open up the list here
and drop it down to a smaller size, and
| | 02:45 | you'll see it gets slightly smaller
there in the floor plan and the sizes update
| | 02:50 | here in schedule as well.
| | 02:52 | And maybe I want something a little
more dramatic, so I am going to choose a
| | 02:56 | double-glass door, you can see the size
gets considerable larger and you can see
| | 03:00 | the graphic over here in the
floor plan has changed accordingly.
| | 03:03 | Now maybe I want to get a better
look at that door that I just changed.
| | 03:07 | I can do that by creating a new view to
take a look directly at that door, and
| | 03:12 | I am going to do that with one of my
favorite views in Revit, a Section view,
| | 03:16 | and I am going to drag a section
through the conference room, open it up, and
| | 03:21 | zoom in slightly and you can see that we
are now looking directly at that double door.
| | 03:25 | Now this is the same door, you
can see that if I highlight it here
| | 03:31 | it's highlighted there.
| | 03:33 | Now when I am in this Section view I
might notice that there is trouble up on
| | 03:37 | the second floor. I realize that there
is a door right here, that if we take a
| | 03:41 | look in the second floor plan, isn't
really in the appropriate location.
| | 03:46 | This door really ought to be
over here in this corridor.
| | 03:49 | Whether or not I am in the floor plan
or in the Section, I can make the change
| | 03:54 | and it's reflected in both views.
| | 03:56 | In traditional architectural design
and documentation procedures, drawings are
| | 04:00 | the result of carefully
reasoned thought and design.
| | 04:02 | A process of draw, erase, and redraw
eventually leads to the desired result,
| | 04:06 | which then must be replicated in all
appropriate drawings, like sections and elevations.
| | 04:11 | Each drawing conveys only a small
abstracted part of the whole and can
| | 04:14 | easily get out of sync.
| | 04:16 | In contrast, the BIM/Revit workflow, all
modifications are performed directly in
| | 04:21 | the model, in any view that is
convenient to the task at hand.
| | 04:26 | Revit views are live representations of
the model displayed through the prism of
| | 04:30 | conventional architectural drawing
types like plans, sections, and elevations.
| | 04:34 | However, since each view is really
just a window looking at the whole the
| | 04:38 | various views cannot get out of sync
and therefore always accurately convey the
| | 04:43 | current state of the design.
| | 04:44 | This is one of the major
benefits of using BIM software.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding Revit element hierarchy| 00:01 | In this movie we'll explore some high-
level concepts common to the Revit platform.
| | 00:05 | All elements in Revit fit
into a built-in hierarchy.
| | 00:08 | The purpose of this movie is simply to
expose you to some of these high-level
| | 00:11 | concepts and give you a better
understanding of how the elements in this system
| | 00:14 | fit into the larger framework.
| | 00:16 | So I am going to start with the
broadest grouping, all of the elements in
| | 00:21 | the software could be grouped broadly into some
major groupings, I'd like to call them buckets.
| | 00:28 | So if you thought of model element's one
big bucket and then we also have a view
| | 00:33 | elements, datum elements,
and annotation elements.
| | 00:36 | What I am going to focus on mainly
in this movie is model elements and
| | 00:41 | annotation elements.
| | 00:43 | The model elements are anything that
represent an actual thing; something that's
| | 00:49 | real in the building when the
building is built. So if you can walk up to
| | 00:52 | something and put your hand on
and touch it, it's a model element.
| | 00:56 | And the annotation elements are
things that aren't real, things that
| | 00:59 | describe objects in a set of drawings but
aren't necessarily built in the actual building.
| | 01:05 | So let me show you some examples.
| | 01:07 | I am here in Revit in a file called
Hierarchy, and it's included with the
| | 01:11 | exercise files if you'd like to follow
along, or you can open any Revit file that
| | 01:15 | has both model and annotation objects in it.
| | 01:17 | Now I'd like to illustrate a few
other points that I was just discussing.
| | 01:21 | For example, over here I have a wall, here I
have a door, here I have a stair and a railing.
| | 01:27 | Those would be considered model elements.
| | 01:29 | They are actual parts of the building,
if the building was built you could go
| | 01:33 | and walk up to those objects and you
could touch them, they are real elements.
| | 01:37 | Contrast that to things like this wall
tag or this door tag or these dimensions
| | 01:43 | or this bar scale, those items are not
real in the sense that nobody is going to
| | 01:48 | paint them on the floor of the finished
building or they are not going to build
| | 01:52 | the bar scale out in front of the facility.
| | 01:54 | They are representational objects
that are meaningful for an architectural
| | 01:58 | drawing, but they're not
actually physical objects.
| | 02:01 | Now those objects behave fundamentally
different in Revit. A model element, as
| | 02:06 | we saw in the previous movie, is a
live object that if you change it in one
| | 02:12 | view, such as taking this door and moving it
over here, it will be reflected in any other view.
| | 02:19 | If I switch to another floor plan you
can see that that door has already moved.
| | 02:24 | Now in this floor plan you can see
that the annotation is actually quite
| | 02:29 | different. There are no dimensions over
here, there is no bar scale, some of the
| | 02:34 | room tags are outside of the rooms
rather than inside, the door tags are not
| | 02:39 | even included in the door.
| | 02:41 | So there is clearly a difference
between the way the annotation appears in this
| | 02:45 | level 1 furniture plan versus the way that
it appeared here in the level 1 floor plan.
| | 02:51 | So let me show you an example of that.
| | 02:53 | If I take this room tag, here in the
furniture plan, and I move it, say over to
| | 02:59 | this location, if I return to my
original level 1 floor plan notice that the
| | 03:05 | corridor room tag is still in the
original location and that's because each of
| | 03:10 | these floor plans maintains its
own version of its annotation.
| | 03:14 | So the annotation is what we call view
-specific, it belongs to the view in
| | 03:19 | question; level 1 in this case or
level 1 furniture in the alternate case.
| | 03:24 | If we change the model as
we saw it changes everywhere.
| | 03:27 | So that's a main distinction
between the model versus the annotation.
| | 03:33 | Now there is another stage of the
hierarchy that we also want to understand.
| | 03:37 | If I highlight one of the objects
you'll see a tooltip appear on screen.
| | 03:41 | You'll see that same tip appear down in
the lower left-hand corner of the screen.
| | 03:46 | Now that information you can see
there's actually three bits of information
| | 03:50 | there, currently the status line says walls,
then basic wall, then interior 4 7/8' partition.
| | 03:56 | If I switch over this door, you'll see it
says Doors, then Single-Flush, then 36'x84'.
| | 04:04 | Now what that is, is a three-step
object hierarchy that all elements, both model
| | 04:10 | and annotation share in common.
| | 04:12 | We have a category, we have
a family and we have a type.
| | 04:18 | Categories are a built-in list of object
types that are available in the software.
| | 04:23 | You and I cannot change this list. Examples
might be doors, or walls, or stairs or door tags.
| | 04:30 | Those are all categories. The
behavior of each of those categories is
| | 04:33 | well-defined, built into the software, and we
just simply use objects of those categories.
| | 04:39 | The next tier in the hierarchy is the
family. Certain families are built-in,
| | 04:44 | we call those system families and
we'll discuss that in more detail in a
| | 04:47 | future movie, and we also have what
we call component families which are
| | 04:51 | families that you and I actually can modify,
and again we'll talk about that in a future movie.
| | 04:56 | But conceptually what a family is, is
really just a much more specific version
| | 05:01 | of some object in a particular category.
| | 05:04 | So if you think about doors in general
all a door does is cuts a hole in a wall
| | 05:09 | and allows people to walk through,
but doors come in many shapes and sizes.
| | 05:13 | We have single-flush swinging doors, we
have double doors, we have sliding doors
| | 05:19 | and revolving doors; each of those
kinds of door would be a family.
| | 05:24 | What it means to be a revolving door is
a little different than what it means to
| | 05:27 | be a swinging door or bifold door.
| | 05:30 | So we have family to
distinguish those differences.
| | 05:34 | Now even within the family you might
have variations, the most common would
| | 05:39 | be different sizes.
| | 05:40 | So in the Revit hierarchy we call those types.
| | 05:44 | So if that single-flush door comes in a
36-inch wide type and a 30-inch type we
| | 05:49 | would have a type for each of those conditions.
| | 05:52 | If that revolving door comes in one
size, or another size, or one type of
| | 05:57 | construction, or another type of
construction, we would make types for that.
| | 06:01 | So every object in the hierarchy
belongs to category, family, and type.
| | 06:06 | And another way to look at that would
be to say that each element in your model
| | 06:12 | like this door that I can select here
onscreen belongs to a type, that type is
| | 06:17 | part of a family, and that
family is part of a category.
| | 06:20 | And again, it doesn't matter if we
are talking about a model element or an
| | 06:25 | annotation element for this point here.
| | 06:27 | If I look at this room tag it's got
the same three-step hierarchy; category,
| | 06:32 | then family, then type.
| | 06:34 | Or this bar scale down here which is
Category Generic Annotation Graphic
| | 06:39 | Scale1-8 is the family and
the type name is similar.
| | 06:44 | So every object falls into this
multistep family type category hierarchy and all
| | 06:51 | of the objects fit into those larger buckets.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. Getting Comfortable with the Revit EnvironmentUnderstanding the different versions of Revit| 00:00 | I'd like to take a few minutes to
talk about the different flavors of Revit
| | 00:04 | that are available.
| | 00:05 | With the 2013 release we have
Building Design Suites and we also have the
| | 00:09 | stand-alone Revit products.
| | 00:11 | So I'm looking at a screen here from
the Autodesk web site, and this is just
| | 00:16 | a comparison matrix that shows the now
four flavors of Revit that are available.
| | 00:19 | In this course we are focusing on the
architectural features, so if you have
| | 00:24 | either Revit Architecture or if you
have what they are just calling Revit,
| | 00:29 | you have all of the features that we're
going to be talking about here in the course.
| | 00:34 | So if you have one of the Building
Design Suites, you have the Revit product and
| | 00:38 | you can actually turn on and off the
features that give you all of the features
| | 00:43 | for Revit Architecture.
| | 00:44 | However, if you also have stand-
alone Revit Architecture, you'll get the
| | 00:48 | same basic experience.
| | 00:49 | One or two of the screens might look
slightly different but for the most part
| | 00:53 | you have exactly the same thing.
| | 00:54 | Now if you happened to be in MEP or
Structure, you can certainly watch the
| | 01:00 | course as well and I will be focusing on
architectural features, but for some of
| | 01:05 | the core high-level concepts, they still
apply to the others, but just know that
| | 01:09 | I'm not going to be talking
specifically about MEP or structural functions per
| | 01:13 | se, I'll be focusing most of my
discussions on the architectural feature set.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exploring the Recent Files window and the application menu| 00:00 | The Recent Files screen greets you when
you first launch Revit. The screen gives
| | 00:04 | you quick access to the most recently-
used project and family files, you'll
| | 00:08 | also find quick links to various
resources, mostly online resources that maybe
| | 00:12 | of interest to you, like the user
community and what's new and things like
| | 00:15 | that. So let's take a look.
| | 00:17 | Here is our Recent Files screen as it
appears in Revit Architecture. I've got my
| | 00:21 | Projects area at the top and
my Families area beneath that.
| | 00:24 | The last four projects that you had
open are shown there with icons, up to the
| | 00:30 | last four, because as you can see here
with the Family area I haven't opened any
| | 00:34 | families yet, so I only see two items there.
| | 00:37 | Now what you see on your screen may
vary slightly because naturally you might
| | 00:40 | have opened different files than I have,
so the specific items that are listed
| | 00:44 | here aren't that important, it's just
simply that it's a quick way for you to
| | 00:48 | get to that file again. So if I was
working on this project yesterday, and I
| | 00:52 | want to reopen it again today, all I
have to do is click this icon and it will
| | 00:57 | launch that file for me.
| | 00:58 | Now if that's not the file that I want
to work on I have some options over here.
| | 01:03 | I can click the Open link and that
would take me to a browse window, and I can
| | 01:07 | go out and locate the project that I
want to open. I'm going to cancel that.
| | 01:11 | I can click this New link here and that
will create a new project just based on
| | 01:15 | the default template whatever that
happens to be, okay, and that's a setting
| | 01:19 | that we can actually change, or I've
got a few other template choices that are
| | 01:23 | listed here which also may vary on one
installation of Revit to the next, so
| | 01:27 | what you see specifically listed
here on your screen might vary slightly.
| | 01:31 | Now the other way that we can access
all of these similar commands New and Open
| | 01:35 | and Save is using the application menu,
so I'd like to show you that now, but
| | 01:40 | before I do I'm going to just create
using this Architectural Template link
| | 01:43 | just to create a blank file to have as
a backdrop. The reason for that is, as
| | 01:47 | you'll notice, many of the interface
items are not actually loaded until you
| | 01:51 | have a project loaded.
| | 01:52 | So what I have loaded in the background
is not really important, but I want to
| | 01:56 | focus on the application menu here, and
I just needed to have something open in
| | 02:00 | the background in order to do that.
| | 02:02 | Now the application menu can best be
described as essentially the file menu for
| | 02:06 | Revit. You have things like New and
Open and Save, your typical commands that
| | 02:10 | you would expect to find in a File menu,
we have Print and of course Close, all
| | 02:15 | of the sort of standard
commands for file management.
| | 02:19 | Now the way these work is if I just
simply click the item, like the New item,
| | 02:23 | I'll actually get a second project that
will load up. I'm currently in project
| | 02:27 | one, but if I were to just click
right on New, it would create project two.
| | 02:30 | If I hover over New you can see that
it loads up a menu over here in the side
| | 02:36 | of the application menu and gives me
some options, so I could create either a
| | 02:39 | new project, or a new family, or a new
conceptual mass, so if you want to create
| | 02:44 | one of these other types of files
then that's the way you do it, you just
| | 02:47 | simply pause your mouse first over the new
item and then that will make the others appear.
| | 02:52 | Let me show you that with the Open item.
| | 02:54 | If I pause over Open, now I can either
open Projects or Families or Building
| | 02:59 | Components, and so on.
| | 03:00 | Now a command like Save doesn't have
any sub-options, so it's just simply a
| | 03:05 | command you would click. Save As
does have options so it's got the little
| | 03:09 | arrow over here, and again, you pause
over it and you'll see the different
| | 03:12 | options that are available.
| | 03:14 | In some cases like this Library option
there is a further flyout here, this
| | 03:18 | tiny little triangle here is showing
me that, and I could save as a Family, a
| | 03:22 | Group or a View. So there are various
options that become evident as you hover
| | 03:27 | over each one of these little things.
| | 03:29 | Now if I collapse all of that and take
my mouse off of any of those commands, at
| | 03:35 | the very top here you see two small
icons, one that's labeled Recent Documents
| | 03:40 | and another one that's labeled Open Documents.
| | 03:42 | Now Recent Documents is listing the two files
that I've previously opened in the last chapter.
| | 03:49 | Yours may vary depending on how many
previous Revit files you've had opened.
| | 03:54 | The list can hold several items here,
there's plenty of room, and if there is an
| | 03:58 | item that you want to keep on the list
permanently, we have this little pushpin
| | 04:02 | future over here. So the way this works
is if you just simply click this little
| | 04:06 | icon right there, that will pin that
item to the list, and then as this list
| | 04:11 | grows, what normally happens is the
items that you've opened most recently stay
| | 04:16 | on the list and the ones you opened long
ago will eventually scroll off the list
| | 04:21 | when you run out of room
down here at the bottom.
| | 04:23 | If you click the pushpin that item will
stay on the list, it will maintain its
| | 04:28 | spot and stay on the list and
other items will scroll past it.
| | 04:31 | So if there is a project that you want
to make sure that you always have a quick
| | 04:36 | access to, that's a great way to do it.
| | 04:38 | If you switch to this icon, this just
shows you what you currently have open,
| | 04:42 | and you could see at the
moment all I have open is Project1.
| | 04:45 | If I opened another project, like the
Hierarchy file from the previous chapter,
| | 04:51 | and then opened this up, you can see that
now lists both items here on the list.
| | 04:56 | So as you open additional files they
will just simply appear there on the list.
| | 05:01 | So the recent files screen and the
application menu both provide quick and easy
| | 05:05 | access to your most recently
used project and families in Revit.
| | 05:08 | Use recent files to get started when you
first launch Revit, and you can use the
| | 05:12 | application menu anytime to open and
close files or create new files and
| | 05:16 | generate output as you're
working in the software.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the ribbon and the Quick Access Toolbar (QAT)| 00:00 | In this movie we're going to take an
overview of two very important parts of the
| | 00:04 | Revit user interface; the
ribbon and the Quick Access Toolbar.
| | 00:08 | Now the ribbon is the primary
interface for most commands in Revit and it's
| | 00:12 | located across the top of the
screen in this location here.
| | 00:15 | Now as you can see there are several tabs;
| | 00:17 | Architecture, Structure, Insert, and each of
those contains different series of buttons.
| | 00:21 | Now right above the ribbon is the Quick
Access toolbar or QAT, and this can be
| | 00:27 | thought of as really like a shortcut
menu if you want to think of it that way.
| | 00:32 | So let's look at the ribbon
in a little bit more detail.
| | 00:34 | So we have various tabs, now the
specific tabs that you have in your interface
| | 00:38 | might vary slightly depending on the
settings or the exact version of Revit you
| | 00:42 | have, but you can see here I have
Architecture and Structure and Insert and
| | 00:45 | Annotate, and if I click on any of
these it does change which commands are
| | 00:50 | available, I'm going to click
back over here to Architecture.
| | 00:53 | Each ribbon tab is broken into
panels, we've got panels like Build and
| | 00:58 | Circulation and Model, and these are
just convenient ways to group commands that
| | 01:03 | are similar to one another or that
are related to one another in some way.
| | 01:07 | And then finally on each of these
panels we have a collection of buttons. Now
| | 01:11 | buttons come in a few varieties.
| | 01:12 | So the simplest kind of button is a
button that you just simply click and it
| | 01:16 | just does one thing, examples would be
Mullion or Door. Okay, you'll notice that
| | 01:21 | when I highlight it, it just highlights
the single command and if I clicked it.
| | 01:25 | it only does one thing.
| | 01:27 | Contrast that to a command like Model Group.
| | 01:30 | Model Group, when I highlight it you'll
notice there is a little tiny arrow
| | 01:34 | right here, and if I click it, rather
than just running a command like the Door
| | 01:38 | command would, it actually pops open a
small menu. So we call this a dropdown button.
| | 01:43 | So then you go in and you choose
one of the commands off this menu.
| | 01:47 | Now most of the buttons are actually a
combination of the two, so we call these
| | 01:52 | split buttons. Wall is a good example of that.
| | 01:55 | The top portion of the Wall command is
just a simple pushbutton, if I click it,
| | 02:00 | it just runs that command.
| | 02:02 | If I click the bottom half, I get a
dropdown menu, so the same button is actually
| | 02:07 | in two pieces and they call it a split
button or I like to sometimes call it a
| | 02:12 | combo button, because it can do one or
the other. Here are some other examples,
| | 02:16 | this one is oriented horizontally,
the left-hand side is the default, the
| | 02:19 | right-hand side is the dropdown.
| | 02:21 | Floor command is the same way.
| | 02:23 | There's the Floor command, if just
click it, or I can click the dropdown and
| | 02:27 | get the other commands.
| | 02:29 | Now I should point out that a lot of
people get in the habit of using the
| | 02:33 | dropdowns regardless of whether or not
they wanted the default command or not,
| | 02:37 | like for example with the Wall command
is there any difference between clicking
| | 02:40 | here, and I get the Wall command, I'm
going to press Escape, or clicking here and
| | 02:46 | choosing this first item off
the list, Wall Architectural?
| | 02:51 | No, there is no difference whatsoever.
| | 02:52 | The only difference is, it took me
two clicks to get there the second time
| | 02:56 | versus the one click.
| | 02:58 | Now if you get in the habit of doing
it that way, it's not that big of a
| | 03:01 | deal. Some people prefer seeing all
the choices they have available to them
| | 03:04 | before they choose which one they want
to click. I'm just simply pointing out
| | 03:08 | that if you know that you want the
default you can go right to that button
| | 03:12 | instead of using the dropdown.
| | 03:13 | Now there's two other little items
that I want to point out to you on the
| | 03:15 | ribbon, one is an expandable panel, as
you can see here under Room & Area. What
| | 03:21 | this signifies when you see this small
little icon here and it highlights in
| | 03:24 | blue, is that there are some buttons
hidden away under this expandable portion
| | 03:30 | of the panel, so the panel expands out
and then you can see there is additional
| | 03:34 | commands under here.
| | 03:36 | The other interface item I have to
switch tabs to show you, I'll go over here to
| | 03:40 | the Annotate tab, and if you look at
the Text panel it doesn't highlight, but
| | 03:44 | notice here there is this tiny
little button that has like a little
| | 03:48 | down-pointing arrow to it, we call these
dialog launchers, and when I click that
| | 03:54 | it brings up some sort of a dialog, thus
the name dialog launcher, so usually
| | 03:59 | when you click those little icons, it's
going to be some sort of a dialog with
| | 04:04 | settings that relate to the
commands in question on that panel.
| | 04:08 | So I'm just going to cancel out of
there without making any changes. Just be on
| | 04:11 | the lookout for those very subtle
little icons there that are sometimes stashed
| | 04:15 | away on the panel titles themselves.
| | 04:18 | Now let's direct our
attention to the Quick Access Toolbar.
| | 04:21 | You can use the ribbons
exclusively to execute all of your commands.
| | 04:25 | You don't have to use the QAT at all.
| | 04:28 | However, the QAT is there because
there are certain commands that you use
| | 04:31 | frequently and it might be a little
bit more convenient to go directly to the
| | 04:35 | icon on the QAT than it is
to switch tabs all the time.
| | 04:39 | So if you prefer you can do that and you
can see here that a lot of the standard
| | 04:43 | commands are here, we've got Open and
Save and Undo and Redo and some of the
| | 04:47 | other commands here, you can simply
click them and they function exactly the
| | 04:51 | same ways they would accessing
those commands in other locations.
| | 04:55 | Like right here on my Annotate tab,
here is the Text command and there is the
| | 04:59 | exact same command right there on
the QAT, that's just an example.
| | 05:03 | Now at the very end of the QAT is a
little dropdown, and we can use this to
| | 05:09 | customize the Quick Access Toolbar.
| | 05:12 | Now most commands that are eligible to
be placed here are already here, you can
| | 05:16 | see New is the only one that's not
included, and if I just simply choose that,
| | 05:20 | it adds the New command to the start
of the Quick Access Toolbar, so that's a
| | 05:25 | really easy way that we can
customize what we see there.
| | 05:28 | Now for more customization potential
what you do is you open up that dropdown,
| | 05:33 | and you come down here near the bottom
and choose this command here, customize
| | 05:37 | the Quick Access Toolbar.
| | 05:39 | This brings up a dialog that would allow
me to select commands, move them up and
| | 05:43 | down in the list, I can
move it down or move it up.
| | 05:46 | I can add separators, I can remove
commands, so if I decided I no longer wanted
| | 05:50 | the New command to be on the QAT, I
can simply select it, click this X right
| | 05:55 | here, that removes it, and when I
click OK it disappears off the list.
| | 05:59 | The other way you can add commands to
the QAT is to simply right-click the
| | 06:03 | command on the ribbon and you can
choose this command here Add to Quick Access
| | 06:08 | Toolbar, and if I do that you'll see
it will add that icon to your QAT and
| | 06:14 | make it available on the list. Of
course it adds it to the end, so if you want
| | 06:18 | to move it around, then you would return
to this Customize command to move it around.
| | 06:22 | Now if you do that a lot and you add a
lot of commands to the QAT, you're going
| | 06:26 | to see here, you're going to
run out of room pretty quickly.
| | 06:28 | So the last thing I want to show you is,
you can right-click anywhere on the QAT,
| | 06:33 | and you could say show the Quick Access
Toolbar below the ribbon. It will move
| | 06:37 | it from here, drop it down here and
now you have all the space to work with.
| | 06:43 | I'm going to right-click this command
again, remove it from the QAT, and I'll
| | 06:48 | right-click again over here and show it
above the ribbon just to reset myself.
| | 06:52 | Feel free though to make whatever
customizations you find appropriate.
| | 06:56 | So most of the tasks you perform in
Revit will begin with a tool either on the
| | 07:00 | ribbon or the Quick Access Toolbar. We'll
get into the specifics of all the
| | 07:04 | various tools in later movies, but I
just wanted to start us off on the right
| | 07:08 | foot by giving you a quick overview
of these critical interface items.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding context ribbons| 00:01 | Context ribbon tabs appear on the ribbon
as you create and modify elements in Revit.
| | 00:06 | In this movie, we will look at how to
identify a context ribbon, when it will
| | 00:09 | appear and the sorts of commands
that you can expect to find in it.
| | 00:12 | In addition to context ribbon tabs,
the Options bar gives us feedbacks to
| | 00:16 | options and commands as you execute
them, so we'll also take a look at this
| | 00:20 | critical interface feature as well.
| | 00:21 | So I'm here in a file called Condo and
it's available with the exercise files.
| | 00:26 | If you watched the previous movie, we
talked there about the ribbons and the
| | 00:30 | QAT, and as you can see, my screen has a
similar set of ribbon tabs across the top.
| | 00:36 | The ribbon tab I want to focus on in
this movie is the Modify tab, so I'm going
| | 00:40 | to move up here and I'm going to click
on it, and I want you to take a quick
| | 00:45 | look at which panels are available here
on the Modify tab to start off with. You
| | 00:49 | could see on the far left, we've got
our Properties and our Clipboard, and all
| | 00:53 | the way over toward the right we
have Measure and Create, and so on.
| | 00:56 | A context ribbon tacks itself on
to the end of the Modify ribbon tab.
| | 01:01 | So if I select an object on screen like
maybe this roof object right here, you
| | 01:06 | will see that the word Modify changes
to include the word Roofs at the end.
| | 01:11 | It tints in this greenish color, the
entire ribbon tab gets this sort of
| | 01:16 | greenish tint to it, and there is a
new panel that appears here, in this case
| | 01:21 | containing only a single button,
Edit Footprint in this particular case.
| | 01:25 | Now if I select something else, like
this object, you can see that, that is a
| | 01:31 | Model Group and so now I get Modify
and then Model Groups, and I get a Group
| | 01:37 | panel and it has several
buttons and commands available.
| | 01:40 | If I select a railing, you'll see a
similar behavior, if I select this ground
| | 01:47 | plane here, this is called Topography, we'll
get a similar set of commands, and so on;
| | 01:52 | windows, doors, each one will give us different
context buttons, but you'll notice that the
| | 01:59 | entire left-hand portion of
the ribbon tab remains the same.
| | 02:03 | So we still have Properties and
Clipboard and Measure, and so on, it's just the
| | 02:06 | stuff at the right that changes.
That's what we mean by a context ribbon tab.
| | 02:11 | Now I'm showing you here in the case
where you select an existing object.
| | 02:15 | There is another place where context
ribbon tabs will appear, and that's when
| | 02:19 | you create objects. So I'm going to go
to the Architecture tab and I'm going to
| | 02:24 | click on the Wall tool, and notice
that that actually takes me over to the
| | 02:28 | Modify tab, and now instead of saying
Modify Wall, it says Modify Place Wall, and
| | 02:35 | all the rest of it still behaves the
same way that I showed you a moment ago.
| | 02:40 | The left-hand side of the ribbon tab is
still the same, but all the tools on the
| | 02:45 | right-hand side now are tools that
we can use to help us draw new walls.
| | 02:50 | If I cancel that command, maybe choose
a Door command, the same sort of thing
| | 02:55 | occurs, I now get a Modify Place Door.
| | 02:58 | So these are also
considered context ribbon tabs.
| | 03:01 | Now the other items that's context
sensitive that you want to be paying equal
| | 03:06 | attention to is the Options bar, so
right below the ribbon we have the
| | 03:10 | Options bar, and you could see right
now that it's completely empty. It's just
| | 03:14 | a big blank gray space.
| | 03:15 | If I run a command like the Wall command,
you're going to see that Options bar
| | 03:20 | will populate with several options
that we can choose from, in this case we
| | 03:25 | could change the level of the wall or
the height of the wall or the location
| | 03:29 | line. I'm going to cancel that command,
choose the Door command and you'll see
| | 03:32 | that the Options bar in this case simply
says Modify Place Door, but there is no
| | 03:36 | specific options. So you don't always
get options that occur there, but you want
| | 03:41 | to be looking just the same.
| | 03:43 | If I choose a Component command, you'll
see Rotate after placement and the Level
| | 03:50 | option, so it really does depend on
the command, not only if you will see any
| | 03:55 | options occur there, but what
those specific options will be.
| | 03:59 | Now in some cases when you select an
object, you'll also get commands that
| | 04:03 | appear on the Options bar.
| | 04:05 | Now often, it will just be the single
button, Activate Dimensions, which we'll
| | 04:09 | look at in a future movie,
| | 04:10 | but in some cases, you'll actually
see more detailed options there as well.
| | 04:15 | So the point is, is that there are
several places on the Revit screen and in
| | 04:19 | the interface, that you want to be
paying attention to as you work, because
| | 04:22 | that's the feedback mechanism that
Revit is using to let you know what's going
| | 04:26 | on at any given time.
| | 04:28 | So when you execute a command or when
you select an object and you want to know
| | 04:31 | what to do next, then some of the most
important places to be looking are the
| | 04:36 | context ribbons or the Options bar,
because those are two very common places
| | 04:40 | where you'll get that kind of feedback.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Properties palette| 00:00 | In this movie, we'll look
at the Properties palette.
| | 00:03 | Properties are always available for any
element that you create or select in a Revit project.
| | 00:08 | Properties are very context-sensitive so
depending on what you're doing, you are
| | 00:11 | going to see very different
things on the Properties palette.
| | 00:13 | So I'd like to look at a few
different scenarios with you here.
| | 00:16 | In a file called Condo Unit, and it's
included with the exercise files, but you
| | 00:19 | could follow along in any Revit
project, there are two contexts under which
| | 00:23 | you'll see the Properties palette.
| | 00:24 | One is when you're creating objects
and another is when you select something
| | 00:27 | that already exists.
| | 00:29 | So for example, if I came up here to
the Architecture tab and click on the Wall
| | 00:32 | tool, what you'll see is in addition to
all the context sensitive stuff that we
| | 00:37 | covered in the previous movie about
the ribbon tab and the Options bar, if we
| | 00:41 | look over here on the Properties palette,
you will see various properties that
| | 00:45 | are specific to the wall
that I'm about to create.
| | 00:48 | So at the very top we have the Type
Selector and you could see that this
| | 00:52 | particular one is
defaulting to a Generic 8" wall,
| | 00:55 | but if I open that up, it is a rather
long list and I could choose from many
| | 00:59 | different kinds of walls that I could draw.
| | 01:02 | Beneath that I've got Location Line and
what level I want to draw it on and the
| | 01:05 | height, and so forth.
| | 01:07 | And if I started to draw, it would just
simply draw objects using those settings.
| | 01:12 | Now notice that while I'm in the midst of
drawing all of the settings are grayed out.
| | 01:16 | So if I wanted to change the settings I
can do that but I have to press Escape
| | 01:21 | first to get back to kind of get out of the
current drawing mode and get back to the Properties.
| | 01:26 | So I'm still in the command, I could
make changes, for example, I could choose a
| | 01:31 | different kind of wall and then pick up
where I left off and you'll see that the
| | 01:35 | new wall is a little bit
thinner than the other wall.
| | 01:37 | So you can certainly interact with the
properties as you're drawing, and we're
| | 01:41 | going to get into a lot more of the
specifics on drawing walls in the later
| | 01:45 | movie. So don't go worry too much
about those specifics at this time.
| | 01:49 | I want to focus mainly on the interaction
with the Properties palette at this time.
| | 01:52 | So I'm going to Cancel twice now,
Escape twice, to get out of that command, and
| | 01:56 | I'm actually going to focus my
attention now on some of the objects that are
| | 02:01 | already here in the model.
| | 02:02 | For example, here at the exterior wall,
if I click on that, with it selected in
| | 02:07 | addition to our Modify tab that we
saw before, if we look at our Properties
| | 02:11 | palette now, you are going to see much
of the same stuff that we just saw when
| | 02:15 | we were creating a new wall. Here at
the Type Selector, we've got the same
| | 02:19 | choices, and I could open this list
up and I could actually even choose a
| | 02:23 | completely different type of wall, if I
wanted to, like an Exterior Insulation
| | 02:27 | Finish System wall.
| | 02:28 | The wall did get slightly thinner, I
don't know if you noticed that or not.
| | 02:32 | And if we were to look at it in
another view, we would actually see that the
| | 02:34 | finish material has actually changed.
| | 02:36 | We could change the Location Line of
the wall or the heights or constraints
| | 02:40 | of the wall, any of those settings we could
change directly on the Properties palette.
| | 02:45 | But let's do one that's a
little bit more evident.
| | 02:48 | For example, I'm going to scroll down
here and I'm going to double-click on the
| | 02:52 | South elevation to open that view up
and zoom in just a touch, and I'm going to
| | 02:58 | select this window right here now.
| | 02:59 | If we look at the Properties palette, it
tells me that this is a double casement
| | 03:03 | window and it's on Level 1
with a Sill Height of 3 feet.
| | 03:07 | Now if I click right there, I can
actually change that height directly here in
| | 03:11 | the Properties palette.
| | 03:12 | So it's just another example of
making that kind of a modification.
| | 03:16 | So if I put in 2 here and I press enter,
it doesn't appear like anything has
| | 03:21 | actually taken place.
| | 03:22 | Well, you have to actually apply the
change. Revit allows you to make multiple
| | 03:26 | changes on the Properties palette
and then apply them all in one step.
| | 03:30 | So you can do that in one of two ways,
you can use this Apply button down
| | 03:33 | here and click it, and you'll see that
will actually apply the change and move
| | 03:38 | the window, or suppose I wanted to
change my mind and go back to 3 feet, I
| | 03:43 | can simply move my mouse away from the
palette, and programmers like to call
| | 03:48 | this shifting focus.
| | 03:49 | So if we shift our focus away
from the Properties palette that will
| | 03:53 | automatically apply the change.
| | 03:55 | Okay, so those are the two ways
that we can apply one or more changes.
| | 03:59 | The next part of the palette I want
to point out to is this little small
| | 04:02 | dropdown right here.
| | 04:04 | Currently, it says Windows with a
quantity of 1, so Windows is the category of
| | 04:11 | the object we have selected, windows in
this case, and I have one item selected.
| | 04:15 | Now we're going to talk about selection
in an upcoming movie but for right now,
| | 04:20 | I'll just show you that if you use your
control key and I'm going to over here
| | 04:25 | and use the control key and select this
second window, this bay window here, you
| | 04:28 | can select an additional object,
more than one object at a time.
| | 04:31 | And what we'll see here is it still
says Windows because both of those
| | 04:35 | items share the same category, but now it
says quantity 2, I have two windows selected.
| | 04:41 | Now up here on the Type Selector, we
see something a little different, it says
| | 04:45 | Multiple Families Selected.
| | 04:48 | And that's because, at the moment,
the two objects I have selected are
| | 04:52 | two different families.
| | 04:53 | Now we talked about the differences
between category, family, and type in a
| | 04:57 | previous movie, so if you'd like to,
you could go back and review that now.
| | 05:01 | But we've got two separate families
selected here and you want to be a little
| | 05:04 | careful about this, because if I
changed it like to something dramatically
| | 05:08 | different 16' x 24" Fixed window, you
will see that that has a pretty dramatic
| | 05:14 | impact on both of those windows.
| | 05:16 | May or may not be the most architecturally
exciting change to make, so perhaps I
| | 05:20 | might want to undo that. I'm going to
use my Undo icon right here, or you could
| | 05:25 | press Control+Z on your keyboard.
| | 05:26 | Now I'm going to return to the Level
1 Floor Plan, and look at a few other
| | 05:32 | examples of that concept
that I just talked about.
| | 05:35 | So again, here's a plumbing fixture
family, I select it, it says Plumbing
| | 05:40 | Fixtures here, it says Plumbing
Fixtures here and the quantity is 1.
| | 05:45 | I can hold down my Control key and
select the second one and again I get
| | 05:48 | multiple families, because clearly a
toilet and a bathtub are different from one
| | 05:53 | another so they are two different
families even though they share the same
| | 05:57 | Plumbing Fixture category.
| | 05:58 | Now what would happen if you added a
third or fourth item to the selection that
| | 06:03 | was of a different category altogether?
| | 06:05 | Well now it's going to say multiple
categories are selected here and this
| | 06:11 | changes to just say Common.
| | 06:13 | Now what's interesting about this is
you'll notice this is a dropdown menu, so
| | 06:17 | you can actually open that up.
| | 06:19 | And in addition to Common with a
quantity of 3, you'll see that selection
| | 06:24 | actually contains 2
Plumbing Fixtures and 1 Wall.
| | 06:28 | Now it also says Floor Plan Level 1
down there, so you will always have the
| | 06:33 | current view listed at the bottom of
that list because the view itself, the
| | 06:40 | Floor Plan in this case, also has properties.
| | 06:44 | So by choosing an item here off the list,
I could edit the Walls properties and
| | 06:50 | change the kind of wall,
make that a generic wall.
| | 06:53 | I could choose the Plumbing Fixture
properties, change something about those.
| | 06:58 | Or I could go to the Floor Plan's
properties and change something about the
| | 07:02 | Floor Plan itself, maybe I want to
change the scale of the Floor Plan or the
| | 07:06 | level of detail that it displays.
| | 07:08 | So the Properties is a multifaceted
interface item that has many, many settings
| | 07:14 | that we can interact with.
| | 07:15 | And the key to using it successfully is
to pay close attention to these subtle
| | 07:19 | little nuances in its behavior.
| | 07:22 | So in some cases when you make a
multiple selection, like perhaps I select this
| | 07:26 | interior wall and then maybe this
wall that we drew a few moments ago, what
| | 07:30 | you'll see is that up here it still says
that we've got basic walls there's more
| | 07:36 | than one type selected, in addition,
some of these properties over here look a
| | 07:40 | little bizarre like particularly the Top
Constraint here, it actually has blanked
| | 07:46 | out implying that there is no setting.
| | 07:48 | What's really important here is, is want
you to understand is that that actually
| | 07:52 | doesn't mean necessarily
that there's no setting.
| | 07:54 | What it actually means is that
there's more than one setting.
| | 07:58 | So if you're not careful here, if
you went in here, and made some change,
| | 08:02 | like suppose I said Up to level 3,
the impact of that change might actually
| | 08:08 | be somewhat dramatic, if we switched
to another view, because now I have just
| | 08:14 | changed the height of both of those walls,
it may or may not be what I had intended.
| | 08:19 | So you need to pay close attention to
not only what you have selected but the
| | 08:25 | subtle little clues that the Properties
palette is giving you there in order to
| | 08:29 | be successful in your edits.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Project Browser| 00:01 | Your Revit project is a complete
virtual building model that can be viewed,
| | 00:04 | edited, and explored 3-dimensionally, 2-
dimensionally and in various reports and tabular lists.
| | 00:10 | Each such representation of your
project is referred to in Revit as a view.
| | 00:14 | Views are listed and
accessed in the Project Browser.
| | 00:17 | This functions like a table of contents
for your project in much the same way as
| | 00:21 | a table of contents for a book tells
you what the book contains, the Project
| | 00:26 | Browser will tell you what
views are contained in your project.
| | 00:29 | And you'll use it to
navigate to those various views.
| | 00:32 | So I'm in a file here called Condo, if you
would like to follow along, and we want to
| | 00:37 | look over here at the Project Browser.
The Project Browser palette is typically
| | 00:41 | located over on the left-hand corner
of the screen, now it can be moved or
| | 00:45 | relocated, it can even be closed,
but I certainly don't recommend doing that.
| | 00:48 | Let's start by what could happen if
the Project Browser, or in fact the
| | 00:53 | Properties palette that we talked about
in the previous movie, what happens if
| | 00:57 | one of those accidentally gets closed?
| | 00:59 | So I'm going to select right here and I'm
going to click the Close button and
| | 01:04 | let's say that was
accidental. So how do I get it back?
| | 01:07 | Well, if you go to the View tab on the
ribbon, and you look way over here on the
| | 01:12 | right-hand side, there's a item called
User Interface, open that up and all of
| | 01:17 | the parts and pieces of the User
Interface that are optional, if you will, have
| | 01:22 | check boxes here, here is the Project
Browser and I can just simply check that
| | 01:25 | box to restore it to its original location.
| | 01:28 | So if it ever goes missing on you, that's
how you can find it and get it back again.
| | 01:33 | The first item in the Project Browser is
at the very top, it says Views and then
| | 01:37 | in parenthesis, it says all.
| | 01:39 | That's just simply saying that we are
now saying all of the views that are
| | 01:43 | contained in this project.
| | 01:44 | And the default all grouping is divided
into typical drawing types, so you are
| | 01:50 | going to see a Floor Plans category, you're
going to see Ceiling Plans category,
| | 01:54 | 3D Views, Elevations, Sections, and so on.
| | 01:57 | Now beneath that you have also got
other major groupings like Legends, and
| | 02:01 | Schedules, and Sheets; we will talk
about some of those in future movies. Okay,
| | 02:06 | we'll look at some of them here.
| | 02:08 | So I'm looking at a 3D view right now,
perhaps I'd like to see a floor plan of
| | 02:12 | this project and maybe I'm
interested in the second floor plan.
| | 02:15 | So you can see here beneath the Floor
Plans, that each of the levels is listed
| | 02:19 | here, each of its Floor Plan views,
and there's Level 2. I'll just simply
| | 02:23 | double-click on that and that will
open up that floor plan on screen.
| | 02:26 | It's a pretty typical looking floor plan.
| | 02:29 | And what you'll see is, in addition to
the view opening here, the Project Browser
| | 02:34 | will show me Level 2 is now in bold,
and that is how we can tell that that is
| | 02:39 | currently the active view.
| | 02:41 | Now if you don't have anything selected,
you may recall in the previous movie
| | 02:44 | that it will also show you on the
Properties palette that I'm looking at Floor
| | 02:48 | Plan Level 2, so that's another
confirmation that I'm in that view.
| | 02:52 | Now if I want to try some other views, I
could open up maybe a Ceiling Plan or I
| | 02:57 | could take a look at one of the
Elevations, South elevation in this case, or
| | 03:02 | even one of the Section views.
| | 03:04 | And each time I open up one of these
views, again it will be confirmed for me in
| | 03:09 | bold there on the Project Browser.
| | 03:11 | Now there's other ways that
you can access views as well.
| | 03:15 | Notice that this section indicator
occurs right here, and if I hover over it
| | 03:20 | says that that's Views: Section: Section 2.
| | 03:23 | Now if look here on the Project Browser,
we're currently in Section 1 but there
| | 03:27 | is this second view here called Section 2.
| | 03:30 | So this section head right here
actually points to the section to view.
| | 03:35 | Now there's a few ways I could get to
that directly from this symbol, I could
| | 03:40 | either right-click on it and choose Go
to View, or notice the color here is a
| | 03:46 | dark blue color. That dark blue color
usually indicates for you that the view is
| | 03:51 | interactive or that that item on
screen is interactive in some way.
| | 03:54 | And if I just simply double-click it,
it's kind like a hyperlink in a web
| | 03:58 | page, and it will open up that view and
notice over here now Section 2 is bold and active.
| | 04:04 | Now you may notice that that blue color
occurs here on the section head and also
| | 04:08 | on these level heads over here.
| | 04:10 | If I zoom in slightly, that's Level 3, Level 2.
| | 04:13 | So if I double-click that, it will
return me back to my Level 2 floor plan.
| | 04:21 | There's a few different ways you
can switch from one view to the other,
| | 04:25 | but the Project Browser is always perhaps
one of your more convenient ways to do that.
| | 04:29 | Now new here in 2013, in the current
release, we can right-click any node on the
| | 04:36 | Project Browser and we can perform a Search.
| | 04:39 | This particular project only has a
handful of views so there's probably not too
| | 04:43 | much trouble in finding the
view that I'm looking for.
| | 04:46 | But if you're working for a large firm
that does large projects in Revit, you
| | 04:49 | might find yourself in a project that
has dozens if not hundreds of views, and
| | 04:53 | so this Search functionality
is going to be really helpful.
| | 04:56 | And I could start putting in a name here
like section, and click Next, and it will
| | 05:02 | go to the Sections category and then it
will go to Section 1 and then Section 2,
| | 05:07 | that will help me find the
particular view that I'm looking for.
| | 05:10 | Okay, so that's a nice new feature
that's been added here in the current release.
| | 05:14 | So our Project Browser gives us access to
all of the various views that are in a project.
| | 05:18 | It's really helpful if you just think of
it as the table of contents of your project.
| | 05:22 | You use the table of contents to find
the item you are looking for and then you
| | 05:25 | go to that location.
| | 05:26 | You can do the same thing with the
browser, find the view that you want to
| | 05:28 | work on, double-click it and open it up to
perform whatever action you need to perform.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Navigating views: Zooming, panning, and rotating| 00:00 | Learning how to navigate in the various
views in a Revit project is an important skill.
| | 00:05 | So in this movie, I'd like to show you
how to do some basic actions like zoom
| | 00:09 | and pan, and how to orbit a 3D view.
| | 00:11 | So I am in a file here called Condo
and we are going to use this just as a
| | 00:16 | backdrop to do some view navigation.
| | 00:17 | You can really open up any file you like.
| | 00:19 | Now the easiest way to navigate a
view is to use the wheel on your mouse.
| | 00:23 | So if you don't have wheel mouse,
you definitely want to invest in one.
| | 00:27 | If you roll the wheel it will zoom out, if
you roll down and if I roll up it will zoom in.
| | 00:33 | Now you'll notice that the zooming is
taking place pretty much where my mouse is.
| | 00:37 | So if I move my mouse say over here on
top of the building, and then repeat that
| | 00:43 | you'll see that the zooming is
more centered on that location.
| | 00:46 | Move it over here in the
parking lot, same thing.
| | 00:49 | So you can control not only the level
of zoom, but where the zoom is focused on
| | 00:53 | simply by the way you move
the mouse and roll the wheel.
| | 00:56 | Now if you hold in the wheel and
drag, then we are panning the screen.
| | 01:01 | So this doesn't change the navigation
it just sort of shuffles things around.
| | 01:04 | So let's say you did zoom in over here,
but you realized you're a little off
| | 01:08 | screen you can just re-center easy
enough by dragging with the wheel.
| | 01:11 | Now I am in a 3D view right now, so
there's one more trick we can do with the
| | 01:16 | wheel here in a 3D view.
| | 01:18 | If you hold down the Shift key and
then drag with the wheel you'll see the
| | 01:22 | cursor changes shape to this little
spiny wheel and now I'm orbiting my model
| | 01:27 | and this works in 3D views only.
| | 01:29 | So I can spin around and get a
better look here of what I'm seeing.
| | 01:34 | Now if I come over here to my
Project Browser and we talked about Project
| | 01:37 | Browser in a previous movie, and I
double-click the Level 1 Floor Plan view;
| | 01:42 | this is a 2D view, this is showing me
just a plan version, the same wheel tricks
| | 01:47 | work, at least the first two, we can
roll the wheel to zoom in, we can drag the
| | 01:52 | wheel to pan around. You can't do
the orbit trick, that will just pan.
| | 01:57 | So even if I'm holding down my Shift
key, it doesn't spin this into 3D view
| | 02:02 | because this is a two dimensional view.
| | 02:04 | In Revit, it's either 2D view or
it's a 3D view.
| | 02:07 | Now there are other ways we can zoom.
| | 02:09 | If you look over here on the right-hand
side of the screen there is this little
| | 02:14 | ghosted out toolbar, when I move my
mouse away, it's sort of ghosted out and then
| | 02:17 | when I get closer it becomes brighter.
| | 02:20 | This is the navigation bar and the
lower portion of that navigation bar has a
| | 02:25 | small little zoom pop-up menu.
| | 02:28 | And you could see there are several
ways to zoom here, and I think most of these
| | 02:32 | are fairly self-explanatory, but let's
just walk though a few of them just the
| | 02:36 | same. The very first one
is called Zoom in Region.
| | 02:38 | So here is the way that works.
| | 02:40 | When I select that command, I get a
little magnifying glass cursor and you
| | 02:43 | just simply click two opposite points on
screen and it will zoom in to that rectangle.
| | 02:51 | If I click the little dropdown again
and I want to return back to where I
| | 02:55 | previously was, I can use this one
right here Previous Zoom and Pan.
| | 02:59 | Now notice how I was able to choose
the item off the dropdown and it went
| | 03:05 | immediately to that command, but if
the command is already on the top of the
| | 03:10 | pile, then I just click the
mouse and it takes me there.
| | 03:14 | So notice Zoom in Region is still
here and it stays on the top of the pile.
| | 03:19 | Well, let's say that I wanted to do a
different one like zoom out two times,
| | 03:24 | that's pretty self-explanatory. It
just halves the magnification on-screen.
| | 03:29 | Notice how that command
just took the top of the pile?
| | 03:32 | So if I wanted to use that again, I
would just click it again, but if I wanted a
| | 03:37 | different one I would open up the list
and choose it like this one right here
| | 03:41 | Zoom to Fit, that would just fit
the screen to the entire drawing.
| | 03:45 | So lets look at one more here. We've
got one here called Zoom to Sheet Size.
| | 03:49 | The command is called Zoom to Sheet Size,
but I think you can actually think of
| | 03:52 | it as zoom to scale, and it probably
will make a little bit more sense.
| | 03:56 | If we look at the bottom left-hand
corner of the drawing window, you can see
| | 04:01 | that this particular drawing is
currently set to 1/4" equals a foot.
| | 04:05 | Now if you go to Zoom to Sheet Size,
and you look at your own screen and sort
| | 04:10 | of mentally measure this door here, you
probably have a pretty good idea of how
| | 04:15 | big a door should be at quarter inch
equals a foot and it's probably pretty
| | 04:18 | close on your screen.
| | 04:19 | Now it's not super accurate. I wouldn't
recommend getting out a scale ruler and
| | 04:23 | measuring your screen because computer
screens don't do a really accurate job
| | 04:28 | like printed paper output would, but
it's close, and the intention is to give you
| | 04:33 | an idea of what this thing
will look like when it prints out.
| | 04:37 | So that's why they call it Zoom to Sheet Size.
| | 04:38 | Notice, I can very clearly see the two
lines in the door panel and over here I
| | 04:44 | can see the two lines in the back of the chair.
| | 04:46 | So I have an appropriate level of
detail here, if I open up this pop-up and
| | 04:51 | change the scale to something smaller, let's
say I went to 16th of an inch equals a foot.
| | 04:57 | Now of course, the most obvious thing I
see is all the text gets super large and
| | 05:01 | I'll talk about that in a future movie,
but what I want to do is come over here
| | 05:04 | and click Zoom to Sheet Size again, and
you'll see that it doesn't change the
| | 05:10 | zoom on screen very much at all,
because the scale now is so much smaller.
| | 05:14 | Again, look at the door. The size of
that door is about right for a 16th inch
| | 05:19 | scale, but notice I can't resolve the
two parallel lines anymore, everything is
| | 05:24 | kind of muddy and bleeding together.
| | 05:26 | So the purpose of Zoom to Sheet Size
is, it's a great tool for you to tell
| | 05:30 | whether or not your view is set to the
correct scale or not, or not necessarily
| | 05:34 | the correct scale, but an appropriate scale.
| | 05:36 | So I am going to set this view back to
quarter inch, which is certainly more
| | 05:40 | appropriate for this drawing. Those
are some of our common Zoom commands.
| | 05:44 | So you can either use your wheel,
which I think is certainly the easiest and
| | 05:48 | most immediate way to zoom in and out
and change the view of the screen, or
| | 05:52 | you can use the controls and the navigation
bar as an alternative to your wheel mouse.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| The basics of selecting and modifying| 00:00 | Selecting elements is a basic skill
required to be successful in Revit.
| | 00:04 | Most modifications you perform in Revit
rely on a selection of elements in the
| | 00:08 | model and a basic understanding of how to
manipulate those elements in the Revit environment.
| | 00:12 | In this movie, we'll take a high-level
look at some of these critical skills.
| | 00:16 | So I'm in a file here called Condo Unit.
| | 00:19 | Now if you look at the status bar,
at the very bottom of my screen with
| | 00:23 | nothing selected, you have already
got some clues as to how we can make
| | 00:26 | selections in Revit.
| | 00:28 | The message currently says, Click to
select, TAB for alternates, CTRL adds,
| | 00:33 | and SHIFT unselects.
| | 00:35 | So I'd like to start with those
methods right there, because those are really
| | 00:38 | the most basic ways that we can make selections.
| | 00:41 | Click to select is pretty obvious.
| | 00:43 | You just simply put your mouse on an object,
and click on it and you have a selection.
| | 00:47 | You get some nice feedback on screen,
the object will typically highlight
| | 00:51 | in this bluish color.
| | 00:52 | Now you can modify these colors if you
like and we'll be talking about some of
| | 00:56 | the Revit options in a future movie, so
that's certainly one of the options you can do.
| | 01:01 | But the default selection color in
Revit architecture is this bluish color.
| | 01:05 | As I select other objects, what you'll
see is the first object will be deselected.
| | 01:10 | So by default, in Revit, each time
you click, it creates a new selection
| | 01:17 | or selection set.
| | 01:20 | You select an object and if you
don't use any of the modifier keys that
| | 01:23 | are indicated down there on the status bar,
any previous election will be deselected.
| | 01:28 | Following that, if you click an empty
space, that will deselect completely
| | 01:34 | anything that you currently have selected.
| | 01:37 | The easiest way to deselect
everything is to just simply click in a blank
| | 01:41 | area of the screen.
| | 01:42 | Now if you want to select more than
one object, then the easiest way to do
| | 01:47 | that is to click the first, hold down
the Control key on your keyboard, you'll
| | 01:52 | see a small little plus sign appear next to
the cursor and then you click the second object.
| | 01:58 | Now we have talked briefly about this in
some of the previous movies if I select
| | 02:02 | another similar object, the feedback
that I get here in the various locations
| | 02:07 | will indicate for me what I have selected.
| | 02:09 | So in this case, I have selected two
walls of the same type and family.
| | 02:14 | And so there's a lot of similar
modification that I could start to do to all of those.
| | 02:18 | As I add additional objects however, I
would get a Multi-Select and I would get
| | 02:23 | fewer options available on the
Properties palette and on the ribbon.
| | 02:27 | Depending on what kind of modification
you are planning to make, you want to be
| | 02:31 | careful about the kinds of selections you make.
| | 02:33 | Now let's say that I made that selection
but I accidentally selected the toilet,
| | 02:38 | I didn't really want that.
| | 02:39 | We can use a different modifier key,
the Shift key, notice that I get a
| | 02:43 | minus sign next to my cursor, and I can
click it again to deselect using the Shift key.
| | 02:50 | You'd want to do it that way as opposed
to clicking out an empty space because
| | 02:55 | as we have already said, if you click
an empty space, that deselects everything
| | 02:59 | and you'd have to start over again.
| | 03:01 | And it's a little bit quicker to just
remove one object from a selection than it
| | 03:06 | is to start all over again. Certainly
straightforward, but not necessarily the
| | 03:10 | fastest way to do things.
| | 03:13 | What about Tab for alternates?
| | 03:15 | Now this is a very powerful and
unique Revit feature that we have,
| | 03:18 | so let's take a look at that. I'm
going to put my mouse in this general area
| | 03:23 | right here next to this door.
| | 03:24 | Now notice the door highlights and as
we've talked about in some of the previous
| | 03:28 | movies I get a tooltip giving me
some information about that door.
| | 03:31 | That's how you verify what kind
of object you're about to select.
| | 03:35 | Now this is called pre-highlighting
right here, I haven't clicked yet.
| | 03:38 | If I move my mouse away, that pre-
highlighting goes away until you actually
| | 03:43 | click it's not selected.
| | 03:46 | If I put my mouse right there, and this
time I'm going to press and release Tab,
| | 03:51 | don't hold it down, you press the Tab
key and release, you're going to see it
| | 03:55 | jumped the selection over to the nearby wall.
| | 03:59 | Now the reason you don't want to hold
the Tab down is you'll get something like
| | 04:03 | this, it kind of looks like a strobe light.
| | 04:05 | So you want to put your mouse over an
object, pre-highlight it, press Tab.
| | 04:08 | And then watch what happens if I Tab a
second time, this is called chain selection.
| | 04:13 | And if you look at the status line, you
are going to see chain of walls or lines.
| | 04:17 | Now this is a very
powerful way to select objects.
| | 04:20 | If I click the mouse here, it's
going to select both of those walls.
| | 04:24 | Now a lot of people make this mistake.
| | 04:27 | They will put their mouse here, press Tab,
press Tab again, say yeah that's what
| | 04:32 | I want and then move the mouse.
| | 04:35 | So you're not done yet until you click
so it goes highlight, Tab, Tab, click,
| | 04:41 | until you click you haven't made a selection.
| | 04:44 | Now there it was just two walls.
What if I have lots of walls?
| | 04:48 | Well the Tab can be really
powerful if you're out here somewhere.
| | 04:52 | Suppose I highlight this wall right
here and press Tab, now look at the
| | 04:56 | chain that I'm getting. This goes all the way
around the entire perimeter of the entire model.
| | 05:01 | And if I click the mouse, I've
selected all of those objects.
| | 05:05 | Now notice right here there's a break
between this wall and this wall, so I'm
| | 05:10 | going to deselect one more time, put
my mouse right here, Tab, but before I
| | 05:14 | click, watch what happens
if I move my mouse slightly.
| | 05:18 | So if I'm more to the inside, it shifts to
the inside chain, and there's the outside chain.
| | 05:24 | Now this only works if you happen to
have a situation like this, where you have
| | 05:29 | two different chains that are possible,
and then I click to make the selection.
| | 05:33 | With a little bit of practice, you can
use that chain selection and really do
| | 05:38 | some very quick and powerful selections that
otherwise would take an awful lot of effort.
| | 05:43 | If you look over here on my Properties
palette, I have 10 walls selected, to do
| | 05:47 | that with the control key would be 10
clicks and if you miss and click an empty
| | 05:51 | space on the 9th one, it deselects
everything and then you are just frustrated.
| | 05:56 | There's a couple of other selection
methods that also will speed things up.
| | 06:00 | We have window and crossing
selections or so called box selections.
| | 06:04 | Now the way these work, you make a box
on screen, a selection box and everything
| | 06:10 | within the box will get
selected and it works one of two ways.
| | 06:14 | If you click, hold down, and drag,
if you go from left to right, you get
| | 06:20 | a window selection.
| | 06:21 | If you go from right to left,
you get a crossing selection.
| | 06:24 | And you see the difference? From left to
right, it is a solid edge, from right to
| | 06:29 | left it's a dashed edge.
| | 06:30 | Dashed edge only has to touch objects,
solid edge has to completely surround them.
| | 06:35 | So let me show you.
| | 06:37 | I'm going to click inside this bedroom,
start to drag, notice that nothing is
| | 06:41 | highlighting, until I completely
surround it. You see those two doors? And if I
| | 06:47 | keep going and make a bigger box, I'll
eventually start capturing more and more stuff.
| | 06:52 | But notice that it's not capturing
either of the walls that make up the
| | 06:58 | boundary of the bathroom.
| | 06:59 | I'm not getting the vertical wall in
the right. I'm not getting the horizontal
| | 07:03 | wall at the bottom, all I'm getting is
the stuff that was completely in the box.
| | 07:08 | And I'm going to deselect and I'm going to
drag it this way instead, watch the difference.
| | 07:12 | Now you see how it highlights those
walls? And I only need to touch these
| | 07:16 | objects with my selection window, and
now I'm getting the same stuff in addition
| | 07:21 | to these two walls here.
| | 07:23 | You can use all of these methods together.
| | 07:26 | So I have a selection.
| | 07:28 | Now I can hold down the Control key
and make additional selections using any
| | 07:33 | of these methods, hold down the Shift key,
and remove objects and it all works together.
| | 07:39 | So it's not one or the other. I could
do a highlight, Tab, Control+Click and
| | 07:46 | add that to the selection, highlight, Tab,
Shift+Click and remove that from the selection.
| | 07:54 | As a final selection method and
perhaps our most powerful one of all, we can
| | 07:58 | start off by selecting too much
stuff and then look up here on the ribbon
| | 08:04 | for this Filter button.
| | 08:05 | The Filter button allows us to look at
the categories that are included in the
| | 08:11 | selection we've just made, it'll give us
a quantity for each of those categories
| | 08:16 | and we can uncheck the objects
that we're not interested in.
| | 08:20 | So let's say that I was not interested
in any plumbing, or mechanical equipment
| | 08:24 | in this current selection, I can click
OK and it removes the furnace and the
| | 08:30 | water heater from the selection.
| | 08:33 | Now maybe I don't want the washer
and dryer as well, that's the specialty
| | 08:37 | equipment in Generic models, so I
can take those items out as well.
| | 08:40 | And I also got the stove and the
refrigerator removed from the selection.
| | 08:44 | But now I'm left with just the base
architecture and I can do something to that
| | 08:48 | selection, move it, copy it, rotate it,
or new in 2013, I can save it. This is a
| | 08:56 | slightly more advanced feature and we
can talk about this maybe a little bit
| | 09:00 | later in the course, but it works very simply
like this, you click Save, you give it a name,
| | 09:06 | and then later, if you want you can
load that selection, and click OK and
| | 09:12 | it will remember it.
| | 09:13 | So nothing is selected, I go to the
Manage tab, I click load, I select kitchen,
| | 09:19 | I click OK, and now it's selected.
| | 09:22 | To make any modification in the Revit
project, you'd need to master selection.
| | 09:26 | It is one of our most basic
skills that we have to have.
| | 09:30 | So you definitely want to open up a
file and practice, use your Control and
| | 09:33 | Shift key, your windows and crossings,
your Tab selection, very powerful, and
| | 09:37 | your filter selection, equally as powerful.
| | 09:39 | Make sure that you've practiced each of
these, you're comfortable with each one
| | 09:43 | of these and you'd be very glad you did
because it will make everything you do
| | 09:47 | in Revit that much easier to accomplish.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Accessing Revit options| 00:00 | Most computer programs have
user-configurable options.
| | 00:03 | In this movie, we are going to take
a quick look at the Options dialog in
| | 00:07 | Revit and some of the settings that you may
want to consider modifying on your own systems.
| | 00:11 | I am in a file called Condo Unit, but
it doesn't really matter which file you
| | 00:15 | have open for this, we are not actually
going to change the file in anyway, we
| | 00:19 | are going to really focus our energy
up here on the Application menu, the big
| | 00:23 | R in the corner of the screen.
| | 00:25 | And if you open that up and you look way
down here toward the bottom, there's an
| | 00:29 | Options button right here, and if I
click on that it brings up this multi-tabbed
| | 00:34 | Options window which has
many user-configurable settings.
| | 00:37 | Now I am not going to go through
every single setting in here but I am just
| | 00:40 | going to highlight a few of the
important ones that you might be interested in
| | 00:43 | or some of the ones that you would be
likely to be curious about right away.
| | 00:47 | And let's start with save reminders.
| | 00:50 | If you've been working on the computer for
a while then you know how important it is to save.
| | 00:54 | In Revit, it is no exception.
| | 00:56 | You need to actually save yourself with the
controls S or the Save icon on a regular basis;
| | 01:03 | Revit does not automatically save for you.
| | 01:06 | However Revit will remind you at a set
interval and that's controlled right here.
| | 01:11 | You could see that the default Save
reminder interval is 30 minutes, and the
| | 01:16 | way this works is if 30 minutes has
passed, since the last time you saved,
| | 01:20 | Revit will look for the most
inconvenient time to display a dialog and alert
| | 01:25 | you that it's time to save.
| | 01:27 | And they do it disruptively like that
on purpose because the idea is to make
| | 01:32 | sure that you remember
how important it is to save.
| | 01:35 | So they wait until you execute a command
and then they say, oh but hold on a second!
| | 01:39 | You haven't saved in a while.
| | 01:41 | You can change this increment if
you're not happy with 30 minutes, you can go
| | 01:45 | down 15 or up to four hours.
| | 01:47 | I don't recommend turning it off, I
think it's a really good idea to keep some
| | 01:50 | sort of save reminder turned on.
| | 01:52 | In a future movie, we are going to
talk about the work sharing feature and
| | 01:56 | that's where the Username
setting will become important.
| | 01:58 | And in addition the Worksharing
Frequency Update and the Synchronize with
| | 02:02 | Central Reminders will
also be part of works sharing.
| | 02:04 | So we'll discuss both of
those in a future movie as well.
| | 02:08 | The Default view discipline is a
setting that we can modify and you can choose
| | 02:13 | which discipline, the majority of the
work you do is, and that will have an
| | 02:17 | impact on the tabs and template
settings that are used for you by default, but
| | 02:21 | you can always choose other options regardless
of what you pick here. That's just your default.
| | 02:26 | Under User Interface your tab might
vary depending on whether you're using one
| | 02:31 | of the Building Design suites or
whether you're using Revit Architecture like I
| | 02:35 | have here, so the exact settings might
be a little bit different, but we can do
| | 02:39 | things like change the Active
theme and how much Tooltip assistance.
| | 02:43 | We've been seeing these tooltips
appear on screen, let me show you what some
| | 02:47 | of that looks like.
| | 02:48 | If I highlight a particular command you
see that we get a small tooltip and then
| | 02:53 | a larger one, here is probably a
better example, here is the Wall command.
| | 02:57 | See you get the small tooltip and then there
is a larger one that includes an illustration.
| | 03:02 | That is the normal tooltip
behavior right here where it says Normal.
| | 03:07 | If you go to Minimal you only get the
small tooltip and it never goes to the
| | 03:11 | larger one, if you go to high it goes
right to the more detailed tooltip and
| | 03:17 | bypasses the Minimal one in between, and
of course, if you don't want tooltips at
| | 03:21 | all you can turn them off.
| | 03:22 | I highly recommend either Normal or High
and read those because it's a great way
| | 03:26 | to learn about each command.
| | 03:28 | You may recall in the contextual ribbon
tab movie that we talked about how when
| | 03:33 | you select an object, it would jump
over to the Modify tab and show you
| | 03:37 | settings for that object.
| | 03:38 | That's actually controlled
by this check box right here.
| | 03:41 | So if you don't like that behavior you
can uncheck that and it won't change tabs
| | 03:45 | on you, but I happen to think that it's
a good thing to have a change tab so I
| | 03:49 | like to leave that setting turned on.
| | 03:52 | Here you get to control some of your
default tab behavior as well, when you
| | 03:56 | deselect do you want it to return to
the previous tab or do you want it to Stay
| | 04:01 | on the modify tab, for example.
| | 04:03 | So the Graphics tab is mostly
concerned with your video card settings and
| | 04:06 | background colors and your selection
colors, and so forth, and you could see here
| | 04:10 | that in some cases it will give you a
useful message, like I have an older video
| | 04:14 | card driver installed in my system.
| | 04:16 | So it might be a good idea for me to
actually go to the manufacturer's web site,
| | 04:20 | NVIDIA in this case, and see whether
or not they have a more current video
| | 04:24 | driver for me to load.
| | 04:26 | Down here under Selection Colors we
talked a little bit about the blue color
| | 04:30 | that Revit uses by default in Revit
Architecture, if you're not happy with that
| | 04:33 | color you can make changes to it here.
| | 04:36 | You can also change the size of the
text that's used on the tooltips and the
| | 04:41 | dimensions on screen so that can be
helpful sometimes to increase that setting.
| | 04:46 | Where Revit accesses resources
from is controlled by File Locations.
| | 04:51 | So you may recall, back on the recent
file screen, in addition to Open and New,
| | 04:56 | we also had Architectural template and
Construction template, both of those are listed here.
| | 05:01 | If you want to add a company template
you can click this green plus sign here and
| | 05:06 | add your own company template to the
list and make it easily accessible.
| | 05:11 | If you want to change the location
where you're saving files or what you're
| | 05:14 | using as the default template, some
of those settings are listed here.
| | 05:18 | This course is not to get into
rendering, we actually have a Revit Rendering
| | 05:24 | course here at lynda.com, so I
recommend that you check that out after you're
| | 05:27 | done with Essentials here, but settings
for rendering would be controlled there.
| | 05:31 | Most spell checking settings are
pretty self-explanatory, and then
| | 05:35 | SteeringWheels and ViewCube are both on-
screen navigation tools and we'll have an
| | 05:40 | opportunity to look at both of those
in some of the future movies, but if you
| | 05:44 | don't like some of the default behaviors
of either of those two interface items,
| | 05:48 | you can look at changing those here.
If you install any Macros in the custom
| | 05:52 | programs into your system you
can control the behavior here.
| | 05:55 | So I am not going to really change
any of the settings here, just a quick
| | 05:59 | overview of how some of those
settings function, probably the ones that you
| | 06:02 | would be most concerned with at an
early stage of working in Revit is making
| | 06:06 | sure your save reminders are at a
good useful interval for you and possibly
| | 06:10 | looking at changing some your
selection colors or your username setting or
| | 06:14 | looking at that video card.
| | 06:16 | So there's a quick look at
the Options dialog in Revit.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Starting a ProjectCreating a new project from a template| 00:00 | All the work you do in Revit is
contained in a single Revit project file.
| | 00:04 | There is a few different ways that
we can create new projects in Revit,
| | 00:08 | we can use the Recent Files screen or
the Application menu, both of these which
| | 00:11 | we've looked at in a previous movie.
| | 00:13 | So I want to focus just on
the new file creation areas.
| | 00:17 | Here we've got New or the Architectural
and Construction Template, or under the
| | 00:22 | big R, the Application menu we
can go to New > Project.
| | 00:26 | Now there is not a whole lot of
difference between which ways you choose it.
| | 00:30 | If I choose New Project here, it brings
up a dialog, New Project, and it lists out
| | 00:34 | for me those same two
templates that we saw listed here.
| | 00:38 | And if I click this new link I get
the same dialog, so it's really the
| | 00:42 | same command either way.
| | 00:44 | The difference would be if you're
already in a project then you wouldn't see the
| | 00:48 | Recent Files screen, so you'd
want to use the Application menu.
| | 00:51 | Now the differences between the
Architectural Template and the Construction
| | 00:54 | Template are something that I
want to look at here in this movie.
| | 00:58 | So if I choose the Architectural
Template and I click OK and I could've gotten
| | 01:02 | there with that shortcut, I get
a really basic starting point.
| | 01:07 | If we look at the Project Browser, we
get a Level 1 and Level 2 Floor Plan,
| | 01:11 | we've got a couple of
Ceiling Plans and a few Elevations.
| | 01:14 | There are no sheets, there are no
schedules, it's a really, really basic project.
| | 01:19 | It's sort of like a no frills, just
get me into the program sort of project.
| | 01:24 | But there are lots and lots of
settings or lots of things that can be
| | 01:28 | pre-configured in a project template.
| | 01:30 | Now I am going to just show you a
couple examples by closing this, not going to
| | 01:35 | save it, and opening up some of the
other templates to take a look, and I'll start
| | 01:39 | with his contraction template right
here, just as a point of contrast.
| | 01:43 | When I open that, the screen
here looks pretty much the same.
| | 01:47 | But if you look at the Project Browser
you can see that there are some differences.
| | 01:51 | Instead of just having Level 1 and
Level 2 Floor Plan, I now have some
| | 01:55 | additional floor plans showing in the list.
| | 01:58 | Under 3D Views, I have several
additional views showing in the list.
| | 02:02 | And if I scroll even further down, I
have some Schedules, quite a few actually,
| | 02:09 | and I have some Sheets already.
| | 02:11 | Now let me show you how some of this works.
| | 02:15 | All of those views don't really tell us
very much unless there's something to view.
| | 02:19 | So I am just going to come over here
and add a wall, and don't worry about the
| | 02:24 | specifics right now, we'll be talking
about walls and doors in a future movie,
| | 02:28 | but I'm going to add a wall and a
couple of quick doors, and zoom in here,
| | 02:35 | and this one is door
number 1, you can see right there.
| | 02:40 | This one is door number 2, you can see it
right there, and this one is door number
| | 02:45 | 3, you can see it right there.
| | 02:47 | Now if I scroll down and look at one of
these other views, like a South Elevation,
| | 02:53 | you can already see the wall and the
three doors, or perhaps this Door Quantity
| | 02:59 | Schedule. What you see here is that
there is a single line item listed here, but
| | 03:05 | it says the count is three.
| | 03:08 | So it's recognizing that I actually
have three different doors on that list.
| | 03:12 | Now if I go back to Level 1 and I
select one of these doors and change it to
| | 03:18 | something else, it gets a little
smaller, scroll down, open up that same one,
| | 03:25 | you'll see I now get two different line items.
| | 03:28 | So this was the construction template
and if you look at the names of these
| | 03:33 | schedules they all start with either qa
or qc, for quantities or quality control.
| | 03:41 | So the kinds of things that a
contractor might be interested in is counting
| | 03:45 | stuff or verifying that
everything is the way it should be.
| | 03:50 | But they're certainly interested in
the quantities that that would be in the
| | 03:53 | model, so that they could order
the correct materials and make sure
| | 03:56 | everything gets to the site.
| | 03:58 | So you can see that all these schedules
are pre-configured to list out that kind
| | 04:03 | of information, so that they just
simply start drawing and these lists are
| | 04:08 | already populating themselves automatically.
| | 04:10 | So this is one of the really powerful
benefits of starting with a template.
| | 04:14 | I am going to close this one
and I'm not going to save it.
| | 04:19 | And there are a few other templates
that are provided, and I want to just show
| | 04:23 | you what a couple of those look like,
and to do that I am going to click the New
| | 04:27 | link here and go to Browse this time.
| | 04:30 | Construction and default are listed here.
| | 04:33 | Default is actually what they're
calling the Architectural Template;
| | 04:36 | that was that really simple
one that had very little in it.
| | 04:39 | And Construction is the
one that we just looked at.
| | 04:41 | But there's also a Commercial and a
Residential-Default listed here as well.
| | 04:46 | Now we are going to begin a project
here in the coming movies and we are going
| | 04:50 | to start it with the Commercial-
Default and let me just show you what that
| | 04:53 | template looks like.
| | 04:54 | So I am going to choose it right there,
click OK, and take a look, we've got some
| | 05:00 | different Floor Plans, Elevations,
simpler Schedules this time, you know, just a
| | 05:06 | basic Door Schedule, basic Room
Schedule, but this one's got a whole bunch of
| | 05:10 | Sheets already in here.
| | 05:11 | So here's what I'm going to do.
| | 05:13 | I am going add a wall, again don't
worry too much about the specifics, I
| | 05:17 | am going to add a door to that wall, again
don't worry too much about those specifics.
| | 05:23 | Now if I scroll down here, we would
see that wall that I've just drawn from
| | 05:29 | either the South or one of the other
elevations like the West or the East. Here
| | 05:33 | is what it looks like from the South,
here's what it looks like from the West.
| | 05:37 | Okay we are just sort of seeing it
edge on, I drew it at a slight angle.
| | 05:42 | If I scroll down here you'll see that
there is a couple sheets that are listed
| | 05:46 | here that already are set up for Elevations.
| | 05:48 | A4 has the North and South Elevation;
| | 05:51 | A5 has the East and West Elevation.
| | 05:53 | I am going to open up A4 by
double-clicking on it right here.
| | 05:57 | And what you see is this right here is
the North Elevation, that's number 2.
| | 06:04 | This one's the South Elevation, that's number 1.
| | 06:07 | Here is the model, here is the model.
| | 06:09 | Now if I return to my floor plan, Level
1 Floor Plan and you zoom in here, this
| | 06:16 | is the West Elevation, that's number 2 on A5.
| | 06:20 | The ones we just looked at are this one,
number 1 on A4 and this one number 2 on A4.
| | 06:31 | Revit automatically inputs the drawing
number and the drawing reference directly
| | 06:37 | in the symbols for us, and when you
start in one of these templates that's
| | 06:41 | already pre-configured this way, you can
basically just start drawing your model
| | 06:45 | in the correct location.
| | 06:47 | And you're already getting Schedules
that are populating themselves, like the
| | 06:50 | one we saw a moment ago in the
Construction Template or Sheets that are showing
| | 06:54 | appropriate views already.
| | 06:56 | There is a lot of things that can be pre-built
and put into the template to get you started.
| | 07:00 | Now there is a lot of stuff that you can't
put in the template automatically as well.
| | 07:05 | So in the next few movies we're
going to be looking at some of the early
| | 07:07 | project set up things that we would
want to do like setting up levels and
| | 07:10 | setting up grids, and so forth.
| | 07:12 | So your template can only take you so far,
but it's a great place to get started
| | 07:16 | and you are highly recommended to
always start your Revit projects with an
| | 07:21 | appropriate template.
| | 07:22 | Now many of you may actually be in a
firm that has their own custom template.
| | 07:27 | So rather than choosing from one of the
ones I've just shown you here, which are
| | 07:31 | really just examples, you might be
using one that comes from your office
| | 07:34 | standards that somebody
there in your firm has created.
| | 07:36 | Regardless of the temple you start
with though, all projects should really be
| | 07:40 | begun with an appropriate template.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Accessing a multi-user project with worksharing| 00:01 | In this movie I want to talk
briefly about what we do when we have a
| | 00:05 | multiple-user team.
| | 00:06 | In Revit your entire project
lives in a single project file.
| | 00:10 | This raises a problem when you have
more than one person on a team because only
| | 00:14 | one person can access the
project file at a given time.
| | 00:17 | So this would not make it very
practical for teams to work together.
| | 00:21 | So what Revit offers is a
feature called worksharing.
| | 00:24 | With worksharing you have a central file, and
this file is typically stored on a network server.
| | 00:30 | It can be any network server;
| | 00:32 | any map drive will do the job.
| | 00:35 | And then each user on the project team
creates what we call a local version or a
| | 00:40 | local copy of this file that they
actually do their day-to-day work in.
| | 00:44 | The local copy is created literally on
the local hard drive and it maintains a
| | 00:50 | connection back to the central file.
| | 00:52 | And what happens is every so often
the users on the team will synchronize
| | 00:57 | with the central file that will take
their changes and publish them to the
| | 01:00 | central file, and any changes made by
their colleagues and bring them down and
| | 01:04 | update their local copy.
| | 01:05 | And in so doing, everybody is able to
work together on a project team and all
| | 01:10 | make changes to various parts of the project.
| | 01:12 | Now the challenge that we have is, in a
video course such as this, it's a little
| | 01:17 | difficult for me to demonstrate and
certainly to provide an exercise file for
| | 01:23 | you to work in on this.
| | 01:24 | So what I'm going to do is simply
demonstrate the process that you follow to
| | 01:28 | open and create a local copy.
| | 01:31 | And I'm going to do this because many of
you are probably working in firms where
| | 01:35 | you work together in the team and it's
going to be important for you to
| | 01:37 | understand that probably most projects
that you're going to work on in Revit are
| | 01:41 | going to be opened and created this way.
| | 01:43 | So you should at least know the basic steps,
| | 01:45 | but I definitely recommend that you talk
to your IT professionals, or your BIM, or
| | 01:49 | CAD manager and get the details of
how things are done in your firm.
| | 01:53 | Think of this as really just an overview of
the concept and a tool to help you get started.
| | 01:58 | So what I've done is set up sort of a
simulated network here on my system, and
| | 02:03 | I've created a file called Workshare
and I'm going to show you how you would
| | 02:06 | access that if it's a worksharing file.
| | 02:08 | So I would use my Open link or I could
go to my Application menu to get there,
| | 02:14 | and go to my network server, in this
case it's on my D: drive, and I've just
| | 02:19 | created a file called Your Office
Network to simulate this location.
| | 02:22 | When I open that file and I select the
central file, in this case it's a file
| | 02:27 | called Workshare, the most important
setting is down here at the bottom of the
| | 02:32 | screen, there is this Create New Local
check box and we want to absolutely make
| | 02:38 | sure that that's checked.
| | 02:39 | Now it's checked by default so you
shouldn't have to do anything here, it should
| | 02:42 | already be that way,
| | 02:44 | but you want to just double check
before you click Open that that's checked.
| | 02:47 | And what that will do is instead of
opening the central file which we don't want
| | 02:52 | to do, that would be considered a bad
thing, we want to make sure we're creating
| | 02:56 | a local copy, let me show
you what that looks like.
| | 02:57 | If I restore this down here, here is
the file called Workshare and notice
| | 03:02 | that at the end of that file it's added my
username, Paul Aubin, to the end of the name.
| | 03:07 | So I'm now working on a local copy
of this workshare-enabled project.
| | 03:13 | I could go about my work, make
whatever changes I want to make and then when
| | 03:17 | I'm ready, I would go to the
Collaborate tab or the Quick Access Toolbar and
| | 03:23 | use my Synchronize with Central command, and
you can see it located right here and right here.
| | 03:29 | This would maintain the
location back to the Central file;
| | 03:33 | it knows where that file lives.
| | 03:35 | And when I click OK, it would update
any changes that I've made to the Central
| | 03:39 | file and if any of my colleagues had
made changes it would pull those changes
| | 03:43 | down and update my local copy as well.
| | 03:47 | That's the way most teams are
working together using a Revit environment.
| | 03:51 | Now for the remainder of the
course, we're going to work in
| | 03:54 | stand-alone projects.
| | 03:55 | But I thought it was important for you
to at least understand that worksharing
| | 03:59 | is going to probably be the way that
most of your projects are going to be
| | 04:03 | setup, and so you're least aware of it.
| | 04:05 | I definitely recommend you talk to
some of your colleagues and your CAD and
| | 04:08 | BIM manager and make sure that you've
got the process down for what you do
| | 04:12 | there at your firm, but that's the
basic steps that are involved in opening
| | 04:15 | and creating a new local file.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring project settings| 00:00 | Many project settings are
available in a Revit project.
| | 00:02 | Even though you begin your project
with the template file, there are
| | 00:05 | certainly some settings that you'll want to
double-check and possibly change with each project.
| | 00:09 | Some of these include really simple
things like the project location, the
| | 00:12 | address and maybe the
temporary dimension settings.
| | 00:15 | So in this movie we're going to create a new
project and configure a few of those settings.
| | 00:19 | So let's take a look.
| | 00:21 | Now we could easily start with the
default template, but I'd actually prefer
| | 00:24 | to start with one of the templates that gives
us a little bit more structure to begin with.
| | 00:29 | So I'm going to click the New link right here.
| | 00:31 | If you watch the earlier movie on
Project Templates, then you saw that we
| | 00:35 | could click this Browse button here
and there were some other choices for us
| | 00:38 | to use, and in this case I'm going to
use the Commercial-Default and I'm going
| | 00:43 | to click Open and click OK.
| | 00:44 | Now this gives me some basic Views
and a few Schedules and some Sheets.
| | 00:51 | And so it's a good starting point for
us to build a small commercial office
| | 00:54 | building which is what
this project is going to be.
| | 00:57 | But before I start actually laying out
and drawing anything, I'm going to verify
| | 01:00 | a few of the settings that I
might want to use in this project.
| | 01:04 | And I do this on the Manage tab.
| | 01:06 | So I come over here to Manage and there
actually lots of settings that we could
| | 01:10 | look at here, I'm only going to
focus on a few for this movie.
| | 01:14 | Let's start with the Project Information.
| | 01:16 | So when I click here, you don't have to
do this right away, but it's not a bad
| | 01:21 | idea to do this early, it's pretty
basic stuff that you should know early on in
| | 01:25 | a project, like you might have some
idea of when the project is going to be
| | 01:29 | issued, I'm going to put
some date later this summer.
| | 01:31 | So I'm going to put in August 1st, 2012.
| | 01:35 | The Status of the project it might be
Design Development, you could put in the Owner.
| | 01:45 | The Project Address is the actual
street address that will occur on the title block.
| | 01:50 | So in this case, you know perhaps it's
on Main Street, Carpinteria, California.
| | 02:02 | Project Name might just be simply Office Park
and we'll give it a Project Number of 2012.01.
| | 02:11 | We can obviously change this
information anytime we like.
| | 02:14 | But that information, if we scroll down
here, will already fill in to several of
| | 02:22 | the fields in our title block, over here.
| | 02:24 | So you can see the owner's name and
the name of the project and the date
| | 02:29 | have all filled in.
| | 02:31 | So that's one of the settings
you might want to look at early on.
| | 02:34 | Some other settings you might want to
look is, and this is sometimes confusing
| | 02:38 | we just filled in the address, but
the address is just for the title block,
| | 02:42 | that's just going to fill in the
actual mailing address, but it doesn't
| | 02:45 | actually change the location of the
project, we have to do that with this
| | 02:49 | command right here.
| | 02:50 | So I'm going to click that, and let me make
this window just a little bit larger here.
| | 02:55 | And you could see that the
default templates go to Boston.
| | 02:59 | And that's because Revit is--the office
where Revit is created is here over here
| | 03:06 | in Waltham, Massachusetts, so
they've set Boston as the default location.
| | 03:10 | We just said that we were
in Carpinteria, California.
| | 03:15 | And if I click Search right here,
because this is using Internet mapping
| | 03:20 | service, it'll go right to that location.
| | 03:22 | Now this just accessed downtown Carpinteria,
and it gave me the latitude and longitude.
| | 03:27 | If we put in the exact address it
can go right to that street address.
| | 03:31 | You can also change the way this map is
displaying, maybe you want a Satellite
| | 03:34 | view, or a Hybrid view
or just a Street Map view.
| | 03:38 | You can drag it, you can roll your
wheel to zoom in and you can even pick this
| | 03:42 | little icon up and drag it around and
put it wherever it needs to go, so you
| | 03:49 | can either do it with an address or by typing
in, and get yourself in the general location.
| | 03:54 | Now this is important if you are going
to shadow studies or energy analysis or
| | 03:58 | anything that requires a
correct geographic location.
| | 04:02 | The wind stations and the weather
stations in Carpinteria are a little
| | 04:06 | different than the ones a couple
miles down the road, and so we'll get more
| | 04:10 | accurate weather data and more
accurate energy analysis if we get the address
| | 04:14 | as correct as possible.
| | 04:15 | So I'll go ahead and click OK there.
| | 04:18 | So those are few of the settings that we might
want to configure at the start of the project.
| | 04:22 | Now there are lots of other settings
that we could set and I'm not going to
| | 04:25 | go through all of them. We could do a whole
course on just the settings if we wanted to,
| | 04:29 | but many of these things
will be office standards.
| | 04:31 | We're going to rely on the settings
that come out of the box, but things like
| | 04:35 | Fill Patterns, and Line Styles and
Line Weights, all of these things can be
| | 04:38 | configured, and so you might want to
explore some of those later at your leisure.
| | 04:42 | The last step is really
to just save the project,
| | 04:45 | and since I've never saved it before,
it'll bring up a Save As dialog and I'll
| | 04:49 | just put this on my desktop for now,
but if you have another location where
| | 04:52 | you'd rather save it, you
can feel free to do that,
| | 04:54 | and I'll call this Office Park.
| | 04:56 | And I want to show you right here there's
an Options button, and if you want to
| | 05:03 | you can actually click in
here and make some modifications.
| | 05:07 | Now the one in particular that I want
to talk about is this setting right here,
| | 05:11 | Maximum backups, 20 is a bit much.
| | 05:13 | Often you'll see projects that use two or three.
| | 05:16 | I'm going to drop it down to 3 in this case.
| | 05:19 | What this will do, let me show you the
way this is going to work is, when you
| | 05:23 | OK this and you Save, now let me go back and
do Save As, there is the project I just created.
| | 05:32 | I am going to hit Cancel.
| | 05:33 | I want to save it again with the
Save icon or you can do Ctrl+S, the
| | 05:38 | Windows shortcut for save.
| | 05:40 | Now I'm going to do Save As
again just to access that folder.
| | 05:44 | And you see how I got an
Office Park.001? That's the backup.
| | 05:49 | So the way it works is, over here in Options
because I said 3, I'll get 01 then 02 then 03.
| | 05:56 | The next backup after that it'll take
the oldest 01, it will throw it away and
| | 06:02 | it'll create 04 and it'll
keep doing it like that.
| | 06:05 | So at any given time you'll have up
to three backups of your project file.
| | 06:10 | And this is useful of course if you
crash or something goes wrong, you can go
| | 06:14 | back and restore one of those earlier backups.
| | 06:16 | To restore you just simply open it
and then resave it with a new name.
| | 06:21 | So I'm going to Cancel out of there, because I
don't actually want to make any change there.
| | 06:23 | So we've created a new project, we've
configured a few of the basic settings and
| | 06:27 | now we're ready to start actually
building our building and we'll start doing
| | 06:31 | that in the next few movies.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding levels| 00:00 | Floor levels are one of the primary
organizational and structural constructs in Revit project.
| | 00:05 | In this movie we'll explore how to add
and manipulate the levels in our project.
| | 00:09 | Now levels are one of those datum
elements, if you recall a few movies back in
| | 00:14 | an earlier chapter where we were talking
about the different buckets that objects fell in.
| | 00:19 | Levels and grids, which we're going to look
at in the next movie, these are datum elements.
| | 00:24 | And a datum element is just an
organizational element that establishes
| | 00:27 | some known location in your project,
and with levels those known locations
| | 00:31 | are heights above zero.
| | 00:33 | So we're looking at a floor plan right
now, I'm in a project called Levels and
| | 00:38 | this is actually just a copy of the
project that we created in the last movie.
| | 00:42 | And this floor plan is
established at a particular height.
| | 00:45 | Now you can't see the height when
you're in a Floor Plan view, and in fact you
| | 00:49 | really can't do any manipulation to the
level when you're in a Floor Plan view.
| | 00:53 | So what we need to do is use our
Elevations over here and open up an Elevation.
| | 00:58 | And I've prepared this East
Elevation to show us the levels.
| | 01:02 | All I really did was shorten the extent
of these levels so that we could zoom in
| | 01:06 | a little bit more closely.
| | 01:08 | Each of the levels is represented here
with this dashed line and this symbol at
| | 01:12 | the end and they each have a name and a height.
| | 01:15 | So as I said, the levels are a
horizontal datum, think of it as a thin sheet of
| | 01:19 | paper cutting through your
building at a particular height.
| | 01:22 | And so here's Level 1 and that's at
zero and then there's a few levels in the
| | 01:26 | negative direction, top of Footing and
bottom of Footing, and then there is one up
| | 01:30 | here called roof at 12 foot 8.
| | 01:32 | Now when you select these levels they
have lots of small controls and grips that
| | 01:37 | appear on them. They have these little
open circles at either end, and you can
| | 01:41 | use those to actually
change the extent of the level.
| | 01:46 | And notice that when I do that, it
actually controlled the ones down below as
| | 01:50 | well, that's because of
this little lock icon here.
| | 01:52 | So you can stretch any one of
these endpoints and they'll all stretch
| | 01:58 | together as a unit, which makes it
pretty handy particular on a building
| | 02:01 | where you have lots of levels.
| | 02:02 | You've got a height that you can control
here with this dimension or right here.
| | 02:06 | You've got a name and then you've
got this little graphical symbol here.
| | 02:10 | Now down here you can see there is a
small little elbow on this level, and when I
| | 02:14 | click on it, there's a few small grid
points here, that I can drag to make this a
| | 02:20 | little bit more legible.
| | 02:21 | Notice that it doesn't
have any impact on the height.
| | 02:24 | The height of the level is here where
this dashed line is, that's where the
| | 02:28 | negative six feet occurs, and you could
see here with this dimension, it's 1 foot
| | 02:32 | away from its neighbor.
| | 02:33 | But this is just for the graphical symbol to
make things appear a little bit more legibly.
| | 02:38 | So these were all the levels that
were already here in the project, but the
| | 02:42 | building that I want to create
needs a few additional levels.
| | 02:45 | Now how do you decide?
| | 02:46 | Well when you're setting up your
project, this is one of the first tasks
| | 02:49 | that you want to do.
| | 02:50 | And what I typically tell people is, if
you've got a button on the elevator, you
| | 02:54 | should put a level there.
| | 02:55 | Now you could have levels for other
things, clearly there isn't a button on the
| | 02:59 | elevator for top and bottom of footing,
so you can clearly have levels for other
| | 03:03 | horizontal measurement points as well,
other datums that are important to you.
| | 03:06 | But having one for every actual
occupied floor level is a pretty good idea.
| | 03:11 | And so I need a Level 2 in this
building so I'll start with that one.
| | 03:15 | If I go to the Architecture tab, over
here toward the right-hand side on the
| | 03:19 | Datum panel, you're going
to see the Level button.
| | 03:22 | Now if you look at the tooltip that
appears when I hover over the tool here, you
| | 03:27 | could see that it says the word Level,
that's the name of the command, and in
| | 03:30 | parentheses it says LL, that's actually
the keyboard shortcut for this command.
| | 03:35 | Now the way this works is I could
either click this button or without clicking
| | 03:39 | the button I can just type the letters
LL on my keyboard, either way I'm going
| | 03:43 | to be running that command.
| | 03:45 | So be on the lookout for those
tooltips because they'll tell you the keyboard
| | 03:49 | shortcuts and often that's a
faster way to issue the command.
| | 03:52 | Now notice that when I move my mouse
over here, when it lines up with the
| | 03:56 | endpoints of the
neighboring levels, it'll snap to it.
| | 03:59 | You see that little dashed line there?
| | 04:01 | It wants to snap to that.
| | 04:03 | So I'm going to click and start to drag
and when it gets to this other end it'll
| | 04:07 | snap again, and click.
| | 04:10 | I just sort of eyeballed that in, it
came in at about 10 foot 2, but I'd really
| | 04:15 | like this level to be at 10 feet.
| | 04:17 | So I'm just going to put my mouse
right on top of this dimensional text and
| | 04:22 | click and that will make that editable
text, and then I'm just going to type in 10.
| | 04:28 | This is going to be interpreted as 10
feet by Revit, the default unit in an
| | 04:32 | imperial project if you're
working in the United States is feet.
| | 04:36 | So when I press Enter it will
interpret that as 10 feet 0 inches.
| | 04:40 | So that's my Level 2, that's
my second floor of the building.
| | 04:43 | Now I'm going to hold in my wheel, drag
a little bit, make another level up here
| | 04:49 | somewhere, again snap it at both ends,
it came in at 19 8, and I'm going to put
| | 04:55 | in 20, press Enter, and this
is going to be a second roof.
| | 04:59 | My building actually is going to have
two roofs, there's going to be a lower
| | 05:04 | roof and an upper roof.
| | 05:05 | So currently this one is just called
roof, and this one came in as Level 3.
| | 05:09 | So Revit just guesses at the name.
| | 05:11 | Now I'm still in the Level command,
so what I want to do is get out of that
| | 05:16 | Level command and show you that it's
really easy for us to rename those two
| | 05:19 | levels that we need.
| | 05:20 | But before I get out of the command,
let me just point out the color of this
| | 05:23 | Level symbol and compare it to
the color of this Level symbol.
| | 05:26 | This one is a nice bright
blue and this one is black.
| | 05:29 | Notice that when I press Escape and get out
of the command, that one turns blue as well.
| | 05:34 | Now what that's telling us is, if you
look over here on the Project Browser,
| | 05:37 | it automatically created floor plans
and ceiling plans, you can see there is a
| | 05:43 | Level 2 and a Level 3 floor plan and
ceiling plan for each of those new levels.
| | 05:49 | Now notice here it says Level 2, Level 3,
watch what happens now, I've also got roof here.
| | 05:53 | I'm going to select of this one.
| | 05:55 | Click right on the word roof, put my
cursor at the start of that name and I'm
| | 06:01 | going to change it to Low Roof.
| | 06:03 | When I press Enter, I'll get a message
that pops up on screen and Revit will ask
| | 06:07 | me, do I want to rename the corresponding views?
| | 06:09 | It's talking about this view right
here that's called Roof in this case.
| | 06:13 | So I'm going to say Yes and you'll
see the name there changed to Low Roof.
| | 06:17 | I'm going to do it again, click on Level
3, click right on there, call this High
| | 06:22 | Roof, press Enter, say Yes again and
now it will create High Roof here and
| | 06:30 | there's also this ceiling plan
called High Roof, it renamed that.
| | 06:33 | Now it turns out that I probably don't
need a ceiling plan on the Roof Level, so
| | 06:38 | I can simply select that view in
Project Browser, press the Delete key on my
| | 06:42 | keyboard and it will remove that unneeded view.
| | 06:46 | So you don't actually have to have a
view in each location for each level,
| | 06:51 | but it will create one for you automatically
and you can simply delete it if you don't want it.
| | 06:55 | Let me zoom out a little bit here,
those are my completed levels. I could make
| | 06:59 | whatever adjustments I want to make, I
could add the little elbow using this
| | 07:04 | tiny little squiggle right here to make
that a little bit more legible and then
| | 07:09 | all that would remain is to save my
project and move on to the next step.
| | 07:14 | So one of the first tasks that you
want to do in creating a new project is
| | 07:16 | to set up the levels.
| | 07:18 | Nearly all of the elements in a Revit
project have some association to one or
| | 07:21 | more of levels in your project, so
their importance can't be overstated.
| | 07:26 | You don't have to get all of the levels
perfect on the first try, but typically
| | 07:30 | you'll want to set at least the basic
ones early on so that you have a good
| | 07:34 | framework for your project.
| | 07:36 | Remember, if there's a button on the
elevator, you want to create a level for it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding grids| 00:00 | Like levels, grids provide
organization and structure to your project.
| | 00:04 | Where levels were horizontal datum
elements cutting through the building at a
| | 00:07 | certain height, grids are vertical
datum elements that are located at certain
| | 00:11 | locations along the building.
| | 00:13 | Grids are used typically to locate
where the columns occur in your projects and
| | 00:18 | they provide key points of
reference for things like views and sheets.
| | 00:21 | Unlike levels not all buildings need grids.
| | 00:24 | For example, most residential projects
don't have any need for a column grid.
| | 00:29 | Most commercial projects on the
other hand do have column grids.
| | 00:32 | Therefore, the type of project that you are
creating will dictate your need for grids.
| | 00:36 | Now I am in a project called Grids and
I'm looking at Floor Plan level 1 and I'm
| | 00:41 | going to go here to the Architecture
tab and click on the Grid tool, it's
| | 00:45 | located here on the Datum panel.
| | 00:47 | When I click the Grid tool there are a
few different shapes you can create, and
| | 00:50 | I am going to just stick with simple
straight lines for this example, and for my
| | 00:54 | first example I am just going to
draw a grid out here off to the side.
| | 00:58 | Now I click my first point down here
and the second point can be anywhere I
| | 01:02 | like, in fact, it can be at any angle.
| | 01:05 | But I am going to just draw it
straight up to stay parallel with the building
| | 01:09 | and click my second point.
| | 01:10 | Now what you'll notice right-away is
that Revit creates a grid bubble at the
| | 01:14 | second end, the first end has no bubble,
the second end has the bubble and it
| | 01:21 | automatically numbered it as grid number one.
| | 01:24 | The presence of the bubble is
controlled by this little check box right here.
| | 01:29 | So if I uncheck, that will hide that
bubble, if I check it again, it will display
| | 01:35 | it, the same was true down here.
| | 01:37 | Check, it will display it,
uncheck, it will hide it.
| | 01:40 | Now it turns out that same trick works
with levels, so if you watch the previous
| | 01:43 | movie we talked about levels you can
actually check and uncheck whether or not
| | 01:47 | you want to show the level
annotation on either end of the level datum.
| | 01:50 | So most of the features of grids
work with levels and vice versa.
| | 01:55 | Now let me cancel out of the command
for a moment, and select this grid, and I
| | 02:02 | am going to simply delete it.
| | 02:03 | Now the reason I want to delete it is I
want to talk about how Revit numbers grids.
| | 02:08 | So I am going to go back to the
Datum panel, click the Grid tool again,
| | 02:12 | and this time I'm going to click my
first point below the building but
| | 02:15 | inside the wall here.
| | 02:16 | So if you're not careful it'll snap
right to the wall. I don't want to snap it
| | 02:21 | to the wall, I want to bring it inside
a little bit, click my first point, pull
| | 02:25 | it straight up parallel to
the wall, and click again.
| | 02:28 | And the reason I wanted to do it that
way is notice that it remembers that the
| | 02:32 | next number in sequence is number 2.
| | 02:35 | So regardless of the fact that I've
deleted grid one, it still remembers
| | 02:39 | that it's grid two.
| | 02:40 | Now this is really important, it's
important if I wanted this one to actually be
| | 02:44 | one, it's also important if I
want to use letters here instead.
| | 02:47 | So let me show you how we can
change this before we continue.
| | 02:52 | You see where it says Edit Parameter
right here when you put your mouse right
| | 02:54 | over it? All you've got to do is
click and it will make that editable text.
| | 02:59 | And I'm going to change this to capital
A to go with letters in this direction.
| | 03:04 | Now if I continue, I'll zoom back out
to do this, lineup right here, just like
| | 03:09 | levels I can line up with the
neighboring grid, snap it at both ends, lineup,
| | 03:16 | snap it at both ends, notice that I'm
getting A then B, then C, and then here is
| | 03:22 | D, and then here is E.
| | 03:24 | We are going to fine-tune the
positions of these grids later.
| | 03:29 | So for right now I just kind of want
to rough them in and about the locations
| | 03:32 | that I'm interested in. Let me do the
same thing down here, I am going to come
| | 03:37 | inside this exterior wall, click.
| | 03:39 | But here I want to stop before I continue,
I want to click right on letter F and
| | 03:45 | I don't want that to be F, I want to go
back to numbers now, I want to make that
| | 03:49 | number 1, and then I'll continue.
| | 03:52 | Here is the next one, there is number 2,
here is my next one, here is number 3,
| | 03:58 | and finally here is number 4.
| | 04:02 | Just like levels we have lots
of the same grips on these grids.
| | 04:06 | I'm going to click my Modify tool to
cancel out of the command or if you prefer
| | 04:10 | you can press the Escape key twice.
| | 04:12 | Just like levels if you select one
of these grids that little open circle
| | 04:16 | appears at the end and you can start to
drag these and they drag together as one.
| | 04:21 | Now notice that this one I stopped a
little short, it won't do that, it'll
| | 04:25 | drag all by itself.
| | 04:27 | However, if I bring it all the way
out here and snap it, now it will
| | 04:31 | automatically lock and they'll work together.
| | 04:35 | So it's really easy to fix that if you
accidentally make one that's too short.
| | 04:39 | All you've got to do is drag it until
it snaps to its neighbor and it will
| | 04:43 | take care of the rest.
| | 04:44 | As I said I've only roughed in the
grids and I'm going to kind of leave them
| | 04:49 | like this for now, we're going to clean
that up in the next movie, but I wanted
| | 04:53 | to show you a new feature here in 2013.
| | 04:55 | In really complex commercial buildings
you sometimes have a really complicated
| | 05:00 | grid, and Revit 13 has included this
new Multi-Segment Grid feature, and if I
| | 05:06 | click on that that's going to take
me into something called Sketch mode.
| | 05:10 | Now I don't really want to get into the
details of Sketch mode yet, we are going
| | 05:14 | to talk about that in great
detail in a future chapter.
| | 05:17 | But for right now I'm just going to
stick with the Straight Line tool that's
| | 05:21 | right here, and I'm just going
to draw a couple shapes, like so.
| | 05:25 | It doesn't really matter what the
shape is, you can just draw two or three or
| | 05:29 | four segments here, and then click
this big green check box to finish the
| | 05:33 | edit mode, and what I'll get is a continuous
grid object but it has this irregular shape.
| | 05:39 | So that's going to be really helpful in
those complex buildings that have a more
| | 05:43 | complicated column grid.
| | 05:45 | In this particular case I don't really
need that grid, so I am actually going to
| | 05:49 | delete it, but I did want to
point out that new feature to you.
| | 05:52 | So it's not necessary that you set up
your grids right-away, but it can be a
| | 05:56 | good idea to get them configured in
your project as early as possible.
| | 05:59 | Your column grid in a commercial
project is a pretty important part of the
| | 06:02 | building, so having those grids and
columns located early on can be a big help.
| | 06:07 | But remember, like all things in Revit
we can always modify it later, and in
| | 06:12 | fact, the subject of the next movie is
we're going to take this starting column
| | 06:16 | grid that we've begun here and we are
going to position them all much more
| | 06:20 | precisely relative to the
surrounding building geometry.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Refining a layout with temporary dimensions| 00:00 | A very important basic concept to
understand in Revit is the way that
| | 00:04 | precision is approached.
| | 00:06 | In Revit what you typically do is you
place objects in a general location and
| | 00:10 | then you refine the placement
of those objects over time.
| | 00:13 | So I call this sketch and then modify.
| | 00:16 | So in this movie we are going to talk
about temporary dimensions and temporary
| | 00:20 | dimensions is a process that we use
to take our roughly-placed objects and
| | 00:24 | modify their positions to
a more precise location.
| | 00:28 | So what I have here on screen is a file
called Temporary Dims and this is just a
| | 00:32 | copy of the completed grid
layout from the previous movie.
| | 00:37 | The grids here have been placed in
rough locations, but I want to start
| | 00:41 | controlling these grids in a very precise way.
| | 00:44 | I want the measurement of the grid
lines to the face of the walls to be
| | 00:47 | controlled very precisely for example.
| | 00:50 | And I can do that in a variety of ways
in Revit and the first way that I want to
| | 00:54 | share with you is using temporary dimensions.
| | 00:56 | So I am going to start by selecting
grid line A. What you'll see is on screen
| | 01:01 | here, in addition to all the other
little controls and grips that appear, you'll
| | 01:05 | see a couple of dimension
strings appear here and here.
| | 01:09 | I am going to zoom in slightly, just
to get a better look at this, and you'll
| | 01:13 | see that the dimension number is
here and it's got kind of a long, random
| | 01:18 | fractional number to it, and
a second dimension is here.
| | 01:22 | You'll see these little blue dots,
showing me the Witness Line locations of
| | 01:26 | these dimensions and what they're measured to.
| | 01:29 | In both cases, on the left and right,
they're measured from the grid line and then
| | 01:33 | back to the center of the wall.
| | 01:36 | That's the default behavior.
| | 01:37 | So if I know what this value is, if I
know how far off the wall I want this
| | 01:44 | distance to be, all I have to do is
click in that dimension and make the change.
| | 01:49 | Now this exterior wall is a generic 12-
inch wall, you can see it there when I
| | 01:54 | highlight the tooltip, that means that
if I want this grid line to be 2 inches
| | 01:58 | off the inside face of that wall I could
do the math and I could say, well, half
| | 02:02 | of the distance of the wall is 6 inches
plus the 2 inches so I could click right
| | 02:06 | here and I could put in a value of 8 inches.
| | 02:09 | Now the way that you put in inches in a
Revit project is to either do 8 inches
| | 02:14 | or I'll show you a second
way in a few moments here.
| | 02:17 | And I am going to press Enter and you'll
see that we'll move that grid line over
| | 02:22 | closer to the wall to maintain that distance.
| | 02:25 | Now I am going to select this
grid line and I want to do a similar
| | 02:30 | modification, but perhaps I don't want
to perform the math this time, maybe I
| | 02:34 | don't want to do the calculation.
| | 02:36 | What I can do instead is using these
little small circles here I can actually
| | 02:40 | click those grips and they will
jump to other points on the wall.
| | 02:45 | When I click it, it jumps to the inside
face, if I click it again it goes to the
| | 02:50 | outside face, and then one
more time it's back to center.
| | 02:53 | I want to do it from the inside face
so I'll click it again, and now the
| | 02:57 | current distance is 3 feet, I click on there,
and this time I want it to be just 2 inches.
| | 03:03 | Instead of writing 2 inches which I did a
moment ago my alternative is to do 0, space, 2.
| | 03:11 | When you're working in an imperial
file you do the feet first, then a space,
| | 03:15 | and then the inches.
| | 03:16 | And so in this case 0, space, 2
will be interpreted as 2 inches.
| | 03:21 | You can do two with the inch symbol or
0, space, 2, the choice is up to you.
| | 03:25 | They both achieve the same result.
| | 03:27 | So let's do it again, change my Witness
Line location, pick in the dimension, 2
| | 03:33 | inches, go to another location, one
more time, the dimension is way over here
| | 03:39 | this time, click right there,
click in the value, 0, space, 2.
| | 03:45 | So again, the same result in both
cases whether you do the space or whether
| | 03:49 | you do the inch symbol.
| | 03:51 | So I could continue to work my way
around, this one here you can see the
| | 03:54 | dimension line goes off screen, there
it is right there, click the witness line
| | 03:59 | grip, click in the value, and then the
final one over here, click right there,
| | 04:07 | click in the value, 0, space, 2.
| | 04:09 | Now that positions all of the grids that
are associated with an exterior wall in
| | 04:16 | their correct locations, however
sometimes you know the distance of a grid off
| | 04:22 | of something other than a wall.
| | 04:24 | Now if I select this one what you are
going to see here is, it's measuring still
| | 04:29 | back to the center of this
wall, 24 feet in this case.
| | 04:33 | Now if I knew what the distance was
off of that wall then I could edit that
| | 04:37 | dimension, but where I'd rather
measure it to, is to the gridline C, to the
| | 04:42 | neighboring grid line.
| | 04:44 | So it's often the case where you'll know the
measurement to some other piece of geometry.
| | 04:49 | Well simply clicking the little blue
circle won't do the trick, it'll jump two
| | 04:54 | points on the wall, but it won't
actually jump to the grid line.
| | 04:58 | So what you do instead is you drag it,
so click the little witness line grip,
| | 05:02 | hold-down, and you see now that I'm
dragging, I can highlight nearby geometry
| | 05:09 | like grid C, let go, and now I've
associated that dimension to that nearby
| | 05:14 | geometry, and I can click
in here and put in a value.
| | 05:18 | Now in this case, my value is in feet and
inches and the value that I want is 31'8.
| | 05:27 | Now I can do it with the foot symbol, which
is just the apostrophe mark, or 31, space, 8.
| | 05:34 | Both would work, it's entirely up to
you whichever method you prefer, press
| | 05:39 | Enter, and you'll see grid line D move
in order to maintain that new dimension.
| | 05:45 | So an important aspect of temporary
dimensions to understand is, whatever you
| | 05:50 | have selected is what will move
with the temporary dimensions.
| | 05:54 | If I select grid line C, even if the
dimension was measured back to D here,
| | 06:01 | there is the 31'8, if I click in here
and change it to some other value notice
| | 06:06 | that grid line C moves in this case.
| | 06:09 | Now I am going to undo that with Ctrl+Z.
So it's important to always pay
| | 06:13 | attention to which object you select,
and then that's the object whose
| | 06:17 | dimension you modify.
| | 06:19 | So often in Revit you are going to
start with a rough idea of what you want,
| | 06:24 | whether it be walls or grids or some
objects, you are going to lay them out in a
| | 06:28 | very rough fashion and then you are
going to come back using the temporary
| | 06:32 | dimensions and do a series of refinements.
| | 06:33 | We call this sketch and then modify,
and it's a very common way to approach
| | 06:37 | editing with precision in the Revit environment.
| | 06:39 | In fact, the word Revit
actually stands for revise it.
| | 06:43 | So the name of the product comes from
this notion that we start with a simple
| | 06:48 | sketched out layout and then we
progressively refine it and refine it as we
| | 06:52 | learn more about our design.
| | 06:53 | Temporary dimensions is just the
first of many ways that we have to do that.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding columns| 00:00 | Most buildings have columns in at least
some locations, whether your project has
| | 00:04 | one column or hundreds, the
process to add them is fairly simple.
| | 00:07 | Revit includes two types of columns,
it includes architectural columns and
| | 00:11 | structural columns. We can find those
on the Architecture tab, on the Column
| | 00:15 | button, here is Structural Column
button and the Architectural Column button.
| | 00:20 | Typically an architectural column is
used to represent either a column wrap or
| | 00:25 | a rough placement column that will then
later be replaced by the structural engineer.
| | 00:31 | A Structural Column is typically used
to actually represent material that's
| | 00:34 | really holding up the building.
| | 00:35 | So let's start with the architectural
columns and take a look and then we'll see
| | 00:39 | how that ties in later with the
structural columns. So I'm going to choose the
| | 00:42 | Column Architectural command, and let's
take a look at a few of the settings
| | 00:47 | before we get started here.
| | 00:48 | Like many other commands, that takes
me to my Modify tab, Place Column.
| | 00:53 | I've got some settings here on my
Options Bar and I've got some additional
| | 00:57 | settings here on the Properties palette,
so let's take a look at a few of these.
| | 01:01 | Usually you want to start by
looking at the Type Selector.
| | 01:04 | So in this case, this particular
template that we started our project from
| | 01:07 | includes three sizes: a 24x24, 18x18, and 18x24.
So I'm going to stick with the default, 24x24.
| | 01:13 | There's a few other settings here, we're
going to talk about Room Bounding in a
| | 01:18 | much later movie, but Moves with Grids
is a setting that we definitely want to
| | 01:22 | make sure is selected, because that
will take advantage of these column grids
| | 01:28 | that we have placed in our file. Now if
you watched the previous movie, we laid
| | 01:32 | out all the column grids and
positioned them and now we're going to take
| | 01:35 | advantage of those as the
locations for our columns.
| | 01:38 | Now you don't have to place your
columns on grids, you can place them
| | 01:42 | freestanding in space with a simple click.
| | 01:44 | But if you place them at the
intersection of two column grids, those will
| | 01:49 | highlight and I'm going to click the
Modify tool and cancel out of there,
| | 01:54 | select this grid line and move it,
and what you'll notice is that moves the
| | 01:58 | column along with it.
| | 02:00 | So I'm going to undo that with Ctrl+Z,
I'm going to select these two columns and
| | 02:04 | delete them, and that's the basic
behavior that we're looking for.
| | 02:08 | So let me return to my Column tool, go
to Column Architectural, and let me point
| | 02:12 | out one last thing before
we place all these columns.
| | 02:16 | Here on the Options Bar we can
actually control the height of these columns
| | 02:19 | as we're placing them.
| | 02:21 | The default is the height, but we can
also do the depth in terms of a structural
| | 02:25 | column, and the default
behavior is to go up to Level 2.
| | 02:29 | Now if you look at my Project
Browser I'm working in a floor plan called
| | 02:32 | Level 1, so my column is going to start at
Level 1, and it's going to go up to Level 2.
| | 02:38 | But if I wanted to, I could make them go
up to the Low Roof or up to the High Roof.
| | 02:42 | I could even make them unconnected,
which would make this setting available and
| | 02:47 | I could type in a manual height for
these columns, but in this case I want to
| | 02:50 | make sure they're going up to Level 2,
the level up above, and then let me just
| | 02:55 | zoom in slightly here, and it's as simple
as highlighting the intersection of the
| | 03:00 | nearby column grids and clicking.
| | 03:03 | Let me zoom in even closer and show you
one other really nice benefit of working
| | 03:07 | with architectural columns.
| | 03:09 | They will automatically sense the presence of
nearby walls and merge in to the wall material.
| | 03:15 | As I place these columns, you're going
to see them merge in and marry with that
| | 03:21 | wall material, making a very
nice clean presentation to the view.
| | 03:26 | So let me just continue all the way
around the file here, and let me click the
| | 03:33 | Modify tool to finish the command.
| | 03:36 | So I now have an architectural column
at each grid location, and once again
| | 03:40 | those grids are controlling the
position of all those columns, so later if we
| | 03:45 | need to make any kind of a change we
can do so with confidence knowing that all
| | 03:48 | the columns are going to go along with
any change we make to the grids, let me
| | 03:52 | do Ctrl+Z to undo that.
| | 03:54 | Like I said, these represent the column
wrap or the enclosure that's surrounding
| | 03:58 | the column, but typically there's going
to be some sort of structural steel or
| | 04:02 | some other structural
material within those columns.
| | 04:05 | So if I go to the Column tool and
choose the Structural Column, these are going
| | 04:09 | to behave in much the same way.
| | 04:12 | If we look at the choices that we have
available on the Options Bar, Properties
| | 04:16 | palette, and ribbon, we
have a lot of similar choices.
| | 04:20 | We have our dropdown here on the Type
Selector which gives me two different size
| | 04:25 | columns, I can create a W10x33 or a W10x49.
| | 04:30 | We could certainly create other sizes
if we wanted to, we would have to load
| | 04:34 | in a different family to do that, I'm
going to talk about loading families in
| | 04:38 | a later movie, so for now we're just to work
with the two sizes that are here by default.
| | 04:43 | The Structural Material is listed
here and there is some connection
| | 04:46 | information, and so forth.
| | 04:48 | So slightly different settings, I have
a little bit more to do with structural
| | 04:52 | usage, but otherwise similar behaviors.
| | 04:54 | We have the Height parameter here,
where we're designating the height and up to
| | 04:58 | Level 2, just like we saw
with the architectural columns.
| | 05:02 | Now what I want to point out here,
the one really unique feature of
| | 05:05 | structural columns that's really
handy is, the multiple Placement options
| | 05:09 | here on the ribbon.
| | 05:11 | We can either place structural
columns at the location of the architectural
| | 05:15 | columns or we can place them at
the intersections of the grids.
| | 05:20 | Now in this case, we get almost the same
result in both cases, I want to use the
| | 05:26 | At Columns feature in this
case, I'm going to click that.
| | 05:29 | I can make a Window Selection around
my entire plan, and before I let go,
| | 05:35 | notice that it's only highlighting
architectural columns, so this feature is
| | 05:39 | built-in to only sense where the
location of the architectural columns are, and
| | 05:44 | when I finish that selection, you will
see a piece of steel ghosted in at each
| | 05:50 | of those locations.
| | 05:52 | If I'm satisfied with that selection I
can use this green Finish check box right
| | 05:57 | here, click that, and finish the
selection, and place the remaining columns.
| | 06:03 | Now if I prefer, I can use this At Grids
feature and the way this works is, when
| | 06:10 | you select grid lines it finds the
intersections between those grid lines and
| | 06:16 | will place columns at each of those
intersections, and again if I click Finish I
| | 06:20 | will get a column in each of those locations.
| | 06:22 | Now I'm going to cancel out of the command,
and I'll show you one last thing here.
| | 06:28 | If I select the structural columns,
they have direction, if we zoom in a
| | 06:32 | little bit, because of the eye
shape they can either go vertically or
| | 06:36 | horizontally, we didn't really have to
worry about that with the architectural
| | 06:40 | columns because they were square.
| | 06:42 | You can quickly rotate the columns
along their own center point simply by
| | 06:45 | tapping the spacebar, so if I tap the
spacebar on my keyboard you're going to
| | 06:51 | see those columns rotate
in 90 degree increments.
| | 06:54 | So that's a really handy way to
control the orientation of those columns.
| | 06:59 | In this movie we looked at both
architectural and structural columns.
| | 07:03 | Typically the structural columns are
going to be used for the actual structural
| | 07:07 | material, what's
physically holding up the building.
| | 07:09 | The presence of architectural columns is
optional, it can be used as column wrap
| | 07:14 | enclosures or they can actually be used
as temporary stand-in locations for the
| | 07:18 | columns that are later
replaced by your structural engineer.
| | 07:22 | The exact workflow is a matter for the
team to decide but both columns share the
| | 07:26 | behavior that they are attached to the
column grid and if the column grid lines
| | 07:30 | move it takes the columns along with it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. Modeling BasicsAdding walls| 00:00 | Walls are perhaps the most basic
component of any building project.
| | 00:03 | Certainly they are one of the first
objects that you'll want to master when
| | 00:06 | you're learning Revit. Walls have many
settings that we can interact with, and in
| | 00:10 | this movie we'll take a look at the
basic features of the Wall command and get
| | 00:14 | started by just creating some simple walls.
| | 00:16 | So on the Architecture tab we have
our Wall command and it's right here.
| | 00:20 | It also has a keyboard shortcut WA, so if
you like you can just type the letters WA.
| | 00:24 | If you click the dropdown make sure you're
choosing Wall Architectural. Okay, so
| | 00:28 | any of those methods will do the trick,
| | 00:30 | and when I run the command that
takes me to the Modify Place Wall tab.
| | 00:34 | Now this is a context tab and we
talked about this in a previous movie.
| | 00:38 | The left-hand side of the Modify
tab is this standard consistent set of
| | 00:42 | commands, and the right-hand side, in
this case, has a Draw panel with several
| | 00:47 | shapes and let's start by
looking at some of those shapes.
| | 00:50 | Now the first one, the
default, is just the Line shape.
| | 00:53 | If you look at the very bottom left-
hand corner of the screen, there's a prompt
| | 00:57 | on the Status bar that says Click to
enter wall star point, so all we have to do
| | 01:01 | is click somewhere on screen to
place the first point of the wall.
| | 01:06 | Now if you don't move the mouse at all,
it will immediately go to a new prompt
| | 01:10 | that will say Enter wall end point.
| | 01:11 | If you start moving the mouse you might
get a different prompt, something like
| | 01:15 | Horizontal, in this case because I'm
snapping horizontal or perhaps Vertical.
| | 01:19 | If you're at an angle that isn't one
of the preset angles, then it'll say the
| | 01:23 | standard prompt, so sometimes it just
takes moving the mouse around and reading
| | 01:26 | through the different prompts, and then
you can decide where you actually want
| | 01:30 | that second point to go,
and I can click right there.
| | 01:33 | Now at this point, if I only wanted a
single wall, I could cancel out of the command.
| | 01:38 | There's two ways that I could do that,
I can use my Escape key or I can click
| | 01:43 | on the Modify tool.
| | 01:44 | Now the Modify tool cancels all the way
out of the command, you see how the Wall
| | 01:48 | command is no longer active.
| | 01:49 | If I use the Escape key method, then a
single Escape will cancel the current
| | 01:55 | Draw mode, but it will stay in the
command, notice how it still says Place Wall.
| | 02:00 | If I press Escape a second time,
then it cancels all the way out.
| | 02:04 | Now what that's really doing is, if I
draw one more straight line wall, is it's
| | 02:09 | taking advantage of this
chain feature right here.
| | 02:12 | The default behavior of the Wall command when
you're in the Line Draw mode is to be chain.
| | 02:18 | So this simply means that you can draw
more than one wall connected end-to-end
| | 02:24 | with the previous wall.
| | 02:25 | If I press Escape one time, it's simply
breaking the chain so that I can start
| | 02:30 | drawing a new chain of walls, and
that's really all that it means.
| | 02:35 | Now we can also change shape so we
don't have to draw just simple straight
| | 02:38 | lines, we can draw rectangles or polygons.
| | 02:41 | Rectangle is pretty straightforward, it
just requires two opposite corners, so
| | 02:46 | we can simply click any two points,
and that will give us a rectangle.
| | 02:49 | With polygons we can do inscribed or
circumscribed, that just means, do you want
| | 02:53 | to draw it at the vertex or the face.
| | 02:55 | When you click it, it will list the
number of sides here on the Options Bar, so
| | 03:01 | the default is this hexagon shape or
I could change the number of sides to
| | 03:06 | anything I want, if I want to draw a
square I can draw a square or a pentagon
| | 03:11 | or really any shape.
| | 03:12 | We can draw a circle.
| | 03:14 | Now if you draw a circle, I'm going to
Escape out of here a couple times, cancel
| | 03:19 | all the way out of the command;
| | 03:20 | notice that the circle
is actually in two pieces.
| | 03:23 | So really what a circle does is it just
draws two arcs that are connected to one another.
| | 03:27 | Let me go back to the Wall command or
type WA, and we have a variety of arcs,
| | 03:32 | I'm not going to look at everyone, but
I am going to look at this one really
| | 03:37 | quickly because this is actually a
Start-End-Radius Arc, and in many draw
| | 03:40 | programs there is a similar type of arc
command like a three point arc and often
| | 03:46 | you draw along the curve.
| | 03:47 | But here in Revit if we follow the
prompts, it says Click to enter wall start
| | 03:51 | point, I'll do that, and then it says
Enter arc wall end point, so we actually
| | 03:57 | want to draw the opposite end of the arc,
| | 03:59 | and then as you can see, we're
drawing the radius of the arc next.
| | 04:03 | Okay, so just pay really close attention to
that, it takes a little practice at first.
| | 04:07 | And then notice that chain works here as well,
so we can do kind of neat stuff like this.
| | 04:13 | If I move you see how it actually
snaps to the tangent, and I can make these
| | 04:17 | nice smooth curves drawing
several continuous arcs if I like.
| | 04:21 | So let me Escape out of there, and I
want to kind of clean things up a little
| | 04:26 | bit here so I'm going to Escape all the
way out of the command, zoom out just a
| | 04:31 | touch, select all of
these walls that I've drawn.
| | 04:33 | But be careful because if you look
at my ribbon right now it says Modify
| | 04:37 | Multi-Select, so this tells me that
I've actually got more than walls selected,
| | 04:40 | I have several objects selected.
| | 04:42 | So I'm going to go to my Filter button,
and in fact, I also have Elevations and
| | 04:47 | Views selected, and I don't want those selected.
| | 04:50 | So I'm going to uncheck both of those,
make sure it's only walls that I have
| | 04:54 | selected, click OK, and then I'll
press the Delete key on the keyboard to
| | 04:57 | delete those walls.
| | 04:58 | I'm going to return to the Wall
command, click the button or type WA.
| | 05:03 | And let's take a look at the properties next.
| | 05:05 | Now I'm going to talk about location in
a future movie, let's take a look at the
| | 05:10 | Level constraints here.
| | 05:11 | There is a Base Constraint and this
establishes the lower edge of the wall.
| | 05:16 | Now it defaults to Level 1, because
as you can see down here on the Project
| | 05:20 | Browser, we are currently in the Level
1 Floor Plan, so that's pretty logical
| | 05:24 | that that's where the wall
would start drawing from.
| | 05:27 | Now we also have Levels 2, 3 and Roof.
| | 05:29 | So over here under Top Constraint we
can actually attach the top edge of the
| | 05:35 | wall to any one of those Levels, so
I'm going to attach it to the Level 2 and
| | 05:40 | I'll just draw a small wall right there.
| | 05:42 | I'm going to press Escape one time,
change this to up to Level 3, draw a second
| | 05:50 | wall, Escape again, and then
one more time up to Level Roof.
| | 05:56 | Now if I Escape all the way out of
that command, scroll down on the Project
| | 06:01 | Browser and double-click the South
Elevation, let me just zoom in just a little
| | 06:05 | here so that we can read the levels
over here, you can see my levels indicated
| | 06:09 | here, this is not a one-time
operation that we just did there, what we've
| | 06:14 | actually assigned is a constraint.
| | 06:16 | So the top edge of this wall is
constrained to this level, the top edge of this
| | 06:21 | wall is constrained to this level.
| | 06:23 | If one of these levels were to move and
I'm just going to take Level three here
| | 06:27 | and just drag it manually with the mouse,
you can see that the top edge of that
| | 06:31 | wall follows along with that.
| | 06:33 | So this is a really powerful feature in
the software that as your design changes
| | 06:37 | over time, you can make sure that all
of the walls that are associated with a
| | 06:41 | particular level move accordingly. That
can be a very powerful way to work and
| | 06:45 | can be quite a time saver.
| | 06:47 | All right, so let me return to Level
1 and let's look at one last setting
| | 06:51 | here for the walls.
| | 06:52 | Go back to the Architecture tab, click
on the Wall tool again and at the top of
| | 06:56 | the Properties palette
we have our Type Selector.
| | 06:59 | I'm going to open that up and I'm
going to scroll to the top of the list.
| | 07:03 | Now here it says Basic Wall Generic 8 inch.
| | 07:06 | Basic Wall is in this gray bar here,
that's the name of the family and then
| | 07:10 | Generic 8 inch is a little further down
in the list, right here Generic 8 inch,
| | 07:15 | that's the type name.
| | 07:17 | You could see here that the Basic
Wall has lots of types. We have a whole
| | 07:21 | variety here, we have Brick and
CMU Walls, we have Generic Walls;
| | 07:25 | we have Stud Walls.
| | 07:26 | So what would happen if I chose
one of these other types of walls?
| | 07:29 | Like maybe this Brick on CMU,
and I'm going to draw that.
| | 07:33 | Let me roll my wheel here
and zoom in just a touch.
| | 07:36 | All we really see is that that
wall is a little bit thicker.
| | 07:40 | So that tells us that something is
different, but what I actually want to see is
| | 07:44 | the makeup of that wall, the construction;
| | 07:45 | the internal components.
| | 07:46 | If you look down here at the bottom of the
screen, this is our view control bar down here;
| | 07:51 | there is several little icons,
the scale and several other things.
| | 07:54 | There is this little white square
here and if I click on it, it says
| | 07:57 | Coarse, Medium and Fine.
| | 07:58 | If I go to either Medium or Fine Level
of detail, it will show me the internal
| | 08:03 | structure of that wall, so Course Only
shows the outlines, but the Medium and
| | 08:07 | Fine, let's zoom in just a little bit
more, that starts to show me how that
| | 08:12 | wall is constructed.
| | 08:13 | So now if we choose some of these
other wall types and draw them you can see
| | 08:18 | that they vary from one another in
their composition and what they're made of.
| | 08:22 | So there is a lot of different
settings that we can interact with as
| | 08:25 | we're drawing walls.
| | 08:26 | We have our shapes up on the Modify
tab and we have a variety of settings to
| | 08:31 | control the height and the composition
of the wall on both the Type Selector and
| | 08:35 | the Properties palette.
| | 08:36 | So I encourage you to spend a little
bit more time in this file playing around
| | 08:40 | and getting comfortable with how walls
work, because as we said at the start of
| | 08:44 | the movie, walls are really the most
basic component of any Revit project.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using snaps| 00:00 | In this movie, I want to show
you the snapping behavior in Revit.
| | 00:03 | Snaps are just simply rules that allow
the software to lock onto certain key
| | 00:08 | increments, either length
increments or geometric points on objects.
| | 00:13 | Revit has a few useful snapping
features, we have our length increment snap
| | 00:16 | feature which is tied to the zoom
level on the screen, and we have object
| | 00:21 | snapping behavior, things
like endpoints and midpoints.
| | 00:23 | And I would like to show you both
of those features here in this movie.
| | 00:27 | I'm in a file called Snaps and this
is just based on the default template.
| | 00:31 | And to show you the length increment
snapping feature, I need to zoom out a little bit.
| | 00:35 | So the easiest way to do this is to
use the Zoom Out(2x) Command right here.
| | 00:40 | So if it is already chosen, you can just
pick it off the list, otherwise you can
| | 00:44 | choose it here from the dropdown and
that will back up the screen a little bit.
| | 00:48 | Now on the Architecture tab, I'm going
to go over here to the Wall command or
| | 00:52 | type WA, I'm just going
to click any start point.
| | 00:55 | Now you'll notice that the temporary
dimension says zero, so Revit just always
| | 01:00 | snaps relative to whatever
that first point you clicked was.
| | 01:03 | So it indicates that as zero.
| | 01:05 | I'm going to slowly start to move my
mouse a little bit and what you'll see is,
| | 01:11 | it's sort of jumping. It doesn't
move fluidly, it sort of jumps.
| | 01:15 | And if you look carefully at the
dimension, you'll see that it's jumping in
| | 01:18 | four foot increments.
| | 01:20 | This is the length angle snapping behavior.
| | 01:24 | If I click my second point,
that wall is exactly 48 feet long.
| | 01:28 | Move in another direction, okay,
now that wall is 16 feet long.
| | 01:33 | It works at any angle, so I can do
it along angles or straight lines.
| | 01:38 | I'm going to press Escape.
| | 01:40 | If I zoom in, and I'm using my wheel to
zoom in, click a new point and start to
| | 01:46 | move, notice that the increment has
changed, now it's much more fine, it's
| | 01:51 | going to every 6 inches.
| | 01:53 | Now without even clicking, I'm going to
go back to zero and zoom in a little bit
| | 01:58 | closer and move again, and I guess, I
got to go a little closer still, sometimes
| | 02:03 | it takes a little practice to get the
right increment, there it is, you can see
| | 02:07 | that now it's doing every inch, okay.
| | 02:09 | So now if I click, that wall
was exactly four foot, ten inches.
| | 02:15 | If I continue to zoom in very close
and I just use my wheel to do that, now
| | 02:20 | you'll see that I'm snapping
to every quarter of an inch.
| | 02:23 | So what's really handy about this
feature is just simply in the course of your
| | 02:28 | zooming in and out, it will adjust the
degree to which it's snapping, so you
| | 02:34 | don't have to go back and change a
setting, it sort of does this automatically.
| | 02:38 | Now where is this control? I'm going
to do ZF on my keyboard for zoom to fit
| | 02:42 | just to back out all the way again.
| | 02:44 | I'm going to go to Manage tab, and
it's the Snaps dialog right here that
| | 02:49 | controls this behavior.
| | 02:51 | So I'm going to click on that.
| | 02:53 | And right here at the top, this is the
feature that we just witnessed, it's the
| | 02:57 | Length dimension snap increments.
| | 02:58 | Now you'll see here that there's a
number, the first number says 4 foot, and
| | 03:02 | then a semi-colon, and then it
says 6 inches and a semi-colon.
| | 03:05 | So the semi-colons separate
one increment from the next.
| | 03:09 | You can change any of these values
and you can introduce new values.
| | 03:13 | So if I wanted to add a 2 foot snap
increment, I could put it right there.
| | 03:18 | You don't have to actually put it in
order, I can just simply click OK, if I
| | 03:22 | go back to Snaps, notice that it reorganizes
it and it put the 2 feet in the right sequence.
| | 03:27 | Now let's see how that behaves, if I
go to Architecture, click on the Wall
| | 03:31 | command, right now you can see that at the
level of zoom I'm at I'm getting a 2 foot increment.
| | 03:38 | Now notice that if I get nearby some
other geometry, that takes precedence.
| | 03:43 | So in addition to the length angle
snap, Revit will always look at nearby
| | 03:48 | geometry and try to snap to it.
| | 03:50 | So in this case, I'm getting something
with a fractional increment clearly not
| | 03:54 | on a 2 foot increment but if I move past
that, then it goes back to the 2 feet, okay.
| | 04:00 | And again, if I start to zoom, I
would get the different increments.
| | 04:03 | You can also remove increments if you
don't want to snap to all those, so all of
| | 04:07 | that is controlled in that dialog.
| | 04:09 | Also in that dialog we see Object Snaps.
| | 04:12 | Now if you've used any CAD program before
than object snapping is a familiar concept.
| | 04:18 | All this geometry has certain key points,
we have endpoints at either end of a
| | 04:22 | line, we have the midpoint halfway
between, we have quadrants on circles, we
| | 04:27 | have perpendicular and tangent points,
you can snap to any of these things.
| | 04:31 | I'd like you to note here in parentheses that
each of these items has a keyboard shortcut.
| | 04:37 | So if you remember those, you can
actually use those on screen when Revit is
| | 04:42 | trying to snap to a point that you
don't like, you can tell it no I meant the
| | 04:47 | endpoint, or no I meant the
intersection by simply typing those letters.
| | 04:50 | Maybe just jot these down or take a
screen capture to keep it handy, but they're
| | 04:54 | pretty easy to remember because they
all start with the letter S. So let me
| | 04:58 | click OK here and let's see how this behaves.
| | 05:01 | I'm going to zoom in slightly with my
wheel, let's go to Architecture, let's
| | 05:06 | click Wall, right there that little
square that's endpoint, and then here that
| | 05:13 | little triangle that's midpoint, and
then if I come over here and you see that
| | 05:18 | little x right there, that's intersection.
| | 05:21 | So the symbols will become familiar
to you with practice, but each of those
| | 05:26 | little symbols indicates
a different kind of snap.
| | 05:28 | Now suppose I'm coming over here and
it's trying to snap to the endpoint, but I
| | 05:33 | really wanted the midpoint, this is
where I could type S M, snap to midpoint.
| | 05:38 | And as I move around now, you'll see
that it's only seeing the midpoints of the
| | 05:44 | various objects, that I try and snap to.
| | 05:47 | After I click, it goes back to looking
for everything, so that override with the
| | 05:53 | keyboard shortcut is for one click only.
| | 05:56 | And so with the little practice you
will get the hang of those, they will
| | 05:59 | become an important part of your
arsenal, but both the length increment
| | 06:02 | snapping and the object snapping are
tools that you'll just use intuitively all
| | 06:07 | the time as you're working.
| | 06:08 | So those features are sort of there in
the background all the time but just keep
| | 06:12 | in mind that you can override the
behavior either by going to the snap dialog
| | 06:17 | and putting in new increments,
turning on and off object snaps or using the
| | 06:21 | keyboard shortcuts to override
on-the-fly as you're working.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exploring wall properties and types| 00:00 | Most elements in Revit have both instance
and type properties, walls are no exception.
| | 00:05 | Some of the behaviors that we
witness with walls are driven by the each
| | 00:08 | individual instance and some
are controlled at the type level.
| | 00:11 | If you change something at the type level,
it changes all instances of that wall.
| | 00:15 | So in this movie, I'm going to look at
some examples of each kind of property,
| | 00:19 | and I have here on screen a file called
Wall Properties and I've annotated the
| | 00:24 | file to indicate the Location Line feature.
| | 00:27 | In the previous movie, we looked at a
lot of the settings of the walls but we
| | 00:31 | haven't covered the Location Line
feature yet, so let's start with that.
| | 00:34 | Now this wall right here, is just
one of the default wall types, it's the
| | 00:38 | Exterior Brick on CMU Wall.
| | 00:40 | And it has a Base Constraint of Level
1 and it's unconnected at the moment.
| | 00:45 | But right here is the feature I want
to focus on, Location Line, and if I open
| | 00:48 | that up, you'll see that there
are several options for that.
| | 00:53 | Now I've indicated them here with these lines.
| | 00:56 | So the centerline of the wall should be
fairly straightforward, that's just the
| | 01:00 | halfway point of the overall thickness,
you can see in this particular wall that
| | 01:04 | it ends up sort of in the
middle of the CMU somewhere.
| | 01:07 | We have got our Finish Face Exterior
and Interior and I'll talk about how Revit
| | 01:11 | knows it's interior, exterior in a few moments.
| | 01:14 | But notice these three red lines are
indicating the core, the CMU in this case
| | 01:19 | is the core of the wall.
| | 01:21 | Now what we mean by core in Revit
terminology is this is the part of the
| | 01:24 | wall, that's actually structural, this is the
part of the wall that's holding up the wall.
| | 01:29 | The stud and the drywall are just
finishes, the brick and the insulation are
| | 01:35 | also exterior veneers, those are finishes.
| | 01:38 | But it's the CMU that's actually
doing the heavy lifting, that's what is
| | 01:41 | keeping this wall up.
| | 01:42 | So we can actually identify the
interior or exterior faces of that core or the
| | 01:48 | centerline of the core as well and
that gives us our six possibilities.
| | 01:52 | Now if I switch to this view here
called Wall Types on the Project Browser, I
| | 01:57 | have that same wall four times and
what I'm going to show you is what happens
| | 02:02 | when we change those location lines.
| | 02:04 | So let's take this wall, it's currently
wall centerline and change it to Finish
| | 02:08 | Face Exterior. I will take this one,
change it to Finish Face Interior, this
| | 02:13 | one here I'll do Core Face Exterior, and
this one here maybe I'll do Core Centerline.
| | 02:18 | It doesn't really matter which choices I choose.
| | 02:21 | Now notice the grips move to those locations.
| | 02:25 | So there it's in the center of the
core, here it's on that outside face,
| | 02:29 | here it's on this inside face of the core,
this one over here it's on the inside face.
| | 02:33 | Now what we'll see here if we study
this wall a little bit more carefully, and
| | 02:38 | I'll zoom just to touch to show you
that, is the brick is actually on the
| | 02:42 | inside and the drywall is on the outside,
that would make for a rather strange building.
| | 02:46 | So the other thing, I want you to see
here about the Location Line is that's
| | 02:51 | where the wall will flip.
| | 02:53 | So the little flip grip here allows me
to change the orientation of the wall and
| | 02:58 | flip it around and put the
brick on the correct side.
| | 03:00 | In this case, it's going to
flip by this outside edge.
| | 03:04 | And then this one is going
to flip by the inside edge.
| | 03:07 | And you could see it's a pretty
dramatically different effect.
| | 03:10 | So the Location Line works together
with the flipping behavior to help you
| | 03:16 | control how the wall shifts.
| | 03:18 | Now the other place that the location
line is important, is if you actually
| | 03:22 | change the thickness of the wall.
| | 03:24 | So if I scroll down here and I choose a
different wall type, I'm going to choose
| | 03:29 | something that's much thinner than the
current wall like this Generic 6 inches,
| | 03:33 | notice that it still maintains the
center of that core material, so most of the
| | 03:39 | thickness was removed from the outside.
| | 03:41 | So those are all examples of instance-
based properties but they have an impact
| | 03:45 | on the overall layout.
| | 03:46 | Now what about a type based property?
| | 03:49 | Well, the fact that this wall has CMU
and brick and drywall is all controlled
| | 03:56 | at its type level.
| | 03:58 | So let's take a look at how
we access those properties.
| | 04:01 | I'm going to select any one of these
walls, the thing about Type properties is
| | 04:05 | you don't have to select all of them in
order to make a modification, you simply
| | 04:09 | select one of those walls.
| | 04:11 | And then here on the Properties palette,
we have an Edit Type button and I'm
| | 04:17 | going to click that and
that will load the Type dialog.
| | 04:20 | Now there's a variety of settings,
we could change in here but I'm going
| | 04:24 | to focus on a couple.
| | 04:25 | Under Structure, I have this large Edit
button, and if I click that you will see
| | 04:30 | a table that lists out all of the
various components in this wall.
| | 04:35 | The exterior side is at the top, the
interior side is at the bottom, so that's
| | 04:40 | how this wall knows which way is
interior and which way is exterior.
| | 04:45 | And you could see on the exterior side
we have our masonry brick, let's actually
| | 04:49 | widen this window here so we can
read those layers a little bit better.
| | 04:54 | For those of you who might have some
previous Revit experience, believe it or
| | 04:58 | not the ability to widen this dialog
is actually a new feature here in 2013,
| | 05:02 | it's definitely one of my favorites.
| | 05:06 | So masonry brick is on the outside, we
have an air gap, we have our insulation,
| | 05:13 | structure here is our concrete masonry units.
| | 05:15 | Notice that the structure is between the
core boundary, here in layer 5 and layer 7.
| | 05:21 | Now layer 5 and 7 are just representational,
they're zero thickness, but that
| | 05:26 | indicates where the course starts and ends.
| | 05:29 | And so any element that you put between
those two is considered part of the core.
| | 05:34 | And then that's further emphasized
over here by this structural check box and
| | 05:38 | that's checked on, to show us that
that's actually the structural component.
| | 05:42 | And then of course the finish materials on
the inside of the wall are listed over here.
| | 05:47 | Now what if I did something rather dramatic?
| | 05:49 | Suppose I took the substrate and I
deleted it and I took the finish here, number
| | 05:53 | 8, and I deleted that and then
click OK, I'm going to click OK again.
| | 05:58 | What you'll notice is on all three
walls that interior finish was removed,
| | 06:04 | that's what we mean by a
type level modification.
| | 06:06 | Let me show you another
quick type level modification.
| | 06:10 | If I go back to Edit Type, let's
do the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern.
| | 06:15 | In a previous movie, we talked about
coarse, medium, and fine; the level of
| | 06:18 | detail, well here the Coarse Scale
Fill Pattern is something that gets applied
| | 06:22 | only when the coarse view is displayed.
| | 06:25 | So I'm going to scroll down here and I'm
going to choose a solid fill pattern
| | 06:29 | but instead of leaving it solid black
which might be a little too bold, I'm
| | 06:33 | going to choose this
bluish purple color, click OK.
| | 06:36 | Now notice that nothing changes.
| | 06:37 | I'm going to deselect the wall,
well that's because I'm currently in
| | 06:40 | Medium level of detail.
| | 06:41 | So let me go to Coarse and what
you'll see is again all three of those
| | 06:45 | walls take on this color.
| | 06:47 | So those are two examples of the type
level modifications that can be performed.
| | 06:51 | Now naturally deleting layers in a
wall is something you want to think about
| | 06:54 | carefully before you do it, and perhaps
you want to rename the wall as well, so
| | 06:59 | really this is just more of an
exercise to kind of show you the possibilities
| | 07:03 | and to help you to understand what it
means to be a type level modification.
| | 07:07 | But both types of properties are
properties that you'll be using frequently
| | 07:11 | in your Revit work.
| | 07:12 | So when you select an object, just be
sure to pay attention to what's available
| | 07:16 | on the Properties palette, and
remember that if it's right here on the main
| | 07:19 | Properties palette then it's
controlled at each individual object.
| | 07:24 | If it is here in the Edit Type dialog,
remember that it's controlling all
| | 07:28 | instances of that type, so
it's a more global change.
| | 07:31 | And if you keep both of those tips in
mind, then you'll be fine as you use both
| | 07:36 | of these settings throughout your work.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Locating walls| 00:00 | In this and the next few movies, we'll
continue working with walls and begin
| | 00:04 | laying out a two bedroom condominium unit.
| | 00:06 | So we going to apply what we've learned
in some of the previous movies and apply
| | 00:11 | it here to an actual floor plan.
| | 00:13 | What I am working with here is a file
called Locating Walls and all it contains
| | 00:17 | is the outline perimeter of the unit,
and what we are going to focus on is the
| | 00:22 | interior partitions.
| | 00:23 | We'll start on the Architecture tab
with the Wall tool, you can type W A or
| | 00:27 | you can click on the tool, and over
here on the Properties palette I want to
| | 00:32 | change the Wall Type to an Interior
type partition and so there are several
| | 00:37 | different sizes here, and I am going
to choose this one 4 7/8" partition.
| | 00:42 | So that's roughly a 5 inch partition,
and it's basically a stud with a layer of
| | 00:46 | drywall on each side, which is
pretty standard interior construction.
| | 00:50 | And I am going to leave all the Height
settings, it's going to be going up to
| | 00:54 | Level 2, and I am going to stick with
the centerline location line, I find that
| | 00:58 | to be the most logical
choice for interior partitions.
| | 01:02 | Now if you move your mouse near an
existing wall, what you'll see is that Revit
| | 01:06 | will automatically snap to that
geometry, so it's finding the centerline in this
| | 01:10 | wall and it's even giving me a
little temporary dimension here.
| | 01:13 | Now I'm not terribly concerned with
the exact number, roughly 10 feet is close
| | 01:18 | enough, so I am going to click right
at that location, move my mouse down to
| | 01:23 | about right here, and then pull it
back over in this direction here.
| | 01:27 | I didn't actually do that terribly
precisely I just sort of roughed in the
| | 01:31 | shape that I was after, and that
might be a little bit surprising to you.
| | 01:35 | But I want you to recall that the Revit
approach to layout is to sketch and then
| | 01:41 | mModify. So we rough it out in roughly
the configuration we are looking for, and
| | 01:46 | then we come back and we modify
it using a variety of techniques.
| | 01:50 | And so, on that basis, I also need
something about like this and a couple of
| | 01:57 | walls right here, and a little
closet in this location here.
| | 02:03 | And what you'll see is I can very
quickly layout this entire half of the floor
| | 02:07 | plan without too much effort being
expended and then I can simply come back and
| | 02:14 | make additional modifications.
| | 02:16 | Now I actually need one more wall in
this location right here, which is going to
| | 02:21 | eventually be a bathroom area.
| | 02:24 | So that's my rough layout for this
side of the plan. Let me cancel out of the
| | 02:28 | command using either the Modify tool
or double escape and now let's start to
| | 02:32 | clean up the layout, and I am going to use
temporary dimensions as the first way to do this.
| | 02:37 | So I am going to start
with this wall right here.
| | 02:40 | When I select that wall, you may
recall from some of our previous movies that
| | 02:44 | temporary dimensions will appear.
| | 02:45 | You may also recall that Revit chooses
the witness line locations by default and
| | 02:49 | in this case, we can see that it goes
to the centerline in each of these walls.
| | 02:53 | Now we have these little grips right
here that Revit displays for us and if you
| | 02:58 | recall we can select those and each
time you click on them, they actually move
| | 03:03 | the witness line location to a new location.
| | 03:06 | So I am going to click those several
times until it goes to the inside faces of
| | 03:11 | that space right in there.
| | 03:12 | And you could see that it's giving me a
somewhat random dimension right now 9'
| | 03:17 | 7/8 inches in my case.
Your result may vary slightly.
| | 03:21 | Well, I am going to just click
in that number and put in 9 feet.
| | 03:26 | And the wall that I have
selected will move to that new location.
| | 03:29 | I am going to repeat the process here
with this wall, click the witness line
| | 03:34 | grips to get it to the insides of this
bedroom, select that number, and make it
| | 03:41 | 10 feet, and that will again move that wall.
| | 03:44 | Now here is a very common mistake that
a lot of folks will make, they now want
| | 03:48 | to set the size of this closet here and
so they immediately go to this dimension
| | 03:52 | and put in their new number.
| | 03:54 | But what you'll notice is the same
wall that I had selected just moved and
| | 03:58 | actually messed up the number that I
previously typed, so I am going to select
| | 04:03 | that number again and reset it back to
10. What did I do wrong? Always remember
| | 04:07 | to select the object that you want to move.
| | 04:11 | Notice that gives me a new set of
dimensions, they're to similar points, so I'll
| | 04:15 | click my witness lines and now I can
click in here and make that 8 feet.
| | 04:21 | So it's really important that you
always start by selecting the object that you
| | 04:24 | actually want to move
before you edit the dimension.
| | 04:27 | Now this is moving along just fine
and I could continue in this fashion to
| | 04:32 | position the rest of the walls, but it
might be feeling a little tedious to have
| | 04:36 | to constantly move those witness lines.
| | 04:38 | So what I want to talk about next is a
setting that we can modify to change the
| | 04:44 | behavior of our temporary dimensions.
| | 04:47 | In the background here, up here at the
very top of my screen on the QAT, I
| | 04:52 | have my Switch Windows command, and in
the background here I have another file
| | 04:55 | open called Temporary Dimensions, and
this file is included with the exercise
| | 04:59 | files if you want to open it up or you
can just watch here, because really this
| | 05:03 | file is just about concepts.
| | 05:04 | What I have here is an illustration of
the various temporary dimension settings.
| | 05:10 | So the default behavior is to go to
center to center, as we were seeing in the
| | 05:14 | other file, but we can change the setting to go
to either the Finish Face or to the Core Face.
| | 05:18 | We also can change the way it behaves when
it comes to openings, like doors and windows.
| | 05:23 | The default behavior is to go the
centerline of doors, but we can change it to
| | 05:27 | do something more like this were
it goes to the openings of doors.
| | 05:30 | The setting for that is on the Manage
tab, on the Additional Settings all the
| | 05:34 | way down here at the bottom, this command
called Temporary Dimensions, and let me
| | 05:38 | just move this dialog out of the way a
little bit here, and what you could see
| | 05:43 | is for Walls we have these four
settings: Center Lines, Finished Face, Core
| | 05:46 | Face, Core Interior. And we have
these two settings for doors and windows:
| | 05:50 | Center Lines and Openings.
| | 05:52 | So my preference is for it to
actually go to the faces of the walls and the
| | 05:57 | openings of doors and windows, so you
will get this sort of behavior for doors
| | 06:01 | and windows and you'll be
out here at the face for walls.
| | 06:04 | So I am going to cancel here, go
back to my switch windows, go back to my
| | 06:08 | Locating Walls drawing file, Manage
tab again, Additional Settings, Temporary
| | 06:15 | Dimensions, and I am going
to choose Faces, and Openings.
| | 06:19 | When I click OK and I select the new wall,
you'll now see the difference in behavior.
| | 06:25 | The temporary dimensions are
automatically going to be inside faces of the
| | 06:29 | wall now instead of to the centers,
which means I can go in and immediately
| | 06:33 | change that number, and it's going to make
these modifications move a little bit more quickly.
| | 06:40 | These two bathrooms are both 5 feet,
this one right here as well, and this closet
| | 06:49 | here, I'll make that 7
feet and I'll make this 2' 6'.
| | 06:56 | Now remember to do 2' 6' you do
two space six or you do two feet six.
| | 07:03 | So using the temporary dimensions,
you can manipulate the positions of the
| | 07:07 | walls, so you sketch and then modify,
and you can quickly move the positions of
| | 07:11 | the walls to a more precise location.
| | 07:13 | You can either manually manipulate the
witness line grips or you can use the
| | 07:18 | Temporary Dimension setting on the
Manage tab to change the behavior so that
| | 07:22 | it always goes to the faces of the walls
which is usually a little bit more convenient.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the modify tools| 00:00 | Continuing with the layout
of our two bedroom condo unit,
| | 00:02 | there's lots of approaches we can
take to the layout of the walls.
| | 00:05 | In this movie, I'd like to look at
commands like Move and Copy, and Offset and
| | 00:09 | Trim, and these are staple commands in
any CAD or drafting program, and Revit
| | 00:13 | is no exception. So let's take a look at how
some of these tools function here in Revit.
| | 00:17 | So I'm in a file called Modifying
Walls and we're going to click over here on
| | 00:21 | the Modify tab. The Modify tab
contains all of the tools that we're going to
| | 00:26 | look at here on this Modify panel, and I'm
going to start with the
| | 00:29 | Move command. Move command
has a shortcut of MV.
| | 00:33 | Now I'm going to let the tooltip load
here for a second by pausing my mouse
| | 00:38 | over it, and what you'll notice is that a
small animation starts to run after a few seconds.
| | 00:43 | So all of the commands on this tool
palette have these little animated
| | 00:46 | tooltips and they can be really helpful to
give you a sense of how these commands function.
| | 00:50 | So I encourage you to just take a few
moments and pause over each of those and
| | 00:52 | watch the animations.
| | 00:53 | So I'm going to click the Move command
and what you'll see is because I clicked
| | 00:57 | the command first, and I don't actually
have any selection on screen, the Revit
| | 01:03 | is going to prompt me to
make some sort of a selection.
| | 01:04 | If I do it this way, I need to let
Revit know that I'm done selecting by
| | 01:10 | pressing the Enter key.
| | 01:11 | Now this is just one way that we can do it.
| | 01:13 | The alternative is to make your
selection first before you click the command,
| | 01:18 | and I'll show you that next, but
I want you to see both methods.
| | 01:22 | After I've made the selection and
pressed my Enter key, at the status line,
| | 01:26 | it'll say click to enter the move start point.
| | 01:28 | Now there's a variety of ways that you
could indicate where you want to start
| | 01:32 | moving from and where you want to end
up, but in all cases you're picking two
| | 01:36 | points or you're indicating two points.
You are indicating how far you want
| | 01:39 | this object to move.
| | 01:40 | In this case, let's say that I wanted
to go a distance that was equal to the
| | 01:45 | width of this closet. In that case, I
can actually use my object snaps and say I
| | 01:50 | want to go from this endpoint to
this endpoint, and the result will be a
| | 01:56 | movement that matches that width.
| | 01:59 | And when I click, you'll see
that wall will move by that amount.
| | 02:02 | Now a really nice thing happens with
walls is they stay attached at both ends
| | 02:07 | wherever possible, so Revit tries to
keep all of the objects connected to one
| | 02:11 | another. If it can't do that it'll
actually generate an error message and tell
| | 02:15 | you that it can't keep them joined anymore.
| | 02:17 | So that first move I did by
selecting the Move command and then having it
| | 02:21 | prompt me for selection.
| | 02:23 | In this case, I've decided that I moved
it a little too far, I want to move it
| | 02:26 | back a little bit, and the object is
already selected, so now notice that if I
| | 02:31 | click the Move command, it just simply
goes right to asking me about where I
| | 02:36 | want to move from and to,
because it already has a selection.
| | 02:39 | This tends to be my preference.
| | 02:40 | I tend to prefer to select the object
first and then execute the command, but
| | 02:45 | it's really a matter of personal
preference, both achieve the same result.
| | 02:48 | So in this case, I'm going to pick a
random point on screen, start moving in the
| | 02:53 | direction that I want to move, and
then I can simply type on the keyboard how
| | 02:57 | far I want to move, and maybe I
want to go about two-and-a-half feet.
| | 03:00 | So I'm going to put in two space six,
which as you recall is one way that we
| | 03:05 | could put 2 foot 6, I could also put 2
foot symbol 6, either one would work, and
| | 03:11 | now the wall moves back 2 foot 6.
| | 03:14 | Now if you know how to move you already
know how to copy, because the prompts in
| | 03:18 | the Copy command, here is the button, and
the shortcut is CO, are exactly the same.
| | 03:25 | Where do you want a copy from and
where do you want to copy to, and I'm just
| | 03:29 | going to do that on screen with two
clicks, and that will give me a new wall
| | 03:33 | next to the original.
| | 03:35 | Now I could use move again to move this
wall into the position where I want it,
| | 03:40 | I actually want it down here at the
bottom of my plan, or it turns out that at
| | 03:44 | the end of the wall, they
actually have these little grip points.
| | 03:47 | So in this case it might actually be
more convenient to just grab that grip and
| | 03:51 | start dragging it until it snaps to the
opposite wall, and then I can grab this
| | 03:58 | grip and start dragging it to about right there.
| | 04:02 | Again, either method is fine. If you
prefer to move you can feel free to do the
| | 04:07 | move, there's no right or
wrong way to do these things.
| | 04:10 | Let's direct our attention to the
Trim/Extend to Corner command next.
| | 04:15 | I'm going to show you a quick example of that.
| | 04:17 | Here it is right here, TR is the shortcut.
| | 04:20 | You use this command to create L
conditions, so whenever you want to make a nice
| | 04:26 | corner like we have right
here, you can use this command.
| | 04:30 | So for example, if I no longer needed
this part of the wall and I wanted to make
| | 04:34 | that L back here, I can select this as
my first wall and then it will prompt me
| | 04:39 | to select my second wall, and I can
click right here, and you see it actually
| | 04:43 | trims off that piece right there. Let
me repeat it again, from here to here to
| | 04:49 | put it back again, and in that case,
it extended the wall, so this command is
| | 04:53 | either a Trim or an Extend
depending on the two points you click.
| | 04:57 | Now I'm going to use it over here to
create a small little coat closet. We're
| | 05:02 | going to enter our condo right in this
location here, and right here, and here I
| | 05:07 | want to make a small little coat closet.
| | 05:09 | Now notice that it gives me those
little dashed green lines to indicate the
| | 05:13 | result that can be really helpful to
make sure you're clicking the right stuff.
| | 05:17 | You want to pay very close attention,
how does it know whether or not you're
| | 05:21 | getting this undo or this undo?
| | 05:29 | If you pay close attention to the prompt,
it says click on the part you want to
| | 05:35 | keep, here or here, and you can
see the small little dashed line.
| | 05:41 | So if I want to keep that side, that's
the part I click, if I want to keep that
| | 05:45 | side that's the part.
| | 05:46 | So just keep that in mind
as you use this command.
| | 05:50 | Now I need a small corridor over here
to enter the unit and then I want to join
| | 05:54 | that up with this command and I'll be
using trim again for that, but before I
| | 05:57 | can get to the trim I need to actually
create the new wall on the other side,
| | 06:02 | and I could do that using any of the
methods we've talked about so far, let's
| | 06:06 | look at offset for that.
| | 06:07 | So the shortcut is OF, over here on the
Options bar I want to make sure I put in
| | 06:12 | the distance that I want to offset, I'm
going to use five feet in this case,
| | 06:16 | just put in five feet and press Enter.
| | 06:18 | And then as you move your mouse
around on screen, if you highlight objects
| | 06:22 | you'll see a small green dashed line
appear where it would create the offset copy.
| | 06:27 | So I'm going to highlight this wall
right here, make sure the green dash line
| | 06:31 | is down, because it can go up as well
if you move your mouse, so make sure it's
| | 06:35 | going down, and then click and that'll give me
the copied wall in the location that I need it.
| | 06:40 | I'll switch to Trim/Extend, I'm
going to select this wall, and again
| | 06:45 | remember to click the part you want to
keep, so click down here, not up here,
| | 06:51 | and when I do that, it will
create that nice angled corner.
| | 06:55 | I'm going to cancel out of there
with the Modify tool, select this wall.
| | 06:59 | I want to make my living room area here
a little bit larger and my kitchen over
| | 07:03 | here a little bit smaller.
| | 07:05 | So I'm going to use temporary
dimensions in this case to do that, click right
| | 07:09 | here, we've already talked about temporary
dimensions, and make the living room 12 foot 6.
| | 07:14 | Now why would I choose temporary
dimensions here instead of using the move command?
| | 07:18 | Well, you may have noticed that the
dimension I started with was some fractional number.
| | 07:23 | To use the Move command effectively and
end up at exactly 12 foot 6, I'd have to
| | 07:28 | do the math and I'd have to be somewhat precise.
| | 07:30 | The temporary dimension is a much better
job in the case where you know what the
| | 07:34 | final number needs to be.
| | 07:36 | In the case where you know how far you
want to move, the Move command is usually
| | 07:40 | a better choice, so they're both very
effective, it just depends on what you're
| | 07:44 | starting with and where you want to end up.
| | 07:47 | Now over here I need a mechanical
closet and a small pantry, so I'm going to
| | 07:53 | go my Wall command, and I'm just going
to sketch these rooms in, like so, and like so.
| | 08:02 | And I'll fine-tune and clean that up a
little bit later, click my Modify tool to
| | 08:06 | cancel out of there.
| | 08:07 | I want to take this segment of the
wall out, there's a few ways I could
| | 08:12 | approach that, but I want to show you a new
tool for this purpose and that is the Split tool.
| | 08:17 | So I'm going to click on this Split
tool and the way this works is if you
| | 08:21 | click an object it just simply breaks
that into two pieces, so if I cancel out
| | 08:26 | of the command with the Escape key, you'll
see I have one wall here and another wall here.
| | 08:30 | Now if I did it that way I'd have
to then use my trim and clean up this
| | 08:35 | corner and this corner.
| | 08:36 | What I'm going to do instead is Ctrl+Z to
undo that, go back to the Split command.
| | 08:41 | And it has an option over here on the
options bar called Delete Inner Segment.
| | 08:45 | If I remember to check that first, then
it can be a little faster because I'll
| | 08:50 | split it precisely right here at the
intersection, and then right here also at
| | 08:55 | the intersection, and it will
split out the segment in between.
| | 08:59 | If you forget to do that it's not a
big deal. You can erase it manually or use
| | 09:04 | the Trim command as I mentioned, but
this can save you a few clicks if you
| | 09:08 | remember to do that.
| | 09:09 | So as you can see Revit provides many
modification tools to make your layout
| | 09:12 | tasks simpler. You're going to want
to practice with each one of those and
| | 09:17 | get comfortable with them. You can
use them very effectively here in floor
| | 09:21 | plan layouts, but they work anywhere in the
Revit software and for variety of purposes.
| | 09:26 | So make sure you're comfortable with as
many of these as possible because they
| | 09:29 | will remain an important
part of your Revit arsenal.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding doors and windows| 00:00 | In the last few movies, we have
focused on the layout of the walls for our
| | 00:03 | two bedroom condo unit.
| | 00:04 | The next logical thing to do is
to layout the doors and windows.
| | 00:08 | So here I have a file called Doors and
Windows and it's a completed version of
| | 00:12 | the wall layout, and we're going to
look at the various ways that we can add
| | 00:16 | doors and windows to this layout.
| | 00:17 | So let's start with the doors and here
on the Architecture tab, I'm going to
| | 00:22 | click on the Door tool, and that's
going to take me to the Modify/PlaceDoor
| | 00:26 | ribbon tab, and on the Properties palette,
I'll see settings for the doors that I'm placing.
| | 00:31 | Now the first thing I want to look at is
the Type Selector, and if I open up the
| | 00:35 | list here you can see at the top, that
I have a single family in this project
| | 00:38 | called Single-Flush and
it contains several types.
| | 00:43 | Now the default type is 36x84 and I'm
going to choose the 36x80 type instead.
| | 00:50 | That's really the only change that I
want to make here. If I move my mouse into
| | 00:55 | the screen what you're going to see is
the tip tells me that I need to click on
| | 01:00 | a wall to place the door and it's
confirming that or reinforcing that by the
| | 01:04 | small circle with a line through it,
this sort of can't place here symbol, and
| | 01:08 | what you'll see is, as you move your
mouse around, the door will only appear if
| | 01:14 | your cursor happens to be on a wall.
| | 01:17 | So with that in mind, you need to pay
attention to whether or not there's a wall
| | 01:23 | under your cursor. Other than that it
should be pretty easy to place doors.
| | 01:27 | Now I'm going to start with the main
entrance to the condo unit, right over here
| | 01:32 | on this small angled wall, and if you
move slightly, what you'll see is some
| | 01:38 | snapping behavior that we
talked about earlier in this chapter.
| | 01:41 | The door will try to find
the center of this wall.
| | 01:45 | So it's trying to do that automatically,
you don't necessarily have to read the
| | 01:48 | fractions directly to see that, you
can kind of tell that it's finding the
| | 01:52 | center of this wall.
| | 01:53 | So as soon as it finds the center, all I
have to do is click and it will place that door.
| | 01:59 | Now if I want to continue placing 36x80 doors,
I can just continue to move
| | 02:04 | around my plan and find other locations,
and again, this one will snap nicely to
| | 02:09 | the center and this one will also
snap to the center, but notice that it's
| | 02:14 | flipping the wrong way.
| | 02:16 | It's swinging opposite of what I might like.
| | 02:18 | It'll be a little difficult to get
into this room if the door was swinging
| | 02:22 | to the left like this.
| | 02:24 | So notice, as you move the mouse, it can
swing in or out of the room, but to get
| | 02:29 | it to swing left or right, what you
actually have to do is just tap your
| | 02:34 | spacebar, and that will
swing it either left or right.
| | 02:38 | So I'm going to click it to place it
right there and I'll place another one over
| | 02:43 | here, again, I can tap my spacebar.
| | 02:46 | Notice that this time, we're getting a
six-inch dimension there off the end wall.
| | 02:51 | If you recall the movie on Snaps, we
talked about the default snapping behavior.
| | 02:56 | That was not limited to just walls, so
you can use that to your advantage here
| | 03:01 | with doors as well to
maintain standard size jamb.
| | 03:04 | So I can get a six-inch jamb there
or a six-inch jamb over here or really
| | 03:09 | anywhere that I want to see that.
| | 03:11 | So I'm going to continue to place
these, some of these in the center, some of
| | 03:15 | them with a six-inch jamb like so.
| | 03:18 | That's all of the single swing doors that
I need, but I need to add a few more doors.
| | 03:24 | I have some closets that require
bifold doors and I have a patio down in the
| | 03:28 | living room at the bottom of the plan,
that I want to put in a nice double door.
| | 03:33 | So I don't have those door families
currently loaded in this project, as you can
| | 03:37 | see all I have is single flush.
| | 03:39 | So what we're going to do is remain in
the Door command and over here on the
| | 03:44 | ribbon, we can choose this Load Family
button, and I'll click it, and that will
| | 03:49 | bring up the Load Family dialog, and I
am in the out of the box standard US
| | 03:54 | Imperial library. Your screen might
look slightly different, but you should
| | 03:58 | have a Doors folder, and if you open that up,
there are several doors that ship with the software.
| | 04:06 | Now the easiest way to tell what's here
is to click the first item and then use
| | 04:11 | the arrow on your keyboard to slowly
page through all the available doors that
| | 04:16 | are included here and you'll see the
Previews changing over on the right.
| | 04:19 | So you can see there's quite a
few varieties for us to choose from.
| | 04:24 | Now what I'm going to choose here is
my Bifold-2 panel door at the top, hold
| | 04:30 | down my Ctrl key and select the Bifold-4
panel door, and then the Double-Glass 2,
| | 04:36 | Double-Glass 2 has these
muntin patterns on the glass.
| | 04:41 | So I'm going to select all three of
those, click Open, it will load those three
| | 04:48 | families into my project, and then if we
look at our Type selector, we now have
| | 04:54 | those families and their types available to us.
| | 04:57 | So there are several sizes of each of
these families included in the file now.
| | 05:03 | So I'm going to choose the 68x80
Double-Glass door, and I'm going to put one
| | 05:10 | centered down here in the outside of
the living room to get out to our patio.
| | 05:15 | I'm going to change to the Double
bifold door, and I'll do a 72x80, and I'm
| | 05:23 | going to put that one right here on
this closet, and then I'll switch to the
| | 05:29 | single bifold door and I'm just going
to do a 30x80 in this case, and I'm
| | 05:34 | going to place one here, and I'm going
to place one here, and one right here.
| | 05:40 | Now I did those a little bit sloppy on
purpose and in particular I'm going to
| | 05:45 | zoom in on this closet right here and
show you that, the way that came in it's
| | 05:49 | kind of right up against this wall
here, it's also flipping the wrong way.
| | 05:53 | So don't feel like you have the undo
and start over again when situations like
| | 05:58 | this occur, all you have to do is
select it and it's got its own flip grips and
| | 06:02 | you can flip it and it's got temporary
dimensions, and I'm just going to make
| | 06:07 | that 1 inch so that it gives me a
small 1 inch jamb on either side.
| | 06:11 | So things like that are very easy to
fix after you place them, using the same
| | 06:15 | methods that we use with walls before.
| | 06:17 | Temporary dimensions and flip grips.
| | 06:20 | So as a final touch for this plan, I'm
going to go to the Window tool, if you
| | 06:24 | scan the ribbon tabs and the
Properties palette, it looks always exactly the
| | 06:28 | same as placing doors. We have a Type
selector here, we have choices on this
| | 06:34 | list, we have a lot of the same
choices over here, what you'll notice here on
| | 06:38 | the list is all I have is a fixed
window, which may not be the best choice for
| | 06:43 | a condominium plan.
| | 06:44 | So just like we were able to do with
doors, I'm going to choose Load Family,
| | 06:49 | scroll down to my Windows folder, and
choose a more appropriate type window.
| | 06:55 | In this case, I'm going to choose a
Casement Dbl with Trim, open it up, pick my
| | 07:01 | desired size, there is a few different
choices available I'll use a 48x48 and
| | 07:07 | I'll place one in each of
the rooms that need a window.
| | 07:13 | Click the Modify tool and that takes
care of our door and window placement.
| | 07:17 | So placing doors and windows is a
simple matter of choosing the tool and
| | 07:22 | clicking on the wall where you want it
to go, remember that you have temporary
| | 07:25 | dimensions to fine-tune their placement.
| | 07:27 | So if you don't have the family or type
that you're looking for in your project,
| | 07:32 | you simply click the Load Family tool,
go out to your library on the hard drive,
| | 07:36 | choose the one you want, load it
in and place it in your project.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using constraints| 00:00 | So I am going to add a little bit more
smarts to some of the dimensions here in my files.
| | 00:05 | So Revit offers us a few different
kinds of constraints that we can work with
| | 00:09 | and I'd like to show you a few of those here.
| | 00:11 | So I'm in a file called Constraints
and this is just a version of our two
| | 00:14 | bedroom condo, and I'm going to start
in this area down here, just zoom in a
| | 00:20 | Region on this closet here.
| | 00:24 | And you can see two small problems, one
is that I don't have a whole lot of room
| | 00:29 | for the doorway right there, so I might
want to reduce the size of this closet
| | 00:33 | slightly, and two, this door
in the closet is not centered.
| | 00:37 | Now perhaps I am going to consider a
few different positions for this door, so
| | 00:43 | what I can do is build a
relationship between the door and the closet.
| | 00:49 | And it's going to start
with a permanent dimension.
| | 00:52 | Now up until now we've done everything
with temporary dimensions, but up here on
| | 00:56 | my Quick Access Toolbar is the
Aligned Dimension tool, the shortcut is D I.
| | 01:02 | Permanent Dimensions are just as their
name implies they remain a permanent part
| | 01:08 | of your drawing file, they don't go
away in other words when the objects are
| | 01:12 | deselected like temporaries do.
| | 01:15 | Now you could see here that it's
defaulting to highlighting the centerline of
| | 01:20 | the wall and there's two ways I can
change that, I can use this dropdown over
| | 01:23 | here on the Options Bar, or I can press
the Tab key on my keyboard to shift to
| | 01:31 | one of the other faces.
| | 01:32 | Now in this case I move my mouse
slightly to the exterior face and I am able to
| | 01:36 | tab between center and exterior, if I
move my mouse slightly to the interior
| | 01:41 | face I can tab between those two choices.
| | 01:43 | And I want to go to the exterior face
and that's going to be my first witness
| | 01:49 | line location of this dimension.
| | 01:51 | Then if I move around on the door
you'll see there's lots of choices inside the
| | 01:56 | door that I can use, and I am going to
locate this centerline of the door right
| | 02:00 | here, and then finally use my Tab key
again to get the inside face of this
| | 02:06 | closet, and the final click is to
place where I want to dimension to go.
| | 02:11 | So I've got the three witness lines
and then I'll just place the dimension
| | 02:15 | out here somewhere.
| | 02:16 | Now you could see the
numbers are completely random.
| | 02:19 | There is a few little controls
floating next to the dimensions, I'm going to
| | 02:23 | talk about the locks in just a few
moments, we are going to look at this one
| | 02:26 | right now, Toggle Dimension Equality.
| | 02:28 | If I just simply click that, that will
actually move the position of the door and
| | 02:33 | center it between the two
witness lines that I asked for.
| | 02:37 | I am going to click my Modify tool to
cancel out of here, and now I am going to
| | 02:41 | select this wall, and this is where we
start to benefit from this constraint.
| | 02:45 | The Equality constraint is not a one
time operation, in other words, it didn't
| | 02:51 | just move the door and that's it. It's
an ongoing live constraint or what I'm
| | 02:55 | calling smarts here.
| | 02:57 | So I'm going to select this wall,
click on this dimension and I am going to
| | 03:02 | make that number 4 feet.
| | 03:04 | And notice that when this wall moves,
that Equality Constraint is maintained and
| | 03:09 | the position of the door shifts as well.
| | 03:12 | So you could move this wall to
several locations and you'll see it will
| | 03:17 | continue to modify and update, I am just going to
use my dimension here and set it back to 4 feet.
| | 03:23 | Now let's look at
another example of some smarts.
| | 03:25 | We'll look at that Lock constraint next,
I'm going to zoom over here, I just
| | 03:29 | use my wheel to drag over and zoom, and
I'm going to come up and choose my Align
| | 03:35 | Dimension again or DI, highlight the
wall, press my Tab key to get the inside
| | 03:40 | face, and this time I can actually choose
the face of the door and set a dimension here.
| | 03:47 | And let's say that this dimension is
important enough to me that I want to make
| | 03:51 | sure that gets maintained
even if the closet shifts around.
| | 03:55 | All I have to do is click this small
little Lock icon right here, that will lock
| | 03:59 | that dimension and now if this wall
were to move it will maintain that
| | 04:04 | relationship with the door.
| | 04:06 | The door has to stay in that location, it
doesn't matter whether I move it left or right.
| | 04:11 | I am going to go ahead and undo that.
| | 04:13 | Okay, but I am going to leave the Lock.
| | 04:15 | Now let's look at one more example.
Loaded here in the background I have
| | 04:19 | another file called Equality, it's also
included with the exercise files, let's open that up.
| | 04:25 | I am going to Zoom in Region here on
these four offices. We'll be working more
| | 04:31 | with this file later in the course, but
for right now I've got the file provided
| | 04:35 | and you could see that these four
offices are all different sizes.
| | 04:39 | So using my dimension one more time,
Align Dimension, and highlighting each of
| | 04:45 | these walls, and I am just doing the
center lines right now and I'll place
| | 04:51 | the dimension out here.
| | 04:53 | So just like we saw a moment ago I can
click the little Equality Toggle and it
| | 04:59 | will respace all of those walls and
make all of these offices equally sized.
| | 05:05 | It's a live constraint just like the
others so if I move one of the walls you'll
| | 05:10 | see it re-spaces all of the walls accordingly.
| | 05:14 | Now I am getting an error here because
that was kind of a sloppy change because
| | 05:18 | now all these walls are intersecting
these doors, and Revit saying just so you
| | 05:22 | know you've got walls right in the
middle of your doors there, so you might want
| | 05:25 | do something about that.
| | 05:27 | So what I'm going to do about that is
just simply undo, but you see that the
| | 05:31 | offices are now all equally spaced.
| | 05:34 | Now as the last thing that I want to
show you here in this movie, the Equal,
| | 05:38 | Equal what we're seeing here on the
dimension string we can actually customize, okay.
| | 05:43 | So this is a permanent dimension, as
you can see when nothing is selected the
| | 05:46 | dimension remains on screen, and what
Revit defaults to is showing the little EQ
| | 05:51 | symbol on each of those dimensions.
| | 05:53 | So it doesn't actually tell us what those
values are, but you can change that if you want to.
| | 05:58 | I am going to select the dimension and
over here on the Properties palette you
| | 06:03 | have actually three choices, the
Equality Text is what we're seeing, the EQ.
| | 06:08 | We can also choose the Value and if I
apply that you'll see it actually shows
| | 06:13 | the numerical value and they're all
the same. Or new in 2013, we have this
| | 06:19 | feature here Equality Formula.
| | 06:22 | Now if I choose that and I apply it the
formula that it's defaulting to is not a
| | 06:27 | very useful formula, because if I
keep the dimensions selected and edit its
| | 06:34 | type, now you may recall we talked
about the difference between Instance and
| | 06:38 | Type Properties in an earlier movie, we
were talking about walls at that time,
| | 06:42 | but annotation objects like dimensions
also have Instance and Type properties,
| | 06:48 | and so if I edit the type of the
dimension string and scroll down, the formula
| | 06:54 | is controlled down here.
| | 06:57 | So the Equality Text is EQ,
that's where we could change that.
| | 07:00 | So if you wanted to write out the word
Equal, remember earlier we were seeing EQ
| | 07:04 | repeated, we could change it there.
| | 07:07 | The Formula here is just set to Total
Length, which is why I am seeing just the
| | 07:12 | total length of the dimension,
which is probably not very useful.
| | 07:16 | So I'm going to click this button,
and in this dialog I am going to select
| | 07:22 | Total Length and I am going to remove
that, and then over here I have different
| | 07:26 | things that I can include.
| | 07:28 | So what I'm going to say is Number of
Segments and I'm going to add that, and
| | 07:33 | then the Length of the Segment and I am
going to add that, and then as a suffix
| | 07:38 | to Number of Segments I'm just going to
put in the @ symbol, just like you would
| | 07:42 | use in email, and I am going to click OK,
and OK again, and now I'll get something
| | 07:47 | that I think is a little bit more useful.
| | 07:50 | It's telling me I have 4@ and then
the distance of one of those segments.
| | 07:54 | And of course you could
do any variation you want.
| | 07:56 | So I encourage you to go to Edit Type
and play with some other combinations
| | 08:00 | until you arrive at the one
that matches your office standards.
| | 08:04 | So you can see that using either Lock
Constraints or Equality Constraints adds
| | 08:09 | an additional level of smarts to our
models and they're not only one time
| | 08:15 | modifications that give us value but
they are ongoing constraints that remain
| | 08:20 | applied until we choose to come back
and remove them and help maintain design
| | 08:25 | intent in an ongoing fashion.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding plumbing fixtures and other components| 00:00 | Our two bedroom condo unit is coming
along nicely, but it takes a little bit
| | 00:03 | more than just walls, doors and
windows to make a typical building layout.
| | 00:07 | So in this movie, we'll look at the
Component tool, which is the tool we use to
| | 00:11 | bring in a variety of miscellaneous items.
| | 00:14 | As a rule of thumb if you don't see a
dedicated tool for the item you're trying
| | 00:18 | to insert, it's probably going
to be under the Component tool.
| | 00:22 | So in other words, if I wanted a door,
or a window or column, I have buttons for
| | 00:26 | those but I don't see a button for
toilets or for furnaces or for washer/dryers.
| | 00:32 | So it's a pretty good bet that I'm
going to find those items under
| | 00:35 | Component; sort of a catchall button
for all the miscellaneous items that
| | 00:39 | you want to insert in a model.
| | 00:41 | So when I click on the Component tool,
it will take me to the Modify Place
| | 00:45 | Component tab, and if I open up the
list, you can see that what's loaded in my
| | 00:49 | default template is a rather eclectic list,
I have a desk, a parking space and a tree.
| | 00:55 | So as you can see, we really do have a
variety of items to choose from here,
| | 00:59 | however, none of the items on that list
are the items that I actually want to add.
| | 01:04 | So we are going to go right here to
Load Family, same as we did in the previous
| | 01:09 | movie with doors and windows, and
that will take us to the standard
| | 01:12 | out-of-the-box library.
| | 01:13 | So you might want to familiarize
yourself with the folder structure by spending
| | 01:17 | sometime looking around what's provided here.
| | 01:20 | So for the first item, I want to
bring in a furnace for the utility room.
| | 01:23 | So I am going to go to the Mechanical
folder and then there's a single folder in
| | 01:27 | there, Architectural, and then I'm
going to choose an Air-Side Component and
| | 01:32 | finally the Furnaces folder.
| | 01:35 | The Furnaces folder contains just a
single family called Furnace, so I'm going
| | 01:39 | to select that and I am going to open it up.
| | 01:43 | Now you'll see the item appear directly
on my cursor and I can actually place it
| | 01:47 | wherever I would like it to go.
| | 01:49 | I call this a freestanding family because
there is no restrictions on its placement.
| | 01:53 | If you recall the previous movie where
we placed windows and doors, those were
| | 01:57 | actually wall hosted families and if you
recall unless your cursor was on top of
| | 02:02 | a wall you got the small little
circle with a line through it.
| | 02:05 | So if you see that sort of indication
it tells you that the object you are
| | 02:10 | placing requires a host, but in this
case because I am getting the symbol
| | 02:13 | right away, it tells me this object
does not require a host and I can just
| | 02:17 | place it wherever I like.
| | 02:18 | Now like we've seen in other movies I
can tap the spacebar and this item will
| | 02:23 | actually rotate in 90 degree increments.
| | 02:26 | Another interesting little trick that
we can do is if your mouse happens to be
| | 02:30 | highlighting something that's at a
different angle and then you tap the
| | 02:34 | spacebar, the object will actually
match the orientation of that new object.
| | 02:39 | So in this case it will match the
angled wall, and if I tap it again it will
| | 02:43 | rotate 90 degrees, and if I want to
reset the rotation I just move out into
| | 02:48 | empty space and tap one more time
and I'm back to the standard rotation.
| | 02:52 | So I am going to spin it around this way,
bring it over here and place it kind
| | 02:58 | of in this location right here in my
Utility room, give it a little bit of room
| | 03:03 | all the way around, like so.
| | 03:05 | Now I am going to stay in the Component
command, but I need to load a new component.
| | 03:10 | So I am going to go back to Load Family,
and this time I want to scroll down
| | 03:16 | here and locate the Specialty
Equipment folder, I'm going to double-click
| | 03:20 | that, then I am going to go into the
Domestic folder, and in here there are
| | 03:25 | actually several items.
| | 03:26 | So if I just click the first item and
use the Arrow key on my keyboard I can
| | 03:30 | scroll through and see that we
have several items to choose from.
| | 03:34 | Well, I am going to need a washer and
a dryer, so I am going to select that.
| | 03:39 | Washer hold down my Ctrl key, select the Dryer.
| | 03:41 | I'm also going to need a
Range and a Refrigerator.
| | 03:44 | So with the Ctrl key held down I'll
select all four of those items and click
| | 03:49 | Open, and it will load those
four families into my project.
| | 03:53 | When it's done, you'll see the last item
I loaded, in this case the Range is on
| | 03:58 | my cursor, I can tap my spacebar to
rotate it around and then I'll place it over
| | 04:04 | here and notice that it will try and
snap to the wall, so that's kind of handy.
| | 04:08 | Change to a different item, like my
Dryer, choose my size, spin it around and I
| | 04:18 | can place it right there.
| | 04:21 | Choose my Washer, take the size, rotate
it around, see how it's trying to find
| | 04:29 | the orientations here.
| | 04:30 | I got to find a spot where it's not going
to want a snap to an angle, there we go.
| | 04:35 | Place it right there next to the
Dryer and then finally my Refrigerator.
| | 04:44 | I'll just place that one like so.
| | 04:46 | I can move that a little bit later.
| | 04:48 | Let's load one more Family, we are
going to go to the Plumbing Fixtures folder
| | 04:52 | this time, Architectural, and then
Fixtures, and then Water Closets and I will
| | 05:01 | find two versions of a domestic toilet.
| | 05:04 | Now there's a 2D version and a 3D version.
| | 05:07 | Sometimes your choice here will depend
on performance considerations. If you're
| | 05:12 | doing a very large project, hundreds of
thousands of square feet, adding a lot of
| | 05:16 | 3D toilets can increase the
file size and slow performance.
| | 05:20 | In this case, we're doing a small
condominium building and we only need a couple
| | 05:24 | of toilets, so I don't really think
the difference would be noticeable.
| | 05:27 | So if you want to use the 3D or the
2D it's really up to you, I'm going to
| | 05:32 | choose the 3D version, click Open.
| | 05:33 | And even though I've chosen the 3D
version, let me just roll my wheel here and
| | 05:37 | zoom in a touch, notice that it
still gives me a 2D symbol in Plan View.
| | 05:41 | So I'll show you the 3D View in just a few
minutes and we'll see the difference there.
| | 05:45 | But it still gives me a
nice 2D version here in plan.
| | 05:48 | I am going to tap my spacebar, rotate it around.
| | 05:51 | Once again, it will highlight the
nearby wall, spacebar a couple of times
| | 05:57 | and the nearby wall.
| | 05:58 | So let me Cancel out this command clicking
the Modify tool, and I promised you a
| | 06:03 | look at the 3D. There is a really
simple way that we can check our progress
| | 06:08 | here in 3D and that is up on a Quick
Access Toolbar up here, the QAT. We can
| | 06:12 | click this small little 3D House icon,
it kind of almost looks like a little
| | 06:16 | birdhouse and we'll click on that, and that will
take us into what Revit calls a Default 3D View.
| | 06:23 | Now if I scroll down here on the
Project Browser we now have a 3D branch on our
| | 06:28 | Project Browser, and if I expand that,
the name of the Default 3D View has these
| | 06:32 | little curly brackets around here.
| | 06:34 | So I often call this Curly Bracket 3D.
| | 06:35 | Now you can rename that if you want
to, but that's just the default name.
| | 06:39 | Now navigationally you have a couple
of ways you can spin this around and get
| | 06:44 | a better look, because obviously we
can't see really any of that equipment
| | 06:47 | that we've just placed.
| | 06:48 | So we maybe want to tip this down
and peek inside a little bit more.
| | 06:52 | You can use the View Cube over here on
the right-hand side or you can just orbit
| | 06:57 | the view actually using your wheel mouse.
| | 06:59 | So in either case, let me show you both
methods. If I come over here to the View
| | 07:04 | Cube and click and drag it, click hold
down and drag it, that's one way that I
| | 07:09 | can spin this around.
| | 07:11 | Now I am dragging the cube so I
have sort of freeform motion here.
| | 07:16 | If I drag the little circle at its base,
this little turntable, that will spin
| | 07:21 | in the model, but it will limit the height.
| | 07:24 | It won't change the height, so it'll
just sort of spin it around as if it was
| | 07:28 | literally on a potter's wheel.
| | 07:29 | Now if you hold your Shift key down on
your keyboard and then drag with your
| | 07:34 | wheel pushed in, you can
kind of do a similar thing.
| | 07:38 | So here you can see that's another way
that I can orbit this around, and what I
| | 07:43 | am going to do is kind of tip it up a
little bit so we can start to see down
| | 07:48 | into here. If I roll the wheel forward,
zoom in, there is the toilet in 3D, zoom
| | 07:52 | back out and then let me hold the Shift
and spin around again, and kind of get a
| | 07:59 | better look here, there is our washer,
dryer and our range and our furnace.
| | 08:05 | So anytime you'd like to kind of see
how things are shaping up in a 3D view
| | 08:10 | all you have to do is click that little
birdhouse icon and then use one of the
| | 08:14 | orbiting methods that I just showed you to
spin around and get a better look at stuff.
| | 08:18 | So anytime you need another
component in your file that's not readily
| | 08:22 | available, all you have to do is
click the Component tool, go to the Load
| | 08:26 | Family, browse through your available Library
and load in the components that you'd like to use.
| | 08:31 | In the next movie, we'll look at
other places where we can find content in
| | 08:35 | online libraries so that's another
option that we'll have available to us.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Autodesk Seek| 00:00 | Revit ships with a fairly substantial
library of family components that you
| | 00:03 | can access quickly and easily through the Load
Family tool that we saw in the previous movie.
| | 00:08 | However, even with this resource, you
will quickly find that there are items
| | 00:11 | lacking from the out-of-the-box offerings.
| | 00:13 | You could of course build these items
yourself and we have a chapter devoted to
| | 00:17 | the Family Editor later in the course.
| | 00:18 | There are many web sites available
that offer Revit content as well.
| | 00:21 | And so in this movie, what I'd like
to do is look at the web site that's
| | 00:24 | actually hosted by Autodesk
and it's called Autodesk Seek.
| | 00:28 | And in fact, it's actually built right here
into the product, so it's very easy to get to.
| | 00:32 | So you can see here I'm in a file
called Using Seek, and it's a version of the
| | 00:36 | file we were working on in the last
movie, and I've just added one or two
| | 00:40 | additional components;
| | 00:41 | a few countertops and a hot water heater.
| | 00:43 | I'm going to go to the Insert tab,
and over here on the right-hand side is
| | 00:49 | the Autodesk Seek panel, and the way
this works is you simply click in this
| | 00:53 | field, and input what you're looking
for as a search, and it will go out to
| | 00:57 | seek, and look for the item.
| | 00:59 | So in this case, I'm going to type in
bathtub, press Enter, and that will load
| | 01:05 | my default web browser and search for bathtubs.
| | 01:08 | Now you'll see that it takes me to
Autodesk Seek, and it's searching Revit
| | 01:13 | content, and it puts in the
search query that I asked for here.
| | 01:16 | Here is all my results.
| | 01:17 | Now there might be dozens if
not hundreds in some cases.
| | 01:20 | It really depends on what
your search criteria is.
| | 01:23 | In this particular case, I'm going to
limit the search, you can see here that
| | 01:28 | there are lots of manufacturer
provided content that shows up here.
| | 01:31 | So there's several Kohler items and
if I scroll down, there might be other
| | 01:35 | manufacturers like Sterling Plumbing, and so on.
| | 01:37 | For this particular example, I'm going
to limit the content source over here
| | 01:42 | to the generic items.
| | 01:43 | These would be items that are provided
actually by Autodesk, and so rather than
| | 01:47 | go and pick a specific manufacturer,
but feel free to explore the manufacturer
| | 01:52 | content on your own if you like.
| | 01:54 | I'm going to stick with this
very simple rectangular bathtub.
| | 01:57 | Here, you can see there's a preview,
and I'll click Bath Tub right there.
| | 02:01 | You could see that it comes in
several different file formats.
| | 02:04 | So typically what you want to do is
choose the latest version that's available.
| | 02:08 | So I'm going to choose 2011 in this
case, and there are two options up here.
| | 02:13 | We can download it to Autodesk 360,
if you have such an account, or you can
| | 02:19 | click the dropdown here and say download it
to your local, and that's what I'm going to do.
| | 02:23 | So I'm going to click that,
and then click the button.
| | 02:26 | You may have to accept an agreement,
so be sure you read the Terms and
| | 02:29 | Conditions and then check this and click Accept.
| | 02:33 | Then, it will ask you what you want to
do with the file that you are downloading.
| | 02:36 | Now the exact steps that I'm following
here might vary if you have a different
| | 02:40 | web browser, but it should
look something like this.
| | 02:42 | We can either save the file to our
hard-drive or we can open it directly in
| | 02:46 | Revit which is actually what I'm
going to do, that will save me a step.
| | 02:50 | So this will open it directly in Revit, and
it actually opens it in the Family Editor.
| | 02:52 | Now I don't want to get into any of the
details of the Family Editor just yet.
| | 02:56 | We're going to cover that in a later chapter.
| | 02:58 | All we really need to do here is come
over here to this button up on the ribbon,
| | 03:02 | Load into Project and click that, and
it will take this item that we have open
| | 03:07 | in the Family Editor, and it will
load it directly into my current project.
| | 03:12 | Now you could see the size that
it's bringing in is kind of small.
| | 03:16 | So if I open up this list here, it
loaded the family bath tub, and lots
| | 03:22 | of different sizes.
| | 03:23 | Now my toilet rooms are 5 feet, so a
60x30 inch size ought to do nicely.
| | 03:30 | So I'll choose this 60x30 inch.
| | 03:33 | I will tap the spacebar a few times and
place it right in that corner there, pan
| | 03:40 | over here, place another one
in that corner right there.
| | 03:46 | I will press Escape to cancel out of the
command, and if I wanted to, I could
| | 03:52 | continue performing additional search
queries in Seek and looking for other content.
| | 03:57 | So Seek is Autodesk's online offering
that provides access to lots of online
| | 04:02 | content both provided by
Autodesk and by several manufacturers.
| | 04:07 | So I encourage you to take some time
to do some searches on Seek and get
| | 04:12 | comfortable with the
offerings that are available there.
| | 04:14 | I think you'll find that it's a vast
resource that you'll find very useful
| | 04:18 | in your projects.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using wall joins| 00:00 | So our two bedroom condominium floor
plan has come along quite nicely and we're
| | 00:04 | almost done but we have some
small finishing touches to complete.
| | 00:06 | I'm in a file here called Wall Joins,
and if you recall when we were laying
| | 00:11 | out the interior partitions, we ended
up with some undesirable conditions over
| | 00:14 | here and over here.
| | 00:16 | I'm going to use my zoom in region
and zoom in on this location, and you
| | 00:21 | may recall that we had these really sharp
corners here where the walls come together.
| | 00:25 | In addition to that, if I zoom in
even closer over in this location, you'll
| | 00:29 | see that I've got this masonry wall
here and here with the crosshatching
| | 00:34 | inside, and it's joining one way over
here with the neighboring wall and a
| | 00:38 | different way over here.
| | 00:40 | Now when I look at this, I would really
rather have the masonry pass all the way
| | 00:44 | through here and have it
interrupt this wall here.
| | 00:47 | So I want this wall to pass through this wall.
| | 00:49 | Now we can actually control that
with a command called Edit Wall Joins.
| | 00:52 | So if you go to your Modify tab, and on
the Geometry panel, you'll find the Wall
| | 00:57 | Joins tool right here.
| | 00:59 | So I'm going to click that.
| | 01:01 | Now the way this works is you move
your mouse around on screen and it will
| | 01:05 | highlight with a square any
intersection that you have on the screen there.
| | 01:10 | So what I'm going to do is click
right on this intersection to make that
| | 01:14 | the focus of this tool.
| | 01:16 | That will activate the
Configuration options here on the Options Bar.
| | 01:21 | The way this works is you can choose
from a Butt or a Miter condition and you
| | 01:26 | have several different
conditions that you can toggle through.
| | 01:29 | So the default behavior is a Butt
condition, a Miter would look like that;
| | 01:34 | probably not what I want in this case.
| | 01:36 | So let's stick with the Butt condition.
| | 01:38 | And each time I click Next or Previous, it
will toggle through the available options.
| | 01:44 | So all I need to do to get the
condition I'm after is click Next until it
| | 01:48 | displays the way that I like, and then
if I'm satisfied with that, I can click
| | 01:52 | the Modify tool to cancel out of the
command and that completes the operation.
| | 01:57 | So it's pretty simple and
straightforward approach.
| | 01:59 | Let's zoom over here and take
a look at these two conditions.
| | 02:04 | Here's my Edit Wall Joins.
| | 02:05 | I'm going to click on this intersection here.
| | 02:08 | Now again with a Butt condition, it
would just be between this and this which
| | 02:11 | frankly we wouldn't notice any difference.
| | 02:13 | But, what I have here now is a third
option because of the acute angle here.
| | 02:18 | So I'm going to choose the Square off
option, and that's exactly what it I will
| | 02:22 | do, is it will make a nice
squared off condition there.
| | 02:25 | Let me click on this
condition here, do Square off.
| | 02:28 | It will square it off this way, or if
I like, I can click Next, and it will
| | 02:32 | square it off that way, so you
choose whichever one that you want.
| | 02:36 | I'm going to go with that one and then
when I'm satisfied, I click the Modify
| | 02:40 | tool and that completes the Wall Join edits.
| | 02:45 | So editing Wall Joins is a
pretty simple process to undertake.
| | 02:49 | You just simply click the Wall
Join tool, you apply the focus to the
| | 02:53 | intersection that you want to
clean up, and then you use the Next and
| | 02:56 | Previous options, and the other
options in the Options Bar to decide what
| | 02:59 | condition you're after.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Links, Imports, and GroupsLinking AutoCAD DWG files| 00:00 | Revit is a robust design and
documentation software package that requires no
| | 00:04 | other software in order to function.
| | 00:06 | However, the building industry
utilizes many software packages and tools.
| | 00:11 | Fortunately, Revit can read and write
to many of the most popular file formats.
| | 00:15 | The most common file format of all in the
building industry is Revit's own DWG format.
| | 00:20 | This is the native file format for AutoCAD.
| | 00:23 | If you share files with architects or
engineers, there's a good chance that
| | 00:26 | someone on the project team is
sharing data in the DWG format.
| | 00:30 | Fortunately, using DWG files with Revit is easy.
| | 00:34 | So let's take a look.
| | 00:35 | In this chapter, we're going to look at
a few different examples, but I'm going
| | 00:39 | to start here in this movie
with the LinkCAD function.
| | 00:42 | The LinkCAD function allows me to bring
the DWG file into my Revit project but
| | 00:48 | maintains a link back to the original file.
| | 00:50 | This will be really handy if something
has changed in the original DWG file,
| | 00:56 | we'll be able to automatically reload
the latest changes from that DWG file
| | 01:01 | without having to repeat the
whole linking process over again.
| | 01:04 | So this is largely considered the best
practice way to bring in CAD data from AutoCAD.
| | 01:09 | I'm in a file here called Link CAD
and it's just based on the default
| | 01:13 | architectural template, and I'm going to
go to the Insert tab and click here on
| | 01:18 | the Link CAD button.
| | 01:19 | And that will take me to a browse
window, and you can see here that in the
| | 01:24 | Chapter05 folder, I've got a few
different DWG files provided, and I'm going
| | 01:27 | to select this one right here,
AutoCAD Floorplan.dwg and you can see that
| | 01:31 | that's really just a copy of our two bedroom
condo unit that we were using in the last chapter.
| | 01:36 | Now down at the bottom we have lots
of settings and we want to kind of run
| | 01:38 | through each of these.
| | 01:39 | I'm going to start here in the
middle with the ones that are a little bit
| | 01:41 | more self-explanatory.
| | 01:43 | How do you want to deal with the
colors or the layers or the import units?
| | 01:47 | For colors, we have three choices;
| | 01:48 | we can invert, preserve, or
force everything to black and white.
| | 01:52 | The main issue here is that most
AutoCAD users work on a black background with
| | 01:57 | bright primary colors.
| | 01:58 | You can see the bright colors
over here in the background.
| | 02:01 | Those colors don't look so well on a
white background that we have here in Revit.
| | 02:05 | So typically, Preserve isn't
going to give you the nicest results.
| | 02:09 | So you'll want to choose
either Invert or Black and White.
| | 02:13 | Now we'll look at an example of Black
and White a little bit later, so for now
| | 02:17 | I'm going to choose Invert.
| | 02:18 | This is going to leave the file in
color but it's just going to reverse all the
| | 02:20 | colors and make them a little bit
easier to see on a white background.
| | 02:24 | CAD files are organized into layers,
layers are just how all the data is
| | 02:28 | organized and separated from one another.
| | 02:31 | If you're familiar with the CAD file,
you can choose one of the options here
| | 02:35 | like the Visible layers or the Specify
in order to choose the actual layers that
| | 02:39 | you want to bring in.
| | 02:40 | If you're not familiar with the file,
it's best to just choose All, see what
| | 02:43 | you get on screen, and then you can
manipulate the layer settings after you bring it in.
| | 02:48 | So both are possibilities.
| | 02:51 | Units can be Auto-Detect, that's the default.
| | 02:54 | That's usually the best choice,
| | 02:55 | but if for some reason the file
comes in and it didn't interpret the units
| | 02:59 | correctly, you can undo and then
reopen this list and choose the specific
| | 03:04 | unit that you need.
| | 03:05 | But normally, Auto-Detect will give
you exactly what you want, so I recommend
| | 03:08 | you start with that.
| | 03:09 | Correct lines that are slightly off axis;
| | 03:11 | this is a new feature in 2013.
| | 03:14 | This is a really welcome new feature,
because previously, what would happen is
| | 03:19 | when you bring in a CAD file, you would
often get this error message that said
| | 03:22 | that lines were slightly off
axis, and it could cause errors.
| | 03:26 | The way that AutoCAD calculates
geometry and the way Revit calculates geometry
| | 03:29 | is a little different from one another,
and there is a variety of technical
| | 03:33 | reasons why this error would generate.
| | 03:34 | But nonetheless, the error was
relatively benign, but it was troubling just the
| | 03:38 | same to see an error appear.
| | 03:39 | So this option corrects the error before it
occurs, and it's a welcome addition to 2013.
| | 03:44 | So I highly recommend that you check that box.
| | 03:47 | For Positioning, you have a variety of choices.
| | 03:50 | We're going to look at a few different
options throughout the course of this in
| | 03:54 | the next several movies.
| | 03:55 | So for this first example, I'm going to
use the Origin to Origin option which is
| | 03:59 | going to try to take the 0, 0 point or
the origin in the CAD file, and line it
| | 04:02 | up with the origin here in Revit.
| | 04:05 | Now the origin here in Revit is typically
right about there in the center of the screen.
| | 04:09 | So that's what I'm looking for is to get
this file to line up in that general location.
| | 04:15 | If Origin to Origin doesn't work and
there's times when it won't work and
| | 04:18 | we'll discuss that a little bit later, not to
worry, we can always move the file afterwards.
| | 04:23 | So it's not a setting that you
have to get too concerned about.
| | 04:26 | Choose what you think is the best
option, see what results you get, and then
| | 04:30 | make modifications as necessary.
| | 04:31 | I'm going to place it at Level 1,
that seems perfectly logical.
| | 04:34 | And then over here, this setting is
actually fairly important, when we bring in
| | 04:39 | the CAD file, there's two
ways that Revit can interpret it.
| | 04:43 | If we choose Current view only, it
treats the CAD file like any other view
| | 04:48 | specific element in Revit.
| | 04:50 | So if you think about tags and
dimensions and text, those are view
| | 04:53 | specific elements in Revit.
| | 04:55 | Choosing current view only would
make this CAD file behave the same way.
| | 04:58 | In other words, it would only
show in my Level 1 floor plan.
| | 05:03 | If I go to Level 2 or if I
go to 3D, it would disappear.
| | 05:07 | That's probably a pretty good idea if
you're bringing in a CAD file for every
| | 05:11 | level of the building.
| | 05:12 | Let's say your designer did sketches
in AutoCAD, and laid out the rough floor
| | 05:17 | plans for levels 2, 3, 4, 5, and then
you're bringing them in to Revit in order
| | 05:22 | to trace over them and create a Revit file.
| | 05:24 | You're probably not going to want to
have to manually hide all the floor plans
| | 05:28 | and all the other views.
| | 05:29 | So using Current view only
is a great way to manage that.
| | 05:32 | Now we'll see an example in the next
movie where we're going to uncheck Current
| | 05:36 | view only and that's going to give
us 3D data from the CAD file, and so
| | 05:40 | obviously, that's a slightly different approach.
| | 05:42 | But in this case, we're going to use
the Current view only, and that's going to
| | 05:46 | tell this floor plan to only appear in Level 1.
| | 05:49 | So I'm going to go ahead, and click Open here.
| | 05:52 | You're going to see the file come in.
| | 05:54 | If I click on it, it highlights the
entire thing and it selects as a single
| | 05:58 | unit, and it's got this
little pushpin icon on it.
| | 06:01 | That pushpin is there because we
chose the Origin to Origin option.
| | 06:05 | Had we chose any of the other options,
it would not be pinned and what the pin
| | 06:09 | does is it prevents me
from accidentally moving it.
| | 06:11 | So you see how I can't move the object?
| | 06:14 | Now if you need to move it, you can
just simply unpin it, and then it's free to
| | 06:17 | move, but I'm going to undo
that, so that it's re-pinned.
| | 06:22 | So you always have the option to
unpin it and move it if necessary.
| | 06:26 | Now if I go to Level 2, you can
see that it doesn't display here.
| | 06:30 | That was the Current view only setting.
| | 06:33 | Let me go back to Level 1.
| | 06:34 | I'm going to zoom in a little bit.
| | 06:37 | The colors are darker colors.
| | 06:40 | That's because we chose the Invert
option, so you can see here what the
| | 06:43 | result of that option was.
| | 06:45 | Now finally, if my assumption here was
that this file came from AutoCAD because
| | 06:51 | the designer was working in AutoCAD or
perhaps the file was created years ago
| | 06:55 | before we had Revit, and I now want to
do something with it in Revit, one of
| | 07:00 | the most common things you might want to do
is to actually convert it to Revit geometry.
| | 07:05 | Now unfortunately, there's no Convert
command, we can't just push a button
| | 07:08 | and have it convert,
| | 07:09 | but we can trace over the CAD file
using Revit objects and we can actually do
| | 07:14 | this fairly quickly.
| | 07:15 | Let me show you how that works.
| | 07:17 | If I go to the Architecture tab, click
on the Wall tool, and I'm just going to
| | 07:21 | use a generic wall for this example.
| | 07:23 | So I'll start with a Generic 12 inch wall.
| | 07:25 | Notice that as I move my mouse around
in the CAD file, it's actually seeing
| | 07:31 | the two parallel lines.
| | 07:33 | So those lines are not walls in AutoCAD,
AutoCAD doesn't have walls, those are
| | 07:37 | just two parallel lines but it's finding
the center line between those lines and
| | 07:43 | I'm going to be able to draw a wall
here, like so, and start tracing over the
| | 07:51 | underlying CAD file.
| | 07:53 | Now I'm going to do a Zoom window
over here, get in a little bit closer,
| | 07:58 | change to a Generic 5 inch wall, do
some of the interior walls, you see it
| | 08:03 | works the same way.
| | 08:04 | Now notice that I'm being
a little loose about this.
| | 08:08 | I'm not actually trying to draw the
whole wall, I'll show you why in a second.
| | 08:13 | I'm going to press Escape one time
just to reset, press Escape one time to
| | 08:19 | reset, again Escape one time.
| | 08:25 | And here is why I kind
of left some of those off.
| | 08:27 | So you see here I've got
these gaps here and here?
| | 08:30 | All I really need to do to, I'm going to
cancel out of the Wall command, zoom out slightly.
| | 08:34 | I'm going to take this wall for example and
use the grip and snap it all the way up to here.
| | 08:40 | Once I have that, I'm going to go to
my Modify tool and I'm going to use this
| | 08:45 | Trim/Extend to Single Element or
this one, Trim/Extend Multiple Elements.
| | 08:51 | Now in this case, I want to use this
as a boundary and extend both of these
| | 08:55 | walls, so I'm going to use
the Multiple Elements option.
| | 08:58 | In both of these commands, you select
a boundary edge and then you select the
| | 09:03 | wall or walls that you want to trim or extend.
| | 09:07 | If I click an empty space, I can reset
the boundary, click a new one, and do it
| | 09:12 | again, click in the empty space,
reset, pick a new edge, and do it again.
| | 09:17 | So the reason I'm doing it that way is
it's actually a little quicker to draw
| | 09:22 | the walls roughly at the center lines
because that's what I'm mainly trying
| | 09:26 | to get from the CAD file, and then I can
clean it up very quickly with Revit objects.
| | 09:31 | Now I'm not going to do the whole floor
plan, but if we did continue, what you
| | 09:36 | would see is eventually the color
starts to disappear, and what we're left with
| | 09:42 | is the CAD file underneath.
| | 09:44 | Now notice that I drew right over
doorways and such, that's because when I come
| | 09:49 | back, and I add a doorway, it will
automatically cut the holes in the CAD file
| | 09:56 | for me, and then later if I switch to
another view such as a 3D view, and so on,
| | 10:03 | remember we did Current view only, so
the CAD file is not displayed and I'm left
| | 10:08 | with only Revit geometry.
| | 10:10 | So regardless of the reason that you
might be bringing in CAD files into your
| | 10:14 | Revit project, this is a pretty common
scenario where you might have an old CAD
| | 10:18 | file, you need to trace over it.
| | 10:20 | What you can see is, it's a very
smooth and quick process that you can walk
| | 10:25 | through, bring the file in, make your changes.
| | 10:27 | If the designer later makes changes to
the CAD file, then all we have to do is
| | 10:33 | go to the Insert tab, click here on
the Manage Links button, click the CAD
| | 10:38 | Formats tab, and I can select the
linked CAD file here in this list, and reload
| | 10:43 | it, and I'll get the latest changes to
that file and I can make adjustments to
| | 10:48 | my underlying layout.
| | 10:50 | So it's a pretty smooth and easy process
and very easy for us to marry together
| | 10:55 | legacy CAD data with our current Revit projects.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating topography from a DWG link| 00:00 | In this movie, we'll look at another
very common scenario where you will import
| | 00:03 | CAD data into your Revit project, and
that's when you receive data from an
| | 00:07 | outside civil engineer.
| | 00:09 | There is no Revit civil engineering package.
| | 00:11 | Therefore, most civil engineers are
either using AutoCAD or MicroStation.
| | 00:16 | So you are going to get the data
from them in either DWG or DGN format.
| | 00:21 | Now I am in a file here called CAD
Topo and in this example I'm going to
| | 00:25 | bring in another DWG file, but if
you were bringing in a DGN, the process
| | 00:29 | would be virtually the same.
| | 00:30 | So I am going to go to the Insert tab,
and click on the Link CAD button.
| | 00:35 | So this time I am going to select
AutoCAD Siteplan, it's a DWG file, and it's
| | 00:39 | actually one of the sample
files that ships with AutoCAD.
| | 00:42 | It just contains some 3D lines
representing the contour lines of the project.
| | 00:47 | Now I am not going to change most of
the settings down at the bottom, I am
| | 00:49 | going to leave them the way they were set in
the previous import that we did in the last movie,
| | 00:54 | but I am going to make sure that
I'm using Origin to Origin here for the
| | 00:57 | positioning. That's usually pretty
important when you are bringing in a civil
| | 01:00 | file because they've probably
associated with a particular origin.
| | 01:04 | And over here, it's very important
that I uncheck current view only.
| | 01:09 | The way to think about current view only,
in the last movie we used that in order
| | 01:12 | to force it to only display in one
view, and that's helpful to prevent it from
| | 01:17 | displaying elsewhere,
| | 01:18 | but in this case, I want to actually
take the CAD file, and turn it into 3D
| | 01:22 | geometry, and I can only
do that if that's unchecked.
| | 01:26 | So in other words, it has
to be visible in all views.
| | 01:29 | Revit has to think of this CAD file as
a model, and so we tell it it's a model
| | 01:34 | by unchecking current view only.
| | 01:36 | So I am going to go ahead and click Open.
| | 01:39 | When the file comes in, it's a little
bit larger than the file that we had
| | 01:42 | before or the setup in this file.
| | 01:45 | So I am going to type Z F for Zoom to
Fit and it will zoom out and you can see
| | 01:50 | that I have this site plan here, and
the box around it just simply highlights
| | 01:53 | and shows me that it's a CAD file.
| | 01:56 | Now if we take a look at this file in
3D, I'm going to click the small little
| | 02:02 | birdhouse icon over here to generate my
default 3D view, and then I'm going to
| | 02:10 | hold my Shift key down, and
start orbiting with the wheel mouse.
| | 02:13 | You can see that this file has some
height to it, particularly when I look at
| | 02:18 | it from edge on, and you could see that those
contour lines are set at heights above the ground.
| | 02:25 | So you probably want to spend the first
few moments just sort of investigating
| | 02:30 | the file and kind of understanding what's here.
| | 02:32 | Now I am going to return to the Site
Plan view, double-click that on the
| | 02:36 | Project Browser here.
| | 02:38 | And in this area right here, it's pretty clean,
so I am going to do a zoom in region, like so.
| | 02:45 | And before I turn this into a topo
surface or a topography surface here in
| | 02:51 | Revit, I need to know a
little bit more about this file.
| | 02:54 | When you select it, the entire thing
will highlight because it's a single
| | 02:58 | continuous CAD file at this stage.
| | 03:01 | Up here on the ribbon, we have a
Query button, and I can click that button.
| | 03:06 | What this will allow me to do is to
reach in and touch the individual line work
| | 03:12 | inside the CAD file.
| | 03:14 | So you see how I can come in here, and
pick any one of these individual lines.
| | 03:18 | What I want to know is what
layer that line work is on.
| | 03:22 | So I am going to make a note of this
layer CF-DEP_INDX and make a note of
| | 03:29 | this layer CF-DEP_INT.
| | 03:33 | Those two layers are the contour
lines that are used in this file.
| | 03:37 | The rest of the geometry that's here,
these lines and all this other stuff, I
| | 03:41 | don't care about any of that, I don't
want to generate topography from that.
| | 03:44 | So that's the information I need to know.
| | 03:47 | I am going to click the Modify tool to
cancel the query, and I'm ready to move
| | 03:51 | on to the next step.
| | 03:52 | Now the next step is to take this
CAD file and use it to generate a
| | 03:57 | three-dimensional topographic
surface right here in Revit.
| | 04:00 | I do that by going to the Massing
& Site tab and I'll click on the Toposurface button.
| | 04:06 | The default behavior here
is the Place Point option.
| | 04:11 | Place Point would require me to
individually place multiple points on the screen
| | 04:18 | at different elevation heights. You can
see right here that you can put in your
| | 04:23 | elevation height, and I would
literally have to place one point at a time in
| | 04:27 | order to start generating a surface.
| | 04:29 | And you can see that as you place
more points, it starts connecting them
| | 04:32 | together to create a surface.
| | 04:34 | Now if I did that for this file, I am
going to undo those four points, it would
| | 04:40 | take me quite a long time because as you
can see just in the small area that I'm
| | 04:45 | zoomed in here, it would
require quite a few points.
| | 04:48 | Fortunately, right next to the Place
Point, there is this Create from Import
| | 04:53 | button and I can choose the Select
Import Instance option, and that's going to
| | 04:59 | allow me to click on the CAD file and
generate the points directly from that CAD file.
| | 05:06 | Now the reason that I did the query
in the previous step is because I don't
| | 05:10 | want to generate points from all the
layers in the CAD file, I want to click
| | 05:15 | Check None, and I only want to
generate them from those two layers that I
| | 05:19 | queried a moment ago.
| | 05:21 | So I've got those two selected, and I'm
going to click OK, and it does take a
| | 05:26 | few minutes for it to process,
| | 05:27 | but I think you'll agree even with
that short wait, it was considerably faster
| | 05:32 | than it would take me to
generate all those points manually.
| | 05:35 | I am going to zoom in slightly right here.
| | 05:39 | Imagine how long it would take to place
each and every one of those little points.
| | 05:44 | So if you were doing this
manually, you'd be in for a long haul.
| | 05:48 | So I'm going to zoom back out.
| | 05:50 | In fact, I am going to zoom to fit here,
and up here on the ribbon, I am going
| | 05:56 | to click Finish Surface, and that
will complete the creation of this
| | 06:01 | topographic surface.
| | 06:02 | Now here in the site plan, you can
kind of see it, it's the odd shaped thing
| | 06:07 | here and this out here the
rectangular border, that's the CAD file.
| | 06:09 | So here is the topo, here is the CAD file.
| | 06:11 | Let's go to 3D and I'm going to do two
things here to make this a little easier to see;
| | 06:16 | I am going to select the CAD file
first in 3D, it's actually got a box around
| | 06:19 | it instead of a rectangle, and I'll select it,
and I can temporarily hide the selected object.
| | 06:26 | I do that down here on the View Control
bar with this little sunglasses icon, I
| | 06:31 | am going to click that and choose Hide Element.
| | 06:34 | When you go in to Hide mode,
you'll get a message up here
| | 06:38 | Temporary Hide/Isolate.
| | 06:39 | That lets you know that
something is temporarily hidden.
| | 06:42 | You use this just whenever you
want to get something out of the way.
| | 06:45 | Okay, that's distracting right now.
| | 06:46 | Let me get it out of the way so I can
get a better look at what I'm working on.
| | 06:50 | Over here, also on the View Control bar,
we have our Visual Style pop-up and
| | 06:54 | it's this little white cube,
and white cube is Hidden Line.
| | 06:58 | I want to switch to Shaded mode, and
then that will shade this topo surface
| | 07:03 | here in a color, and now if I orbit
around, it's a little easier to understand
| | 07:08 | what we've created.
| | 07:09 | Now the effect is somewhat subtle across the
expanse, but this is rather a large site plan,
| | 07:15 | but if we zoom in a little bit, you
can sort of see that it's created this
| | 07:19 | three-dimensional surface that
matches the contour lines in that CAD file.
| | 07:24 | So if you get data from a civil
engineer in either DWG or DGN format, it's
| | 07:29 | pretty easy to link it in as a CAD file,
query the layers to figure out what
| | 07:33 | layers contain the contours, and
then use those contours to generate a
| | 07:37 | topographic surface, and then use that
surface as the basis for the ground plane
| | 07:42 | to build your building.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding CAD inserts| 00:00 | There are lots of ways to use
CAD data in your Revit projects.
| | 00:03 | Sometimes you don't need to maintain
a link back to the original CAD file.
| | 00:07 | In such cases, you can simply import
the CAD file and embed it directly in
| | 00:11 | your Revit project.
| | 00:13 | The most common scenario where this
might occur is bringing in detail drawings.
| | 00:17 | Most firms have large libraries
of standard details that they've
| | 00:21 | accumulated over the years.
| | 00:22 | It's pretty common that a lot of
those standard details would have been
| | 00:26 | generated in a program such as AutoCAD.
| | 00:27 | So as you make the move to Revit,
rather than redraw all of those details, you
| | 00:31 | might want to reuse and leverage some
of that existing data and just simply
| | 00:35 | import them into your projects.
| | 00:37 | So in this movie, we are going to
simply look at the process we could follow to
| | 00:41 | import a legacy CAD detail
and use it in our Revit project.
| | 00:44 | So I am in a file called Import Detail,
and I want to bring in a CAD file in here.
| | 00:50 | Now at the moment, I don't really
have a good view anywhere in the project
| | 00:55 | browser in order to do this import.
| | 00:57 | So I am actually going to create
a new view to receive this detail.
| | 01:02 | Revit gives us a view type
specifically for this purpose.
| | 01:06 | So if I go to the View tab,
we can create a drafting view.
| | 01:12 | So it looks like this little T-square icon
right over here, and I am going to click on that.
| | 01:17 | And what it will ask me is
what name I want to call this?
| | 01:20 | So I am going to call this AutoCAD Details,
and what scale I want that drawing to be.
| | 01:27 | So I am going to stick with the default one-and-
a-half inch equals a foot, and I'll click OK.
| | 01:32 | What I get is a blank sheet of paper.
| | 01:34 | Now I could do anything
that I want on this blank view.
| | 01:37 | I could start drawing, I can
import stuff, it's really up to me.
| | 01:41 | Unlike the other views in a
Revit project, a Drafting View is not
| | 01:45 | actually linked to anything.
| | 01:47 | So that's why we are not actually
seeing any of our project data in this view.
| | 01:51 | So it's a completely
disconnected view for this purpose.
| | 01:55 | I am going to go to the Insert tab, and
this time I'm going to choose Import CAD.
| | 02:02 | Now if you watch the last
few movies, we did Link CAD.
| | 02:05 | Now I should note that a lot of CAD
and BIM managers actually prefer to use
| | 02:10 | Link CAD exclusively.
| | 02:12 | So I'm going to talk about some of the
reasons why both in this and the next movie.
| | 02:17 | But for now, I want to show
you the process of Import CAD.
| | 02:20 | The major difference between Import and
Link CAD is that when we import, there
| | 02:25 | is no link back to the original file.
| | 02:27 | So if the original file changes, you
would have to delete the import and
| | 02:31 | re-import it in order to get the latest change.
| | 02:34 | That's the major difference.
| | 02:36 | Here is a file called AutoCAD Detail,
and down here at the bottom, I am going to
| | 02:41 | change a couple of the settings.
| | 02:42 | Now first of all, the Current
view only setting is now grayed out.
| | 02:45 | So when you import, that's not even an option.
| | 02:48 | So we can ignore that.
| | 02:49 | Down here under Colors, I'm going to
assume that when I bring this detail in,
| | 02:54 | I'm going to want to print the
detail along with my Revit project.
| | 02:58 | So rather than bringing in a color
this time, I'm actually going to force it
| | 03:01 | all to Black and White.
| | 03:02 | I am going to bring in all the layers
and let it Auto-Detect the units, but as
| | 03:06 | far as Positioning goes, this time I'm
going to do it manually, and I am going
| | 03:11 | to set my cursor at the
center point of the detail.
| | 03:15 | Now the reason I'm choosing the center
point is I don't really know where the
| | 03:19 | origin of the detail is.
| | 03:20 | So I could choose the origin
and it might be way off screen.
| | 03:25 | So using the center point guarantees
that the image will be on my cursor when I
| | 03:30 | start to place it in, and you'll see
what I mean when I click Open here.
| | 03:34 | And there it is right there.
| | 03:36 | So you notice how the cursor is right
at the sort of geometric center of the
| | 03:40 | detail? And what this allows me to do is
just place it wherever I'd like it to go.
| | 03:45 | Now I'm going to zoom in using Zoom in
Region, Z R if you want to type it on
| | 03:51 | the detail, and you can see that it's come
in and it's just a pretty typical head detail,
| | 03:56 | but if I start to zoom in a little closer,
you can see it's a little bit lifeless.
| | 04:02 | Notice that all the line
work is the same thickness.
| | 04:05 | It doesn't really have any kind of punch to it.
| | 04:08 | Let me zoom back out, I'm just using
my wheel here and give myself some room.
| | 04:12 | I am going to bring that same detail
in again right next to the original, and
| | 04:16 | show you that we actually do
have control over how it comes in.
| | 04:20 | The way that line weight is handled in
Revit and AutoCAD is quite different.
| | 04:25 | In AutoCAD, files are organized into layers.
| | 04:28 | Those layers typically have colors
and it's usually those colors that
| | 04:32 | control the line weights.
| | 04:34 | Now it doesn't have to always be that
way, but that's probably the most popular
| | 04:37 | way to do it in AutoCAD.
| | 04:39 | When we bring it in to a Revit project,
we have to let Revit know that that's
| | 04:44 | what's happening and tell it to key into that.
| | 04:47 | Over here on the Import panel,
there is a tiny little icon right here.
| | 04:51 | Now you remember, these things
were called Dialog Launchers.
| | 04:54 | We talked about that in
one of our earlier movies.
| | 04:56 | So when I click it, it launches a dialog.
| | 04:59 | And in this case, it's the
Import Line Weights dialog.
| | 05:03 | Now what I have here is a long list
of numbers, 255 to be exact, and those
| | 05:09 | numbers represent the color
numbers in the AutoCAD file.
| | 05:13 | Now what you see here is that every
single one of them is set to a Pen Weight
| | 05:16 | 1 at the moment, and this is why my
detail back here in the background is so
| | 05:21 | lifeless because every single
color was interpreted the same way.
| | 05:25 | Well, what I can do is either come
in here and click in a field and start
| | 05:30 | changing the numbers or to save a little
time here, I've actually created a Line
| | 05:35 | Weight file, and saved it out to the
hard-drive and we can load that in.
| | 05:39 | Now because I just typed over one of
the values, it's warning me that I'm
| | 05:42 | going to be overwriting that and I'm going
the say, no, I don't need to save that change.
| | 05:46 | Now I am going to change this to my
Desktop and go to my exercise files and here
| | 05:52 | in the Chapter05 folder, I have this
file here called Detail Line Weights.
| | 05:56 | Now this is just a simple text document.
| | 05:59 | All these files are just TXT files,
| | 06:01 | but when I open it up, what you'll
see is if you scroll through this list
| | 06:06 | here, some of the line weights have
changed, like this color number 31 for
| | 06:11 | example is now a Pen Weight
| | 06:13 | 3 and a little bit further down, we
might find some others like this 131 here or
| | 06:19 | even further down here is a Pen Weight 6.
| | 06:21 | So the file contained a bunch of
settings that told Revit what pen weights it
| | 06:27 | should use for each of these color settings.
| | 06:30 | Now before we click OK here and dismiss
the dialog, I should note this note down
| | 06:34 | here at the bottom of the screen.
| | 06:36 | These values only apply to lines and
layers set to the default line weight
| | 06:41 | in the source file.
| | 06:42 | If AutoCAD uses the Line Weight
property, then these settings are ignored.
| | 06:47 | And if you think about it,
that's perfectly logical.
| | 06:50 | Why would I want to use the colors to
generate line weights if there's already a
| | 06:53 | Line Weight assigned?
| | 06:54 | So where this comes into play is if the
AutoCAD user didn't use the Line Weight
| | 06:58 | feature and instead is using the
color feature to control line weights.
| | 07:02 | So I am going to click OK and then I
am going to choose Import CAD a second
| | 07:07 | time, select my detail, leave all the
settings the same, place it over here,
| | 07:14 | zoom in, and you can see that the
Line Weights are now a lot more potent.
| | 07:19 | We have a lot more punch, we
have a nice outline around the edge.
| | 07:22 | This is a very bold line here.
| | 07:24 | The entire drawing reads a lot more graphically.
| | 07:27 | So that means I can simply select this
one and I can delete it and that's my
| | 07:32 | completed detail file.
| | 07:34 | At this stage, that detail is ready to go.
| | 07:37 | I can place it on a sheet, and I can
print it right along with my Revit project.
| | 07:42 | If you want to reset your line weights
back to the way they were by default, you
| | 07:46 | can go back to the Dialog Launcher,
click Load again, and I've provided a Reset
| | 07:51 | file which just resets everything back to 1.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Import tips| 00:00 | In this movie I want to wrap up our
discussion of working with CAD files in
| | 00:04 | Revit by just sharing with you a few
tips that you want to keep in mind.
| | 00:08 | Now whether we are talking about inserts or
links, there are a few basic best practices.
| | 00:15 | So let me start off by talking about
this Query tool that we've already looked
| | 00:19 | at in a few other movies.
| | 00:21 | If I select it, and come in here and
touch one of the objects in this CAD file.
| | 00:27 | So you could see that that little
hollow metal frame there at the top of my
| | 00:32 | door detail is on a layer called A-Detl
-Bold and we looked at this in some of
| | 00:36 | the previous movies.
| | 00:37 | What we haven't looked at yet is that
there's actually some buttons down below here.
| | 00:41 | We can actually take that layer that
we've just queried and we can hide it in
| | 00:46 | the current view, we can even delete it.
| | 00:48 | So let me start with Hide in the view.
| | 00:50 | So I'll click that, and as you might
expect, it does exactly what that name implies.
| | 00:55 | It hides that element.
| | 00:57 | In this case it only hid the one element,
because it just turned out that there
| | 01:00 | was only the one element on that layer,
but it actually hid the entire layer.
| | 01:05 | So if there were additional elements on
that layer they would have been hidden as well.
| | 01:08 | For example, if I select this text over
here, I'm still in the Query command and
| | 01:13 | do a Hide in view, it actually hides all
of the text and all of the leader lines,
| | 01:17 | so you can see that it really
depends on how the file is structured.
| | 01:21 | Now let me click the Modify tool, cancel
out of there, and how would that stuff back?
| | 01:26 | I mean what exactly does Hidden in view mean?
| | 01:29 | Well, if we go to the View tab
there's a command over here called
| | 01:32 | Visibility/Graphics and the shortcut
for that is VG, which is a pretty common
| | 01:37 | way that people will execute this command.
| | 01:39 | They'll just simply type VG.
| | 01:41 | Now when I click on there, there are
several tabs and we've got an Imported
| | 01:45 | Categories tab over here.
| | 01:46 | And you'll see each CAD file that you
have either linked or embedded in your
| | 01:51 | project listed there and beneath each
of those files all of the layers that are
| | 01:56 | in that file will also be listed.
| | 01:58 | And in this dialog, we can use the
check boxes here to hide layers or show
| | 02:03 | layers, so I can hide them and show them here.
| | 02:06 | And I can also override
their line work over here.
| | 02:08 | So this A-Detl-Bold if I thought that it
was too bold, I could override the line
| | 02:14 | weight, or if it was too thin or what have
you, I can change that setting, I could
| | 02:18 | even change the color or other settings.
| | 02:20 | Now I'm not going to make any override settings.
| | 02:21 | I am going to turn it back on and then I'm
going to click OK, and you will see
| | 02:25 | that that layer reappears.
| | 02:27 | Now let me select it again, go back to
Query, select this guy, what does Delete do?
| | 02:33 | Well in this case it
literally deletes the layer.
| | 02:36 | So if I go back to VG and go to Imported
Categories, you'll see that A-Detl-Bold
| | 02:42 | layer is no longer here.
| | 02:44 | So that's a little bit more
permanent and you want to make sure that
| | 02:47 | that's in fact what you want to do.
| | 02:48 | It's usually safer to do Hide in
view than it is to do Delete layer.
| | 02:53 | However, if you're sure you don't need
that layer then maybe that'll free up
| | 02:56 | some file size and help get the file down.
| | 02:58 | So you might consider
deleting some unnecessary layers.
| | 03:01 | In this case, I'm going to Cancel and I'm
going to undo to bring that layer back again.
| | 03:07 | Now that technique the Query technique
in both of those two commands we just
| | 03:11 | looked at work regardless of
whether this is an insert or link.
| | 03:15 | The next thing I want to talk about is
specifically with regard to insert files
| | 03:19 | and that's actually what this is.
| | 03:21 | This is an embedded CAD file that
was done with the Import CAD command.
| | 03:27 | Now there are many CAD and BIM managers
that would argue that we should only use
| | 03:31 | Link CAD and we should avoid using
Import CAD and there are some very good
| | 03:36 | reasons for doing that.
| | 03:38 | Import CAD tends to bloat the file
size, it tends to increase the file size
| | 03:44 | of the Revit project, and therefore
decrease performance, that tends to be
| | 03:48 | one thing that it does.
| | 03:49 | Furthermore, if you select an embedded
CAD file, there's this Explode button
| | 03:55 | over here which is awfully tempting, and
I am going to go ahead and click it in
| | 04:00 | this file, and what you'll see is that
actually converts that embedded CAD file
| | 04:05 | into a bunch of stand-alone Revit geometry.
| | 04:09 | Now this geometry is just lines or text.
| | 04:12 | It's not actually walls or doors.
| | 04:14 | So if I click on this object that's
actually still in AutoCAD Detail, but
| | 04:19 | this is just line work.
| | 04:21 | So it's converting it to drafted
entities and it seems harmless enough, but the
| | 04:27 | trouble with this is, this really
increases the bloat in the file because, for
| | 04:32 | example, if I look at the line styles, I
now have a line style that corresponds
| | 04:37 | to every layer that was in that CAD file.
| | 04:40 | This means that other folks that are
in this project and adding line work are
| | 04:45 | now going to have to sort through all
of these layers that got added in here,
| | 04:50 | all of these line styles that got added in here.
| | 04:53 | If we look at the Materials in this
file and I scroll down here in the list,
| | 05:00 | what you're going to see is, right
here, all of these materials that say
| | 05:05 | Render Material and they have these three
numbers, those three numbers are color numbers.
| | 05:11 | They're just RGB values.
| | 05:12 | And what it's done is it's taken every
layer in the CAD file and created this
| | 05:17 | sort of dummy render material for those layers.
| | 05:21 | And again maybe not so terrible, but
it does increase that bloat in that file
| | 05:27 | size and what really are these
render materials doing for me.
| | 05:31 | And those are just a few examples, the
same is true with text types and line
| | 05:36 | types and other things.
| | 05:37 | So it's adding a lot of extra baggage
to the file that most of the time we
| | 05:42 | probably want to actually
purge out and delete out.
| | 05:44 | So then there's the extra steps in
doing that purging and deleting, and overall
| | 05:48 | it's just considered not to be best practice.
| | 05:50 | So you can't actually explode a linked file.
| | 05:53 | So that's one of the
reasons that people favor links.
| | 05:56 | Then of course even if you think you
don't ever need to update this file,
| | 06:00 | there's always the possibility that you will.
| | 06:03 | If it's a linked file you maintain that
possibility, you can always update the link later.
| | 06:07 | If it's an embedded file, you can't.
You have to just erase it and redo it.
| | 06:12 | So for those reasons it is generally
considered best practice to use the Link
| | 06:16 | feature almost exclusively and avoid
the Import feature as much as possible.
| | 06:22 | If you do find yourself needing to do
the import, my recommendation is import it
| | 06:27 | first into a temporary Revit project, do
whatever cleanup and exploding you need
| | 06:32 | to do in that temporary project, and
then just manually copy and paste out only
| | 06:36 | the geometry that you require
in your actual live project.
| | 06:40 | If you do it that way, you are going
to save yourself the steps of all the
| | 06:44 | extra bloat that gets created and all
the extra purging that might have to go
| | 06:48 | along with that.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a group| 00:00 | Sometimes you develop a part of your design
that can be reused elsewhere in the project.
| | 00:04 | You could simply use copy and paste for such
items, but a better choice is to create a group.
| | 00:08 | A group gives you a powerful
way to manage repetitive items.
| | 00:11 | Once you create a group if you make a
change to one instance of the group, that
| | 00:15 | change occurs across the entire project.
| | 00:17 | So to demonstrate that I'm going to
work here in this file called Create a
| | 00:19 | Group and we are going to use our
condo layout that we've been working on for
| | 00:23 | the last several movies.
| | 00:24 | I'm going to zoom out just a touch
here and make a window selection around
| | 00:29 | everything that I have on the screen, and
then up here on the ribbon we will find
| | 00:34 | our Create Group command or we can type GP.
| | 00:38 | A dialog will appear which
actually indicates for me that I'm really
| | 00:42 | creating two groups.
| | 00:43 | The model geometry such as the walls,
doors, and windows will go in the first
| | 00:46 | group and I'm going to name that 2
Bedroom Unit, and this is a model group.
| | 00:53 | Model groups contain model geometry.
| | 00:55 | All of the annotation like the room tags
and the door tags are going to go in an
| | 00:59 | attached detail group and I'm
going to call that one Tags.
| | 01:03 | Now the way this works is, if I deselect
this and I kind of move my mouse nearby,
| | 01:08 | you'll see this dash line
appearing around the entire file.
| | 01:13 | That is the group now and
that's the model group right there.
| | 01:16 | Notice it only highlighted the model geometry.
| | 01:18 | And I'm going to deselect that, move
my mouse over here, and you'll see it's
| | 01:23 | highlighting another dash line, that's
the Tags and that is the attached detail
| | 01:28 | group and that's kind of confirmed for
me here with this small little pushpin
| | 01:32 | icon letting me know that
that's attached to something.
| | 01:35 | Now if we scroll down here on the
Project Browser, expand the Groups category,
| | 01:40 | and expand Model, we'll see
our 2 Bedroom Unit listed here.
| | 01:45 | Beneath it, we'll see Floor Plan Tags.
| | 01:48 | That's the attached detail group.
| | 01:50 | So that's another way that we can
see those two items that we've created.
| | 01:54 | If I select the model group, you'll
see here in the center that it's got this
| | 01:58 | X Y icon right here.
| | 02:01 | Now what that's useful for is I can
actually drag that to any location that I
| | 02:05 | would like to be the origin for this group.
| | 02:07 | Now in this case I'm going to drag
it up here to the endpoint of these
| | 02:11 | two exterior walls.
| | 02:13 | And what that does for me is I'm going
to deselect it and I'm going to select my
| | 02:18 | 2 Bedroom Unit, drag it from
Project Browser and drop it into a file.
| | 02:23 | And what you'll see is, let me zoom
out slightly here. You'll see that
| | 02:27 | that new location that I just indicated
is the insertion point of this group now.
| | 02:33 | And let me press Escape to get out of there.
| | 02:37 | So if you have a more convenient point
that you want to use for an insertion
| | 02:42 | point, it's as easy as that to make that change.
| | 02:45 | What's the advantage of
using a group in the first place?
| | 02:47 | Well, now that I have my group, all I
have to do is select any instance of the
| | 02:54 | group, and I'm just going to pick the
one here on the left, and up here on the
| | 02:59 | ribbon, I can choose the Edit
Group button or E G is the shortcut.
| | 03:02 | That will take me into group edit mode
and you could see that I can now touch
| | 03:07 | all the individual geometry again.
| | 03:09 | And I could make any change
that I want to here to the group.
| | 03:12 | I'm going to do something
that's just simple and obvious.
| | 03:15 | So up here on the Architecture ribbon, I'm
going to click the Window tool, open
| | 03:19 | up the list of choices, and I'm going to
pick this 72x48 double casement window.
| | 03:24 | And I'm just going to place an
instance of that here in this bedroom.
| | 03:28 | When I click Finish right here, I want you
to pay attention to this wall right there.
| | 03:34 | Notice that in this instance of the group,
it gained that same window over there.
| | 03:40 | So if you can imagine if we had
dozens if not hundreds of instances of this
| | 03:44 | group throughout the project
how powerful that could be.
| | 03:47 | We make the change in one location
and that change will immediately apply
| | 03:51 | throughout the rest of the project.
| | 03:53 | Now we've got our attach detail group
here as well, and if I take a look at this,
| | 03:59 | this is attached to all of the
different elements in the group.
| | 04:02 | This one however is just the model group.
| | 04:05 | It doesn't have those elements.
| | 04:06 | Well, it turns out that all I have to
do is select it and then on the ribbon
| | 04:12 | right here I can click Attach Detail Groups.
| | 04:15 | That will show me any attached
detail groups that belong to this group.
| | 04:19 | In this case the Floor Plan Tags.
| | 04:20 | I'm going to check that,
| | 04:22 | and when I click OK, it will add an
instance of that Attach Detail Group to
| | 04:26 | this model instance.
| | 04:27 | More importantly, if I zoom in over
here notice that in this area, this is door
| | 04:32 | number 5, door number 4, door number 8.
| | 04:35 | Notice that these doors have
renumbered to have unique numbers.
| | 04:39 | So Revit won't replicate the same numbering.
| | 04:42 | It will renumber the objects for you.
| | 04:44 | Now if you don't like the number, you
can always renumber them later and that
| | 04:48 | will be a subject of a later movie.
| | 04:49 | But it's really a powerful feature that
it maintains all that numbering for you
| | 04:53 | automatically and all you
have to do is add the tags.
| | 04:57 | Now if you have a situation where you
need to create a group that's slightly
| | 05:01 | different than the first, maybe we
want a version of this condo that doesn't
| | 05:04 | have the second window, then what we can
do is we can actually select the group.
| | 05:09 | I'm going to make a copy of it.
| | 05:11 | I'll just do Copy, and I'll put
another version of it over here.
| | 05:14 | And I'm going to keep that selected and
over here on the Properties palette I'm
| | 05:19 | going to click the Edit Type button.
| | 05:21 | What you'll see is the groups behave a lot
like other objects that we have in Revit.
| | 05:26 | We can see the Type Properties here.
| | 05:28 | Well, in this case there aren't any
properties to manipulate, but I can
| | 05:32 | duplicate and rename.
| | 05:34 | So I'm going to make a duplicate of
the 2 Bedroom Unit and the suggested name
| | 05:38 | is 2 Bedroom Unit 2.
| | 05:40 | I'm just going to put one
window here just so I know that;
| | 05:44 | that's what this one is
and click OK, and OK again.
| | 05:49 | This is a separate instance now.
| | 05:51 | So if I edit the group, I can
select this window and delete it.
| | 05:56 | That will not apply to these other two.
| | 06:00 | If I decide later that this one
should look like this one, I can now simply
| | 06:04 | select it and there's my second version.
| | 06:07 | When I choose it, it will
remove the window from right there.
| | 06:11 | If I happen to have a tag associated
with the object that I removed, for
| | 06:16 | example, if I select this in Edit Group
and let's just say I remove this door.
| | 06:21 | Let's not talk about the fact that we
have no way to get in that bedroom now.
| | 06:26 | Let's go to finish, notice that the tag
in the Attach Detail Group gets removed.
| | 06:30 | If I select this and change it back to
the original, the tag comes back again.
| | 06:38 | So the Attach Detail Groups respond to
the underlying model group regardless of
| | 06:44 | what you do even if you're
adding and removing elements.
| | 06:46 | It's a pretty powerful feature.
| | 06:48 | Using groups is a great way to manage
these repetitive design elements that you
| | 06:51 | have in your projects.
| | 06:52 | You create a series of elements, you
group them together, any changes you make
| | 06:56 | to one instance of the group apply
across the project. You can swap in and out
| | 07:00 | different versions of the group, and
by using Attach Detail Groups, you can
| | 07:04 | even manage the annotation and the tags that
are associated with those nested model elements.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Mirroring groups to create a layout| 00:00 | Once you have a group in your project,
you might want to use that group as the
| | 00:04 | basis for an overall layout, such as our
condominium layout here where we might
| | 00:08 | want to have multiple versions
of the same group on a floor plan.
| | 00:11 | We could insert each group
manually, but that would require some
| | 00:15 | manipulations of rotating and
mirroring and movement that would all have to
| | 00:19 | happen independently.
| | 00:20 | Instead I'm going to use the Mirror
feature in Revit to mirror the instance of
| | 00:25 | the group that I already have on
screen directly and talk about some of the
| | 00:28 | issues that we run into
with groups when we do that.
| | 00:31 | So I'm in a file called Mirror Groups
and I've got an instance of the group that
| | 00:35 | we created in the previous movie and
it's attached detail group. And I'm going
| | 00:40 | to select the model group first and up
here on the ribbon we have two ways that
| | 00:45 | we mirror, and I'm going to use this
Mirror Pick Axis option and what that
| | 00:49 | allows me to do is select an object that
I already have in my model and use that
| | 00:54 | as the axis of reflection for the mirror.
| | 00:57 | So in this case, that will be the wall
that's going to be shared between the two
| | 01:01 | copies of the group.
| | 01:02 | So I'm going to have one down below
and I'm going to mirror one up above.
| | 01:06 | So I'll click this wall, and Revit
will create a version of the group up
| | 01:11 | above and you can see it's a
flipped copy of the original, and it also
| | 01:15 | generates a warning.
| | 01:16 | The warning that it generates is what
Revit considers to be an ignorable warning
| | 01:20 | and that's because I could quite
literally ignore the warning if I want to.
| | 01:24 | But before I dismiss the warning I
want to just discuss what it's saying.
| | 01:27 | You'll see that it's highlighted the
shared wall between the two instances of
| | 01:31 | the group in an orange color and if
you read the message, what it's actually
| | 01:35 | telling us is we have two walls in the
same place, and in general terms having
| | 01:39 | two walls in the same place is
considered not to be such a good idea.
| | 01:43 | I would agree with that sentiment,
| | 01:45 | so it's definitely something we're
going to want to address.
| | 01:47 | But it's an ignorable warning because
there's no button here, there's nothing I
| | 01:51 | have to do, simply by deselecting
everything or clicking outside the warning, it
| | 01:56 | dismisses it, but the issue is still there.
| | 01:59 | So what I'm going to do is zoom in over
here and talk about how we can address that.
| | 02:05 | Now I have a group down below right there.
| | 02:08 | I have a group up above.
| | 02:10 | If I put my mouse right here where the
wall is and press my Tab key, it will
| | 02:14 | highlight the other group.
| | 02:15 | But if I Tab a second time it will
actually reach into the group and highlight
| | 02:21 | the wall that's inside the group.
| | 02:23 | I'm going to click that.
| | 02:24 | Then on that wall a little icon will
appear right here that says I can click to
| | 02:30 | exclude this from the instance of the
group, and I'm going to go ahead and do
| | 02:33 | that, and what you'll see is that
redundant wall gets removed and I'm left with
| | 02:37 | just a single wall here.
| | 02:38 | I'm going to deselect, I am going to
zoom back out and I want to select this
| | 02:43 | group right here, go to the Move command
and I'm just going to move this up like
| | 02:48 | so, just to show you what that did.
| | 02:51 | Now it's telling me that this room is
not enclosed and I'm going to ignore that
| | 02:55 | for right now, because what I'm more
interested in is the fact that this wall
| | 02:59 | has been excluded right there.
| | 03:00 | You can see that we only have the one wall.
| | 03:02 | So if I undo the movement, these two
condo units are now sharing that wall
| | 03:08 | in between, and that eliminated any
error that we had and solves the problem.
| | 03:13 | So let's zoom out again.
| | 03:15 | I'm going to select both of these
units now and I want to mirror them to the
| | 03:20 | right-hand side, but I have stairwells
and corridors and everything over here.
| | 03:24 | So I can't really use any of the
existing geometry as a mirror axis.
| | 03:29 | So in this case I'm going to use this
mirror command, the Mirror Draw Axis and
| | 03:34 | that allows me to just
pick two points on screen.
| | 03:37 | So I'm going to pick my first point,
right about there and I'm going to pull it
| | 03:41 | straight down, and click again, and
what that will do is it will use that
| | 03:45 | imaginary line I've just drawn as the
mirror axis this time and it will mirror
| | 03:50 | both instances over to the other side.
| | 03:52 | Now if I want to indicate just how far
this is, the easiest way to do that would
| | 03:58 | be with the temporary dimensions,
but they're not currently displaying.
| | 04:01 | Anytime the temporary dimensions don't
display you can use this button here on
| | 04:05 | the options bar to force them to display.
| | 04:07 | So I'm going to click on that, and try
not to get too distracted by the flurry
| | 04:12 | of dimensions that appear here in the middle.
| | 04:14 | The one that I'm interested in is this one
right here which is between these two walls.
| | 04:18 | So if I just simply click on that I can
put in whatever number I want there. I'm
| | 04:22 | going to make this a nice
even ten feet and press Enter.
| | 04:25 | I'll deselect all of that and then at
this stage I could select all of these
| | 04:30 | groups and add Attached Detailed
Groups if I want to, like we talked about
| | 04:35 | in the previous movie, and you'll see
that it will add tags to all of the
| | 04:39 | other instances, and at this stage that
pretty well gives me my overall floor plan layout.
| | 04:45 | All that remains for me now is to come
in and add the stairs and the corridors
| | 04:49 | and those are subjects that we'll
tackle in future movies.
| | 04:52 | So using the Mirror command in
conjunction with your groups is a really fast and
| | 04:56 | efficient way to create a very
complex layout very quickly from just a few
| | 05:01 | instances of your groups.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating Revit links| 00:00 | Sometimes your project will be
comprised of more than one Revit file.
| | 00:03 | There's a variety of reasons why you
might do this, but different members of the
| | 00:07 | team might be working in different
building files or perhaps they are working
| | 00:10 | under different disciplines
like structural and mechanical.
| | 00:13 | Whatever the reason might be, we can
link two Revit files to one another so that
| | 00:16 | if changes occur to one of the Revit
files we can reload and see those changes
| | 00:20 | in the file that it's linked into.
| | 00:23 | So I'm in a file here called
Office Building and it's just a simple
| | 00:26 | office building structure.
| | 00:28 | I'm just going to link in a small outbuilding.
| | 00:30 | I do this by going to be Insert tab and
I'm going to click on the Link Revit button.
| | 00:38 | Now this will bring up the familiar
browse window and I can choose any of the
| | 00:42 | files that I have in here, and I want to
pick this file called Shed, just a small
| | 00:46 | shed building that we're going to bring in here.
| | 00:49 | And if you followed along in the
movies on linking CAD files you'll see that
| | 00:53 | this dialog is much simpler.
| | 00:54 | It doesn't have all of the settings
down here at the bottom that the Link CAD
| | 00:58 | file had, and the reason for that
is we're linking Revit to Revit now.
| | 01:02 | Revit is familiar with how to
interpret the geometry in another Revit file.
| | 01:06 | So it doesn't need to ask us a lot of
questions about how it should do that.
| | 01:10 | The only real question it needs to
know is, where do we want to put it?
| | 01:14 | Now we've got a lot of the same options.
| | 01:16 | We can put it Center to Center, Origin
to Origin, or we can bring it in manually.
| | 01:21 | Usually, what you want to do is just
accept the default Center to Center, click
| | 01:24 | Open and see where it comes in, and
then you can just simply move the file to
| | 01:28 | the correct position.
| | 01:30 | So naturally we don't want our shed to
be sitting right on top of our building.
| | 01:34 | So maybe it's out over here
somewhere off to the side on the site.
| | 01:38 | So I'm just simply going to select it.
| | 01:39 | And then here on the Modify ribbon I'll
click the Move tool, and I'll just pick a
| | 01:45 | base point and I'll move it over here.
| | 01:47 | Now I'm doing that a little bit
imprecisely right now, but of course I could
| | 01:50 | type in exact coordinates and we
discussed that in some of the previous movies.
| | 01:53 | So I'll leave that to you if you
want to move it by an exact amount.
| | 01:56 | Now at this point, if I go to my 3D view,
I'm going to click on my default 3D
| | 02:01 | view icon here, the little birdhouse
icon, you'll see that I've got my two
| | 02:04 | buildings seated next to one another.
| | 02:07 | Now over on the Project Browser if I
scroll down at the bottom, Revit links
| | 02:12 | actually appear right
here on the Project Browser.
| | 02:14 | So if I expand that out you'll see that
the shed building is shown right here.
| | 02:19 | It's got a small blue arrow next to it.
| | 02:21 | That blue arrow is telling me that
it's currently loaded and of course we can
| | 02:25 | see that on screen, because we
can actually see the building.
| | 02:28 | If I wanted to open the shed and do
some work on it, there is a limitation with
| | 02:33 | linked Revit files where you can't have
both your host building, office building
| | 02:37 | in this case, and your nested link file,
your shed in this case, you can't have
| | 02:43 | both of them open at the same
time in the same session of Revit.
| | 02:47 | They can be opened in two different Revits.
| | 02:49 | So if we have two users working on
separate computers, each one can be working
| | 02:54 | on a different building, but you
can't have both buildings open on the same
| | 02:59 | person's computer at the same time.
| | 03:01 | So if I wanted to open up shed, and I click
on it, that will generate an error message.
| | 03:07 | It'll say sorry you can't do that,
because it's currently loaded.
| | 03:10 | Do you want to unload the link?
| | 03:13 | Now if I say yes here it'll actually
remove that link right there and it's going
| | 03:18 | to warn me that I can't undo
that and I'll say that's fine.
| | 03:21 | It opens up the shed and what we'll
see here if we switch windows back to the
| | 03:26 | office building, first of all you see
the shed is missing and if I scroll down
| | 03:32 | you can see a big red X next to it.
| | 03:34 | So it's showing me that the
shed has now been unloaded.
| | 03:37 | It didn't remove it, it didn't delete
it, but it's just not currently loaded.
| | 03:40 | Now I'm going to switch over here the
shed and I'm just going to make some change.
| | 03:45 | So it's got two windows on this side
and it's got this little entry patio over
| | 03:49 | here, maybe I'll select one of these
windows and copy it and add an extra
| | 03:53 | window, select the door here,
maybe I want something a little larger.
| | 03:57 | When I open up the list, I only have
the default door in here so that just
| | 04:00 | simply means I need to go to the
Architecture tab, click on the Door tool, load
| | 04:05 | a family, we've done this in a
previous movie, and I'll just bring in a double
| | 04:09 | flush door like so.
| | 04:12 | Instead of actually placing the door I'll
press Escape and I'll select this
| | 04:17 | existing door and now you can see that
I have the double door available there
| | 04:21 | and I'll just choose the size.
| | 04:23 | So we've made those two changes. Both
should be pretty noticeable when we reload
| | 04:27 | this file back into the other project.
| | 04:29 | I'm going to go to the R here, go down to Close.
| | 04:33 | It's going to ask me if I want to save
the changes to the shed, I'm going to
| | 04:38 | say Yes, and then back here in order to see
those changes, I have to reload the shed file.
| | 04:46 | I can do that by right-clicking
right here, choose the Reload button, and
| | 04:52 | you'll see the shed appear, and when I
zoom in, it now has three windows on this
| | 04:56 | side and a double door.
| | 04:58 | So that's basically the value of
setting up a linked file in Revit.
| | 05:02 | One person can be working in the shed
file making their changes, another person
| | 05:06 | can be working in the office building
making their changes, and every so often
| | 05:10 | each of these users can update their
link file and see any of the changes that
| | 05:14 | their colleague has made.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Rotating and aligning a Revit link| 00:00 | In this movie, we're going to take a
look at the Align and Rotate commands.
| | 00:04 | These are two really useful and
powerful modification commands that allow us
| | 00:07 | to reposition objects based on rotations or
their relationships to other nearby geometry.
| | 00:13 | So I'm in a file called Align Rotate and
down here in the lower corner, I have a
| | 00:19 | small office building, and up here this
odd shape is actually a Site Plan file
| | 00:24 | that's linked in to the project file here.
| | 00:28 | Now we're in the Level 1 Floor Plan
and we can get a much better look if we
| | 00:33 | change to the Site Plan view, so I'm
going to double-click Site Plan and now it
| | 00:37 | becomes a little bit more
evident what I'm actually looking at.
| | 00:40 | Here is my linked site file, it's got
some roads and sidewalks, it's got a
| | 00:44 | parking lot and a property line.
| | 00:46 | And if you look right here at the end
of this sidewalk, there's like a little
| | 00:50 | green dot right there, and I'm going zoom
in on that, and that little green dot is
| | 00:54 | actually a small green line, that's
where the front door is of the building.
| | 00:59 | So I'm going to use that green line
for reference to get this Site Plan
| | 01:03 | positioned relative to the building down here.
| | 01:07 | So let me zoom in on the building and
so you could see that we are just looking
| | 01:13 | down on the building right now, we're
seeing the roof but we can't really tell
| | 01:17 | where that front door is.
| | 01:18 | So temporarily I am going to take this
view and using the Visual Style pop-up
| | 01:22 | right here, the default is Hidden
Line, which is typically what we want.
| | 01:25 | I'm going to change that to Wireframe,
and the drawing gets a little busier, but
| | 01:29 | in this case that will help me
identify where the door is. You'll notice if I
| | 01:33 | zoom in over here that there's a wall
right here and these lines right here,
| | 01:37 | that's were the front doors is.
| | 01:39 | So we want that green line to kind
of line up in that general location.
| | 01:42 | So let me zoom out, again, using Zoom
Previous and to get started I'm going to
| | 01:47 | take this file and I'm just simply
going to drag it and get it close by.
| | 01:52 | So that's really the first step.
| | 01:54 | And the reason I want to do it that
way is, it's going to be a lot easier to
| | 01:59 | make the modification without
having to constantly zoom in and out.
| | 02:00 | So if I just get it in the general
ballpark and then I can fine-tune it.
| | 02:04 | Now I've still got the file selected
and I'll start with the Rotate command, so
| | 02:07 | I am going to click on that or type R O
which is the shortcut for that command.
| | 02:11 | Now on the Options bar, there
are a few ways we could rotate.
| | 02:14 | We can either just type in an angle, so
if I happened to know that it needed to
| | 02:17 | rotate 10 degrees, I could simply type that in.
| | 02:20 | The trouble with that is, is you will
see that it rotated just fine but 10
| | 02:24 | degrees wasn't the right amount, I don't
really know what the right amount
| | 02:27 | should be, and you can see that it's
sort of rotated around what seems like
| | 02:31 | an arbitrary point.
| | 02:32 | Well if I click the Rotate command
again to start the command, we kind of see
| | 02:38 | something is happening off screen here,
let me just pan a little bit and show
| | 02:42 | you there's this little blue dot right here.
| | 02:45 | Now if I roll my wheel and zoom all
the way out, that little blue dot is
| | 02:50 | actually at the center of this imaginary box
which surrounds the object that we have selected.
| | 02:56 | So that center point is not at a
terribly convenient point for rotation right
| | 03:00 | now, so let me zoom back in, and we can
actually change where this center point is located.
| | 03:06 | So I'm just going to click on the
little blue dot right here and I'll zoom in a
| | 03:11 | little closer at the end of the
sidewalk, and I'm going to snap it right to the
| | 03:16 | endpoint of that green line.
| | 03:18 | Once I have the Center point right
there, I now have a lot more control.
| | 03:21 | I'm going to take the starting angle
and make it snap to the other end of that
| | 03:26 | line, and now I'm rotating off of that known
edge there, and so now I have a lot more control.
| | 03:33 | And notice that if I move this up to a
horizontal, it will automatically snap to
| | 03:38 | horizontal and figure out what the
rotation should be and I'll just simply click
| | 03:43 | and you'll see that it will snap that entire file
to a nice horizontal and vertical orientation.
| | 03:49 | At this point, all I would have to do is
just move it from the midpoint here to
| | 03:53 | the midpoint of that door.
| | 03:54 | Now that's certainly one way that we
could do the rotation. I'm actually
| | 03:58 | going to undo that, zoom out a little bit and
I'm going to show you the Align method next.
| | 04:04 | So there's nothing wrong with the
Rotate method, you can certainly do that, and
| | 04:07 | that was one of our options.
| | 04:09 | The other option is to go to Modify
tab and use my Align command, A L is
| | 04:14 | the shortcut for that.
| | 04:16 | So the way the Align command works is
you highlight some reference on your
| | 04:20 | screen that you want to use as the
reference point and then you click a second
| | 04:25 | object and that second object will move and
rotate into position relative to the first.
| | 04:31 | So in this case, I want my Reference
point to be, I'm using my Tab key and I'm
| | 04:38 | tabbing until I get the face of this
wall, I want my Reference point to be the
| | 04:43 | face of this wall right here, and you'll
see it will highlight that edge all the
| | 04:47 | way across the screen.
| | 04:49 | Now Revit wants me to select the
entity that I want to move and position into
| | 04:54 | alignment with that edge and I'll click
on this green line right here, and the
| | 05:00 | nice thing about that technique is
it moves and rotates in one step.
| | 05:05 | Now I still have to fine-tune the
position, so you might argue that it's still
| | 05:09 | two steps either way and that's why I
said we can really do this either way,
| | 05:13 | but I can go from midpoint to
midpoint and now my sidewalk is positioned
| | 05:18 | exactly at the front door.
| | 05:20 | I zoom back out, I set back to Hidden Line,
and I'm not quite done yet because if
| | 05:27 | you deselect you'll notice that
something happened to the building.
| | 05:30 | And what actually happened to the
building was if I go to one of my Elevation
| | 05:35 | views, like a South Elevation, we can
see that the linked file is actually
| | 05:39 | inserted too high, it's
floating up above the building.
| | 05:41 | So what happened to my
building was we buried it.
| | 05:44 | So here is another place where
we can use our Align command.
| | 05:48 | If I zoom and show you the linked site
file actually has a level here called
| | 05:53 | Project Level, and you can see that
relative to the site file that's at 56 feet.
| | 05:58 | So the 56 feet in the site file
should match zero in my current file.
| | 06:06 | In other words, this site
file needs to move down 56 feet.
| | 06:10 | So my two methods that I could use
to do that would be to use the Move
| | 06:14 | command and just move it down 56 feet,
or I'm going to use the Align command
| | 06:19 | again for this, click on Align,
highlight Level 1 as my Alignment reference,
| | 06:24 | and then highlight this level here in
the Linked file, and you'll see that it will
| | 06:29 | pull the site plan down.
| | 06:31 | Cancel out of the command, I'm going
to go to the 3D View, zoom in, and we now
| | 06:36 | have our building positioned
nicely relative to the site.
| | 06:40 | So Align and Rotate give us two
different methods that we can use to do overall
| | 06:45 | positioning like what we've done here
with our site plan, you'll find yourself
| | 06:48 | using these commands all the time for
various purposes, these were just examples
| | 06:53 | that I've given you here.
| | 06:54 | With the Align tool, you use a
reference and then move the other object into
| | 06:58 | position with that reference, and with
the Rotate tool you can either type in
| | 07:02 | an angle that you want to rotate or you
can use points on screen to indicate the rotation.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Establishing shared coordinates| 00:00 | So by now we've looked at a few
different ways that we can link in various files.
| | 00:03 | We've linked in Revit files.
We've linked in CAD files.
| | 00:06 | In many cases we just chose the default
positioning center to center or origin
| | 00:11 | to origin and then if
necessary we move the file.
| | 00:14 | In this movie, I'd like to talk about
a feature called Shared Coordinates.
| | 00:17 | Shared Coordinates is a feature in
Revit where we're able to manage the
| | 00:20 | positioning of two linked files
relative to one another and the main benefit of
| | 00:25 | doing this is, once you've established
the relationship between two files, it's
| | 00:30 | going to work in both directions and it's
going to be maintained throughout the
| | 00:33 | course of the project.
| | 00:34 | So in this case like the file I have
here on screen, which is called Shared
| | 00:38 | Coordinates, I have a linked site file
in this file, and what I want to be able
| | 00:43 | to do is open up the site file and
link in the building and have it come in
| | 00:48 | the correct location without my
having to repeat all of the manual move and
| | 00:53 | rotate and align steps.
| | 00:54 | So let's take a look at the process.
| | 00:56 | So I'm going to select the linked
file here on screen and I'm just simply
| | 01:01 | going to click on it anywhere and you'll
see there it highlights, and we're
| | 01:05 | going take a look over at the
Properties palette, and you can see here's the
| | 01:08 | name of the file right here.
| | 01:09 | It's a Linked Revit model, it's called
Building Site, and we can optionally give
| | 01:13 | it a name if we want.
| | 01:14 | And down here, this is where we want to
direct our attention, the Shared Site is
| | 01:18 | currently set to Not Shared.
| | 01:21 | So I'm going to click that button and I
want to actually share the coordinate system.
| | 01:25 | So we have two ways we can do this, we
can publish the coordinate system from
| | 01:29 | the current file to the link, or we can
acquire the coordinate system from the
| | 01:34 | linked file into the current file.
| | 01:37 | Now it's almost a six of one and half a
dozen of the other kind of situation, so
| | 01:42 | it really isn't terribly
important which one I chose here.
| | 01:45 | In my opinion, the site plan ought to be the
one that does the publishing and acquiring.
| | 01:51 | In other words, I want to assume that
the site plan has the master coordinates
| | 01:55 | and I want to gain those coordinates from there.
| | 01:58 | So in this case, since I'm in the
Building file, I want to acquire the
| | 02:02 | coordinates from the site,
so I'm going to choose that.
| | 02:06 | But like I said everything should
still function the exact same way if I did
| | 02:09 | publish. It's really a
matter of preference actually.
| | 02:12 | Now down here, Revit can actually
record this information that we're creating.
| | 02:18 | We're creating a relationship
between these two files, it has to record
| | 02:22 | that information somewhere, and it's
recording it in a saved position and it's
| | 02:27 | calling that simply Internal.
| | 02:29 | Now if you're satisfied with that
name Internal, then all you have to do is
| | 02:33 | click Reconcile and you're done.
| | 02:35 | I personally prefer to rename that position.
| | 02:38 | I like to rename it to
something a little bit more descriptive.
| | 02:42 | So I'm going to click Change right
here and you could see the Internal is the
| | 02:46 | current saved position or Saved Site
Revit calls it, and you could either
| | 02:51 | Duplicate it or Rename it.
| | 02:53 | If you want to preserve Internal for
any reason, choose Duplicate and maybe
| | 02:57 | that's considered a little bit safer,
or if you're sure that you don't need
| | 03:01 | Internal you can just simply rename it.
| | 03:03 | For this example, I'm going to simply
rename it and I'm going to call this
| | 03:07 | Building Site, and I'm just
describing that location in the file.
| | 03:12 | So that's the Building Site and I'm
going to click OK, and then click the
| | 03:17 | Reconcile button, and what we'll see
right here is the Shared Site of this linked
| | 03:23 | file is named Building Site, and to me
that's a little bit nicer and a little
| | 03:28 | more descriptive than having that
button say Internal, which is what it would
| | 03:31 | have said had I not done the rename step.
| | 03:33 | But I just want to stress that
the rename step really is optional.
| | 03:37 | Okay, we're not done yet.
| | 03:39 | The last step in the
process here is to save the file.
| | 03:43 | So I need to come up here and click
Save and when I do, it will say location
| | 03:49 | position has changed in the file called
Building Site, the linked file, we have
| | 03:55 | changed the position.
| | 03:56 | Well of course, we did.
| | 03:57 | We renamed Internal and called it
Building Site and changed its coordinates.
| | 04:01 | So I have to save not only the current file
but I have to save the linked file as well.
| | 04:07 | So I'm going to click on Save and now
we've established that relationship.
| | 04:12 | Now you may recall in the file where
we set up a linked Revit file, I can't
| | 04:17 | have both the site and the building open at
the same time in the same session of Revit.
| | 04:21 | So what I'm going to do here go to the
big R, the Application menu, and I'm going
| | 04:26 | to choose Close, and then my Building
Site is listed right over here, I'm going
| | 04:31 | to click on that and open
that up as a recent file.
| | 04:34 | Now it should there because we just saved it.
| | 04:37 | If it's not there you can just go to Open
and browse to it, but it should be there.
| | 04:41 | Notice that it does not have the building.
| | 04:44 | Now the building should fit right
about here and be oriented to the sidewalks
| | 04:50 | and the parking lot, and so forth.
| | 04:52 | I am going to go to the 3D View
and zoom in just a little bit.
| | 04:57 | Go to the Insert tab, click on the Link
Revit, select my Shared Coordinates file,
| | 05:03 | and down here instead of any of the
other options that we've previously looked
| | 05:08 | at I'm going to chose By Shared Coordinates.
| | 05:10 | When I do that, Revit knows exactly
where to put the file, when I click Open, it
| | 05:15 | will come in in exactly the correct location.
| | 05:18 | So that's one of the benefits of
using the Shared Coordinate system.
| | 05:21 | Once you've set it up for a pair
of files, it goes both directions.
| | 05:25 | So it's a bidirectional link and the
files will know where they should go.
| | 05:30 | So it's a pretty nice benefit. If we
had additional buildings on the site we
| | 05:34 | could set them up the same way and
then even those other buildings would know
| | 05:37 | about each other, and we could build an entire
campus of buildings that were all linked together.
| | 05:42 | So the Shared Coordinates feature is
just a way of managing the insertion points
| | 05:46 | and the coordinates, actually it's
more than the insertion point, it's the X,
| | 05:51 | the Y, the Z, the orientation, it's all of that.
| | 05:53 | It's a way of managing that
relationship between two files when they're linked
| | 05:58 | together and it maintains that
relationship bidirectionally so if you link one
| | 06:02 | to the other, the relationship stays intact.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Managing links| 00:00 | An important aspect of working
with linked files in Revit is managing
| | 00:03 | the existing links.
| | 00:04 | Sometimes the connection to a
linked file can become disrupted;
| | 00:07 | sometimes you wish to point a linked
file to another file or a different
| | 00:10 | version of the same file.
| | 00:11 | Sometimes you simply wish to check
all the linked files in your project and
| | 00:14 | reload the ones you know have changed
since the last time you've loaded them.
| | 00:18 | All of these actions will take
place in the Manage Links dialog.
| | 00:21 | So in this movie, I'd like to look at
Manage Links, and to do that I'm going to
| | 00:23 | open up a simple file.
| | 00:25 | So up here on the Quick Access Toolbar,
I'm going to click the Open icon, and
| | 00:30 | here in the Chapter05 folder I'm going
to open this file called Managing Links.
| | 00:35 | Now when I click Open, a dialog
is going to display saying I have
| | 00:40 | Unresolved References.
| | 00:42 | There are many reasons why this dialog
might appear but it's a fairly common
| | 00:45 | dialog that you'll see.
| | 00:47 | All this is telling me is some of
links in my file cannot be found, there's
| | 00:52 | something wrong with them.
| | 00:53 | And so it's offering me
two remedies to the problem.
| | 00:55 | I can use the Manage Links dialog to
correct the problem or I can just simply
| | 01:00 | ignore the problem and
continue opening the project.
| | 01:02 | Now since we're talking about Manage
Links in this movie, it seems like a good
| | 01:05 | idea to choose this first option right here.
| | 01:07 | So I'll choose Open Manage Links and
the Manage Links dialog will open, and you
| | 01:11 | could see it's a multi-tabbed dialog
and the Revit tab is our first tab, and
| | 01:16 | there are two linked Revit
projects currently loaded in this project.
| | 01:20 | Now the first one is no problem, it's
Building Site, it's currently loaded and
| | 01:25 | it's finding is just fine.
| | 01:26 | The second one called Shed is listed as
Not Found, and that's really the problem.
| | 01:32 | And so what you can see here is
there's a Saved Path column and it lists out
| | 01:35 | where that file was last saved, and
what it's telling me is that was in a
| | 01:40 | folder called Links in a file called Shed, and
it can't find the file in that location anymore.
| | 01:45 | So what I can do is I
can select Shed right here.
| | 01:49 | Now make sure you click it this way,
if you come in here and you just sort of
| | 01:53 | select over here, all these buttons
gray out down here, so you have to
| | 01:57 | actually select it over here in the left-hand
column and that makes these buttons available.
| | 02:02 | Now the three buttons that I have
here are Reload From, Reload or Remove.
| | 02:07 | If I click Reload nothing is going to
happen because it's going to say that it
| | 02:11 | can't find the file.
| | 02:12 | It's going to say well it's not found
so the link is going to stay unloaded,
| | 02:14 | so nothing takes place.
| | 02:16 | What I have to do in this case is
choose Reload From, so I'm going to choose that,
| | 02:21 | and that will take me out to the hard drive, so
I can locate the missing file and point to it.
| | 02:26 | I could even choose a different
file if I wanted to and point to that.
| | 02:30 | Now in this case I have a copy of the
Shed file sitting here in the Chapter05
| | 02:34 | folder, so I'm simply going to just
pick that one, click Open, you'll see that
| | 02:39 | will change the Saved Path, Revit is now
satisfied with the file and it says the
| | 02:45 | status of the link is Loaded.
| | 02:46 | Now let's look at a few of these
other settings over here in Manage Links.
| | 02:50 | Reference Type is two varieties, we
have Overlay and we have Attachment.
| | 02:55 | If you're only nesting your references
one level deep then there's really very
| | 03:00 | little difference between these two features.
| | 03:04 | Where Overlay comes in, is it only
goes one level deep. Attachment will
| | 03:08 | go multi-levels deep.
| | 03:10 | So if I bring in the shed and then if
we looked at the Shed file and it had
| | 03:16 | another link linked into it, if we use
Overlay it would ignore any links that
| | 03:22 | happened to be in the Shed file.
| | 03:24 | But if we use Attach, those nested
links would come all the way through to
| | 03:28 | the top-level host.
| | 03:30 | So in some cases if you're building a
really detailed structure of links you
| | 03:34 | might want to choose
Attachment, the default is Overlay.
| | 03:38 | The default Path Type is Relative, so as
you can see over here the Saved Path is
| | 03:43 | just the name of the file, or in the
previous example before I loaded, it said
| | 03:49 | \Links\Shed, it didn't actually write
it all the way back to the drive letter.
| | 03:53 | If you change this to Absolute, it's
going to list out the full path including
| | 03:59 | the drive letter and
my desktop, and so forth.
| | 04:02 | So I'm going to leave this one set to Relative.
| | 04:04 | If you want to make the paths Absolute,
sometimes if everybody has access to the
| | 04:10 | same drive locations, sometimes that can
ensure that the files don't go missing.
| | 04:14 | But it could just as easily cause errors
of a different sort if folks don't have
| | 04:19 | access to the same drive letters.
| | 04:22 | Also in Manage Links we could manage
any CAD files we have, I don't have any in
| | 04:26 | this file or DWF markups of point clouds.
| | 04:28 | So I'm going to stick just with the
Revit files, I'm going to click OK.
| | 04:32 | And then if I zoom in over here,
you'll see that the shed is now appearing.
| | 04:37 | So the Manage Links dialog was offered
to me there when I open the file because
| | 04:41 | Revit saw a problem with it.
| | 04:42 | But while you're working in a project
you may also want to access Manage Links
| | 04:47 | in either load, or unload a file, or do
some other operation on a linked file.
| | 04:52 | You can do that in a couple of places.
| | 04:54 | You can go to the Insert tab and the
Manage Links button is right here, and it's
| | 04:59 | the same dialog we just looked at, let
me click OK, or if I scroll all the way
| | 05:04 | down in the Project Browser, I can right-
click on the Revit Links item and I can
| | 05:10 | choose Manage Links right
there and it loads the same dialog.
| | 05:13 | Now many of the functions that we have
in the Manage Links dialog on the Revit
| | 05:18 | tab are also available right here on a
right-click of each individual file. So I
| | 05:25 | can Reload the file, Unload the file,
Open the file which will force it to
| | 05:30 | unload as well because as we've mentioned
in some previous movies, you can't have
| | 05:34 | a host and a link open at the same time
in the same version of Revit, or we can
| | 05:39 | reload it from another location.
| | 05:41 | So you could do all of those things
from a right-click without having to
| | 05:44 | actually open Manage Links.
| | 05:46 | So we use the Manage Links dialog to
do a variety of tasks related to our
| | 05:50 | linked files. We can use it to make
sure that the paths remain intact, that the
| | 05:54 | files can be found, to reload the latest
changes, or to even remove the links if
| | 05:58 | we no longer need them.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding file formats| 00:00 | I'd like to take a quick moment to
talk to you about file format issues.
| | 00:03 | I've got a page open here from the
Autodesk WikiHelp and it's talking about
| | 00:07 | backward compatibility with Revit.
| | 00:08 | It's really important that you understand
that each release of Revit is a new file format.
| | 00:13 | So what I mean by that is if you're
working in Revit 2013, you can't collaborate
| | 00:17 | back and forth with the user
who is using a previous release.
| | 00:20 | So all of the members of the project
team have to be on a 2013 release, they
| | 00:25 | don't all have to be on Revit Architecture.
| | 00:28 | You can have different members of the
team on Revit Architecture, or Revit
| | 00:31 | Structure, or Revit MEP or even the
complete product Revit that includes
| | 00:35 | all three disciplines.
| | 00:36 | It's just that everyone has
to be on the 2013 version.
| | 00:40 | If you take a 2012 file for example
and upgrade it to 2013, there's no way to
| | 00:45 | save it back again to 2013.
| | 00:47 | So it's really important that
everybody on the team understand that and the
| | 00:51 | easiest solution is to just have a team
meeting at the start of the project and
| | 00:54 | make a decision about what file formats going
to be used for the duration of the project.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. Sketch-Based Modeling ComponentsWorking with floors| 00:00 | The theme of the movies in this
chapter will be sketch-based objects.
| | 00:04 | What I mean by sketch-based objects,
is any object in Revit that you have to
| | 00:07 | create a two-dimensional sketch in
order to indicate the shape or overall
| | 00:12 | form of the object.
| | 00:13 | There are certain objects that Revit can
automatically assume the shape or the form for you.
| | 00:18 | When you draw walls or doors or windows
you really only need a click or two and
| | 00:22 | Revit can do the rest, but when you
want to draw elements like floors or roofs
| | 00:26 | or stairs and railings, these objects
require a little bit more input from you
| | 00:30 | in terms of what the shape and
form of that overall object is.
| | 00:34 | So in this movie, we're going to
look at floors as our first example of a
| | 00:38 | sketch-based object and I'm in a
file here called Adding Floors.
| | 00:41 | So on the Architecture tab we'll find
the Floor tool over here, I'm going to
| | 00:45 | simply click on that.
| | 00:46 | If you use the dropdown portion,
make sure you're choosing Floor
| | 00:49 | Architectural for this example.
| | 00:51 | I'm just going to click the button
here, that's actually the default Floor
| | 00:54 | button, and this takes me into Sketch mode,
this mode that I'm talking about here.
| | 01:00 | Now I know I'm in Sketch mode
because a few things happen on screen.
| | 01:03 | The drawing window grays out and
kind of becomes like an underlay.
| | 01:08 | The Ribbon tab tints in this greenish
color and right here on the ribbon we
| | 01:14 | get this Mode panel with these two big
buttons, we get the big red X and the
| | 01:19 | big green check box.
| | 01:20 | Those buttons are important, because
those are the only ways out of Sketch mode.
| | 01:24 | So if you change your mind about being
in Sketch mode, you use the big red X and
| | 01:29 | that cancels the command.
| | 01:30 | If you want to complete your sketch,
you use the big green check box and that
| | 01:34 | finishes your command.
| | 01:35 | There is no other way to get out of
here, you can't press Escape, you can't
| | 01:38 | click the Modify tool,
those are the two tools you use.
| | 01:41 | So as a general rule of thumb, stay on
the Modify tab when you're working in
| | 01:45 | Sketch mode, because if you click on
one of the other tabs here, you'll see
| | 01:49 | those buttons aren't available and you
kind of get lost and you're not really
| | 01:53 | sure what to do next.
| | 01:54 | So make sure you stay over here on the
Modify tab, everything you need to do in
| | 01:58 | a sketch is going to be right here on this tab.
| | 02:01 | Now usually it starts with the Draw
panel over here and the various tools that
| | 02:06 | are available to us.
| | 02:07 | With the Floor object we can draw
Boundary Lines, Slope Arrows or we can
| | 02:11 | change the Span Direction.
| | 02:12 | Boundary Line is the default that's
already chosen for us, so I'm going to
| | 02:16 | keep that selected.
| | 02:17 | Over here we can draw any shape we like;
| | 02:20 | lines, rectangles, circles.
| | 02:22 | There's a default selection here Pick
Walls, we're going to stick with that.
| | 02:27 | This is a really handy tool because it
allows us to just click on the underlying
| | 02:31 | walls in the background drawing area
and it will create sketch lines that match
| | 02:36 | the shape of those walls.
It can be really helpful.
| | 02:39 | Now on the Options Bar we have one other
really helpful setting, Extend into wall core.
| | 02:44 | Now that's only available if you choose
Pick Walls, if we had line or rectangle
| | 02:49 | or any of the other shapes,
that check box goes away.
| | 02:52 | But when I have Pick Walls, this Extend
into cores here and here's how that works.
| | 02:56 | If I click on the wall you'll see that
I get a sketch line, that sketch line
| | 03:01 | matches the overall extent to the wall.
| | 03:03 | Let me zoom in and take a look at
where that sketch line occurred.
| | 03:09 | Now I'm going to click my Modify tool
here to cancel out of the command so that
| | 03:13 | I can actually select the sketch line.
| | 03:15 | You see that, that sketch line is right
there on the edge of the interior line
| | 03:20 | in the wall. That interior
line is the face of the core.
| | 03:24 | Now if I slide this over just a little
bit, I'm holding in my wheel and dragging.
| | 03:28 | There is a Flip Grip right here, if I
click that, that will actually flip to the
| | 03:35 | other side of the core, but if I zoom
in just a touch more, you can see that it
| | 03:40 | is actually the other side of the core.
| | 03:42 | The dry wall line which is this gray
line here still occurs a little bit
| | 03:47 | further away from that.
| | 03:48 | So when you've got the Extend into
wall core, that's what you're doing, is
| | 03:52 | you're either on the inside face
or the outside face of the core.
| | 03:56 | Now I'm going to zoom back out and
continue adding sketch lines here, so I'll
| | 04:02 | go back to the Pick Walls option and
I'm going to make sure I'm clicking
| | 04:07 | exterior walls, I mean you can click
interior walls too, but in this case
| | 04:11 | that's not what I want.
| | 04:13 | Keep going around like so.
| | 04:15 | This front wall is actually in two
pieces, so I'm only to pick one of those
| | 04:20 | pieces there, I don't need to click both,
you could click both but my preference
| | 04:24 | is to have a cleaner sketch where I
have a single line going across. So I'm
| | 04:28 | going to use my Trim/Extend to Corner
command, we looked at that when we were
| | 04:32 | drawing walls in an earlier movie, and
I'm going to click these two sketch lines
| | 04:36 | here and clean them up to a corner.
| | 04:38 | One of the rules of a sketch is, the
sketch has to be enclosed, you won't get a
| | 04:43 | valid floor object if
the sketch is not enclosed.
| | 04:46 | So I'll come up here and I'll click my
green check box, my Finish Edit mode, and
| | 04:51 | that will complete the floor object.
| | 04:54 | Now I'm getting a message here from
Revit, it says would you like the walls
| | 04:57 | that go up to this floor's
level to attach to the bottom?
| | 05:01 | We're going to cut a section in a
few minutes to look at what it's really
| | 05:03 | talking about here, but what it's
saying is the walls underneath this floor, do
| | 05:07 | I want those to come up
and attach to this floor?
| | 05:10 | Now in this case I'm actually going to
answer No here, because the walls that
| | 05:14 | it's talking about are around the
perimeter of the building, they are foundation
| | 05:18 | walls and that's not
really the result that I want.
| | 05:21 | But we'll say Yes to that question in
the next floor that we draw and you'll see
| | 05:24 | we'll be able to contrast the two behaviors.
| | 05:26 | Okay now the floor remains selected,
and of course, if I wanted to I could make
| | 05:30 | modifications to it.
| | 05:32 | Now to do a modification you could
actually use this Edit Boundary button right
| | 05:36 | here, that would take you back into
the sketch and then you could make any
| | 05:40 | changes that you wanted to.
| | 05:41 | If I change my mind about the shape
of this floor and I want to make it
| | 05:44 | some other shape, in this case I'm just
going to cancel though and discard those changes.
| | 05:48 | So let's go up to Level 2 and let's add a
second floor object here on the second floor.
| | 05:54 | So I'm going to go back to the
Architecture tab, click the Floor button again.
| | 05:59 | All the same defaults apply, so I'm
going to accept all of those, and I'm going
| | 06:04 | to pick these exterior walls right there,
but then I'm going to stop and go to
| | 06:09 | my Trim tool, because in this area here
I have a double volume space, so that's
| | 06:13 | open to below, so I'm just going to
trim this to this to make it a nice corner
| | 06:19 | and so I'll get an edge over here.
| | 06:20 | However, if we zoom in, in this little
area here, that would make it a little
| | 06:25 | difficult for this stair to take us
up to that floor area, so we need to
| | 06:30 | create a little extension over here
and I'm going to do that by just drawing
| | 06:34 | the shape that I want.
| | 06:35 | So here's an example where Pick Walls
wouldn't really help me, so I'll just draw
| | 06:41 | a line here, draw another line
there, and then I'll just trim it up.
| | 06:47 | This one to this one, remember to pick
the lines you want to keep, if I undo
| | 06:51 | that and I do this, I
don't get the result I want.
| | 06:55 | So you pick here and then this is the
side I want to keep, so remember to do
| | 06:59 | that, and then this one to this one, that makes
a nice corner there and there. I click Finish.
| | 07:05 | I'm going to get that same question
again, and this time I'm going to say Yes,
| | 07:10 | and then it asked me a second question.
| | 07:12 | Here you could see it's highlighting
the exterior walls here, so I'm going to
| | 07:17 | say Yes again, and now I'm going to
cut a section and I'm going to show you
| | 07:20 | what all of that did.
| | 07:21 | So I'm going to zoom out here a
little bit and up here on my Quick Access
| | 07:25 | Toolbar, I have my Section button, so I'll
go ahead and click that and I'll just
| | 07:30 | draw a section through this area right here.
| | 07:32 | Now you can see that when you draw a
section it's just two clicks, this dashed
| | 07:36 | box is telling you which part of the
building will be included in the Section.
| | 07:40 | We're to be standing here at this line
looking this way and if I deselect it and
| | 07:46 | just double-click on there,
it will open up that section.
| | 07:50 | Now let's go ahead and zoom in on
these two floors that we just created.
| | 07:55 | The first question said do you want the
walls that go up to this floor's level
| | 08:00 | to attach to the bottom? They were
talking about these walls right here, so you
| | 08:04 | can see that this wall is
attached to the underside of this floor.
| | 08:07 | Over here the second question asked,
do we want the Floor object to join
| | 08:11 | geometry and connect to the exterior walls?
| | 08:13 | Now we said No to the question when we
did the first floor slab, because what it
| | 08:18 | would have done is, like here where it
cut these walls down to attach to this
| | 08:22 | floor, it would have done the same
thing with these foundation walls and we'd
| | 08:26 | have a funny little notch here.
| | 08:28 | Now if I don't like that condition
right there, I can manually clean that up by
| | 08:32 | going to Modify, clicking Join Geometry
and I go this object should join to that
| | 08:37 | object and it will clean that up for me.
| | 08:39 | So to create Floor slabs in your model,
say sketch-based object, sketch-based
| | 08:43 | object objects are generated from two
-dimensional sketches, in this case
| | 08:47 | drawn in a floor plan.
| | 08:48 | You can generate that sketch from the
surrounding walls or you can draw it line by line.
| | 08:52 | When you complete the sketch, Revit
will create the 3D geometry that's needed
| | 08:56 | for your floor slab.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with footprint roofs| 00:00 | Revit offers us a few different
ways that we can create roofs.
| | 00:03 | In this movie I will look
at the Footprint Roof option.
| | 00:07 | Footprint Roof option is very similar to
creating floor slabs that we looked out
| | 00:10 | in the in the last movie.
| | 00:12 | We sketch them out as a 2D sketch
and we do that sketch in a Plan view.
| | 00:16 | Now I'm here in a file called Footprint Roof
and I am currently in the level 1 floor plan.
| | 00:21 | Now there is actually two roof plans
in this file, there is a High Roof and a
| | 00:24 | Low Roof and so I am going to double-
click the High Roof to make sure that I'm
| | 00:28 | working in that view.
| | 00:30 | Now the High Roof is the left-hand
portion of the building and the Low Roof is
| | 00:33 | over here on the right.
| | 00:35 | So we'll start with the high one.
| | 00:36 | On the Architecture tab we have a Roof
button, now if you use the dropdown it's
| | 00:40 | actually Roof by Footprint that you
want, or that's actually the default button
| | 00:44 | that you can just click
right here if you prefer.
| | 00:47 | That takes me into Sketch mode;
| | 00:49 | we talked a little bit
about this in the last movie.
| | 00:52 | The drawing window grays out to a halftone.
| | 00:54 | The Ribbon tabs turns in this greenish
color, our boundary line and pick walls
| | 00:58 | are our default options
again here on the draw panel.
| | 01:01 | And over here on the Options bar we
have some similar options that we had with
| | 01:05 | the floor object, and in this case I want
to talk about the Defines Slope option.
| | 01:10 | Now since it is pretty common for
roofs to have a slope I thought it'd be
| | 01:14 | appropriate for us to start with this.
| | 01:16 | Now we also have an Overhang feature
and I am going accept this default right
| | 01:20 | here of 2 feet; if yours says something
different just go ahead and type two feet in there.
| | 01:24 | I click into the drawing window
somewhere and if I move my mouse near one of the
| | 01:29 | walls which you'll see is it will
highlight the wall but the dash greenline
| | 01:33 | instead of appearing right on the
wall this time will actually appear at a
| | 01:36 | distance away, 2 feet in this case,
because that's what I set the overhang too.
| | 01:40 | Now by moving the mouse slightly you
can make that go to the inside or the
| | 01:44 | outside, even if you accidentally click
on the inside, don't worry about it it's
| | 01:48 | not a big deal because we have the
little flip grip right here and I can just
| | 01:52 | click that to make it go to the outside,
but we probably want these lines to go
| | 01:55 | to the outside of the building.
| | 01:56 | Now there is a small little triangle
that appears on the sketch line, that's
| | 02:00 | because we checked Defines slope.
| | 02:02 | So what you want to do is think of this
sketch line as almost like a piano hinge.
| | 02:07 | So if you imagine that that line is
hinging then the plane of the roof instead
| | 02:12 | of being flat right there at that edge it's
actually going to slope up from that edge.
| | 02:16 | And how much it's going to slope is
controlled by this number right here.
| | 02:20 | The default is this very strange
fraction, 619/128/12; basically 7 and 12. I am
| | 02:27 | going to change that to a
slightly shallower slope of 4 and 12.
| | 02:31 | Now notice that all I have to type is
four and when I press Enter, Revit will
| | 02:36 | see that as a 4 rise and 12 run.
| | 02:39 | So it becomes a 4 and 12 slope.
| | 02:40 | I'm going to come over here and I am
going to click this other edge over here,
| | 02:45 | make that 4 and 12 as well, and I am just going
to do two more, this one, notice that the
| | 02:52 | corner cleans up automatically here,
but not here so we'll fix that in a
| | 02:55 | minute, and this one.
| | 02:57 | Let me go to my Trim/Extend to Corner,
clean this up because like our floor
| | 03:04 | slabs that we talked about in the last
movie, you have to have an enclosed shape
| | 03:08 | in order for the sketch to be completed.
| | 03:10 | I am going to click the Finish button
right here and if I deselect it so you can
| | 03:16 | get a better look at it, you can see
that we've essentially gotten a hip roof.
| | 03:20 | Now the best way to see this is to go
to our little birdhouse icon over here on
| | 03:24 | the Quick Access Toolbar, now if I
hold down my Shift key and drag with my
| | 03:28 | wheel, I can spin this thing
around and get a slightly better look.
| | 03:32 | Now of course that roof is not really
what I had in mind, it doesn't match the
| | 03:37 | shape of the building at all, but what
I wanted you to see was that we could
| | 03:42 | very quickly create a roof in a very
traditional shape, a hip roof in this case.
| | 03:46 | Now if I select the roof I can actually
modify it any time I like. I do that by
| | 03:51 | going to the Edit Footprint
button on the Modified tab.
| | 03:54 | I can do that right here in 3D, so if
you want to, you can go back to the High
| | 03:58 | Roof roof plan, but I can also modify it here.
| | 04:01 | Now what I want to do is take these
two edges at the end here and select them
| | 04:08 | with my Control key and then
simply uncheck Define slope.
| | 04:12 | When I do that if I were to
click Finish I get a gable roof.
| | 04:17 | So by deciding which edges are sloped
and which ones aren't, you can change the
| | 04:22 | shape of the roof pretty quickly.
| | 04:24 | Let's go to Edit Footprint one more
time and let's make this shape match the
| | 04:28 | shape of the building a little bit better.
| | 04:30 | So now I am going to go to my Boundary
Line again, pick walls make sure I have
| | 04:35 | my Overhang, but this time I am going to
turn off to Define slope, and I am going
| | 04:40 | to add a sketch line here to
this wall and here to this wall.
| | 04:44 | Notice that Revit
automatically trims it up at the corners.
| | 04:47 | If it doesn't, you just use the
Trim command and do it yourself.
| | 04:50 | I'll click finish and let's
take a look at what we got.
| | 04:55 | Now we have still a gable roof, but the
gable has that notch taken out of it and
| | 05:00 | it follows the shape of the building.
| | 05:01 | I am going to make another quick roof
right over here. This is my low roof down
| | 05:08 | over here, and I'll go to the Roof
command and it's going to ask me, because I'm
| | 05:13 | working in 3D, which level I
want to associate that roof to.
| | 05:16 | So I am going to associate it with the
Low Roof level, so this is just another
| | 05:20 | way you can do it. If you prefer, you can
go to the Low Roof floor plan instead.
| | 05:25 | I am going to turn on Define slope,
pick a point right there, change that to a
| | 05:30 | really shallow slope, 2 and 12, then I
am going to turn off Define Slope, add a
| | 05:36 | sketch here and here, and then finally
I'm going to just draw a line manually on
| | 05:42 | this inside edge right there.
Click my Modify tool to cancel.
| | 05:46 | When I click Finish, because I only
sloped one edge, I get a shed roof.
| | 05:52 | Okay, so just by controlling which
edges are sloped and which ones aren't you
| | 05:57 | can do quite a variety of
different standard roof forms.
| | 06:01 | The Footprint Roof is very similar to
a Floor Slab except that typically you
| | 06:05 | are going to apply slope to it, you use
the Define slope check box to make any
| | 06:10 | one of the edges a sloping edge and that
edge basically is treated like a piano hinge.
| | 06:15 | When you click Finish, Revit will
figure out the 3D geometry from your various
| | 06:20 | sloping and non-sloping edges.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with extrusion roofs| 00:00 | Footprint roofs discussed in our
previous movie are probably the easiest way to
| | 00:04 | create a roof and they certainly are
the easiest way to get the most common
| | 00:08 | forms, like hips and gables.
| | 00:09 | However, there's lots of other shapes
of roofs that we can create and in some
| | 00:13 | cases you'll want to create a roof that's
not easily achieved with a footprint roof.
| | 00:17 | So in this movie I'd like to look at
the extrusion roof. This is a good choice
| | 00:21 | for roofs that are barrel vaults or that
are curving in one direction, and so on.
| | 00:25 | So in this case I'm going to create an
awning that's going to go on the front of
| | 00:30 | this small building here.
| | 00:31 | Now it's actually on the other side of
the building over here, and I'm going to
| | 00:36 | use my view cube over here in the
corner to change my orientation.
| | 00:39 | So the way the view cube works is you
just highlight the area of the cube that
| | 00:43 | you want to navigate to, and in this
case I can use the little corner right here,
| | 00:46 | and if I click that, it'll spin the
view around and show me that I have this
| | 00:49 | little patio on the backside.
| | 00:51 | Let me zoom in a little bit and let's
say that we wanted to put some sort of a
| | 00:55 | curving awning up above this little patio area.
| | 00:59 | Now I could do that right here in 3D
but it actually might even be easier to do
| | 01:03 | that in an elevation view.
| | 01:05 | So this is the West elevation, and this
way I'm looking right at the wall that I
| | 01:10 | want to work on, and to do an
extrusion roof, the first step is we have to
| | 01:15 | establish the plane that
we want to do the work on.
| | 01:18 | So here in the Architecture tab, if I
click the dropdown on the Roof button, I
| | 01:23 | have Roof by Extrusion right
here, I'm going to chose that.
| | 01:27 | Now that will pop up this box which
will ask me to set my Current Work Plane.
| | 01:32 | You could do that in a variety of ways.
If you had a named work plane on this
| | 01:36 | list here that you wanted
to use, you could choose it.
| | 01:38 | I don't have anything there.
| | 01:40 | In this case, I'm going to do Pick a
plane, and what that allows me to do is
| | 01:44 | click OK and use the geometry in the
building that's already here as the work plane.
| | 01:50 | So I'm going to select the face of
this wall and say that I want to draw
| | 01:54 | directly on that wall.
| | 01:56 | Now it's still a roof so Revit will
then ask me okay, well that's great, what
| | 02:00 | level do you want to associate this roof to?
| | 02:02 | Well in this case I only have Level 1
and 2 so I'll just put it with Level
| | 02:06 | 2, and I'll click OK.
| | 02:08 | That takes me into Sketch mode, it
grays out the drawing as is normal and at
| | 02:12 | this point I can just sketch the
shape that I want my extrusion to be.
| | 02:16 | This is a little different kind of
sketch because unlike the footprint sketch,
| | 02:20 | we're not making an enclosed shape here.
Instead we're making an open shape, and
| | 02:25 | this shape you're making is the end of the
roof rather than the footprint of the roof.
| | 02:29 | So let me show you and have a little
fun here, I'm going to do the something
| | 02:32 | that's a little curvy.
| | 02:34 | So I'm going to use my Start-End-
Radius Arc, and I'll pick a start point and
| | 02:39 | then I'll go over here to a slight
angle and pick an endpoint, and then I'm
| | 02:44 | setting the radius right, so then I'll
do maybe a radius about that much, maybe
| | 02:49 | keep going over here and snap it tangent.
| | 02:55 | And if you want you can change shapes.
I can even switch to a straight line at
| | 02:59 | some point, and you can make as
whimsical a shape as you want, you don't have to
| | 03:04 | make exactly the shape that I've done here.
| | 03:06 | The key is all you need is one
edge for each segment of the roof.
| | 03:10 | In other words, I don't want to wrap around and
make an enclosed close shape here in this case.
| | 03:15 | Watch what happens when I click Finish.
| | 03:18 | You can see the thickness gets applied
to the roof that comes from the roof type
| | 03:22 | that's being chosen over here, and I'm
using a generic 12 inch roof, so that's
| | 03:26 | where this thickness came from.
It's 12 inches of material.
| | 03:29 | The only thing about an extrusion roof,
it's a little odd, is if I go back to my
| | 03:32 | 3D view here, it always
goes through the building.
| | 03:38 | So Revit, instead of asking us how
deep we want the roof to be when we do an
| | 03:43 | extrusion, it makes a guess and it usually
guesses based on the depth of your building.
| | 03:47 | So what I'm going to do here is simply
select this and then there's a little
| | 03:52 | grip here at the end that I'm going
to pull that one out to about there
| | 03:54 | and then say okay, why don't I make that a
whole number so I'll do about 55 feet there.
| | 03:58 | And I'll do the same thing here just
kind of pull it out here somewhere.
| | 04:02 | And you could see that gives me a
little gap away from the building, which may
| | 04:06 | be my design intent or it may not be, so
in my case, I want that to be flush up
| | 04:11 | against the building. This as a
great job for the Align command.
| | 04:15 | If I go to the Modify tab, click my Align tool.
| | 04:19 | When we've previously looked at the
Align tool we've done it in 2D, but it works
| | 04:22 | just as well here in 3D.
| | 04:24 | I'm going to highlight the face of this
wall as my alignment edge, and then I'm
| | 04:30 | going to highlight the face of my roof,
and Revit will stretch the roof over and
| | 04:36 | attach it to the face of that wall.
| | 04:38 | So an extrusion roof is also a sketch
-based roof, it's just sketched in a
| | 04:44 | vertical plane rather than a horizontal
plane, and all you sketch is the overall
| | 04:49 | profile of the roof and then
Revit will extrude it from there.
| | 04:52 | It's good for barrel vaults or for
undulating forms like this and it's another
| | 04:56 | alternative to creating a roof form.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Attaching walls to roofs| 00:00 | In this movie I'd like to look at
connecting the wall geometry to the roof geometry.
| | 00:05 | The file I have on the
screen is called Attaching Walls.
| | 00:08 | And as you can see, over here on the left, the
walls do not actually meet the roof objects.
| | 00:13 | They all stop here at whatever
height they happen to be assigned to.
| | 00:16 | In this case, they're going up to the level
but they don't go all the way up to the roof.
| | 00:21 | Now compare that to this wall here,
that you can see, it actually goes up and
| | 00:25 | follows the slope of the roof.
| | 00:27 | It's actually really easy to achieve that.
| | 00:29 | All you have to do is select the wall or
walls and use this button right here to
| | 00:35 | attach its top or base to the nearby geometry.
| | 00:39 | Now we're going to do this with a roof
but you can actually do this with floor
| | 00:43 | slabs, or with ceilings, or with
any geometry that runs horizontally.
| | 00:46 | So to make this a little easier, I'm
going to select all four walls.
| | 00:50 | So I'm going to highlight one, press my
Tab key, that'll highlight all four walls.
| | 00:55 | And then remember when you're doing a
chain selection with your Tab key don't
| | 00:58 | forget to click. A lot of times people
will go highlight, Tab, yeah that's what
| | 01:03 | they want and they'll move the mouse away.
| | 01:05 | You got to go to highlight, Tab, click,
and now I've got all four walls selected,
| | 01:09 | and then all I have to do
is click Attach Top/Base.
| | 01:12 | The options bar will say what do you
want to attach, the Top or the Base.
| | 01:17 | Obviously we want to attach the top
edge of the walls, so I'll leave that
| | 01:20 | selected and then you just
click anywhere on the roof.
| | 01:23 | And you will see if I spin this, I'm
holding my Shift key and dragging with the
| | 01:29 | wheel, you will see the walls have
now projected up and attached to the
| | 01:34 | underside of the roof.
| | 01:35 | Now what's really powerful about this
is, this is not a one time edit. If I
| | 01:39 | select this roof, scroll down and it's
currently a 3 and 12 slope. If I change
| | 01:45 | that to something steeper, let's go
with a 5 and 12, click Apply, notice what
| | 01:50 | happens with the walls.
| | 01:52 | Same thing is true with my gable here,
let's make that a 6 and 12, click Apply
| | 01:57 | and you'll see it will project up here.
| | 01:59 | Now it's actually attached here with my
hip roof as well, but to show you that I
| | 02:04 | need to open up the section here,
Section 1, and I'll zoom in over here on the
| | 02:08 | right, and you could see that it's
actually cutting the top edges of the walls
| | 02:13 | to match the underside of that roof.
| | 02:14 | And again if you change the slope,
it would maintain that setting.
| | 02:18 | The last thing I should point out here
is what can be a little confusing about
| | 02:23 | the attach to top and base feature is
this attach feature takes precedence over
| | 02:28 | the level constraint.
| | 02:29 | So if we look at this wall for
example, and we scroll down here on the Top
| | 02:33 | Constraint, you can see that it
goes up to the level called Parapet.
| | 02:37 | That's this level right here.
| | 02:39 | But it clearly goes beyond that, that's
because it's also attached to this roof.
| | 02:44 | Now unfortunately there's no way to see
here on the Properties palette that it's
| | 02:48 | attached to anything.
| | 02:49 | So that's something you just have to
investigate by looking at how it behaves in the model.
| | 02:53 | It's usually pretty obvious when an
object is attached to something, in this
| | 02:57 | case it's pretty obvious
that it's attached to the roof.
| | 02:59 | So when you want your walls to attach
to the underside of your roof structure,
| | 03:03 | all you have to do is select the walls
and use the Attach Top and Base command
| | 03:08 | to attach them to the underside of the roof.
| | 03:10 | I showed it with roofs here, but it
works equally well with floor slabs, and
| | 03:14 | with ceiling slabs, and other
similar horizontal structures.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the shape editing tools to create a flat roof| 00:00 | Roofs come in all sorts of shapes and
varieties, but many buildings have simple flat roofs.
| | 00:05 | So in this movie I'd like to look at
some of the techniques we can use to
| | 00:08 | create a simple flat roof.
| | 00:09 | Now even a flat roof has some sort
of sloping, it's not completely flat.
| | 00:13 | In an early schematic design you can
get away with just doing a flat slab
| | 00:17 | without any slope and it will be
representational enough, but at some point in
| | 00:21 | the design you're probably going to
want to start modeling the actual slope so
| | 00:25 | that you get a more accurate
representation of what's really going to be there.
| | 00:29 | So I'm in a file called Flat Roof and I
want to look specifically at the shape
| | 00:33 | editing tools that are available on
roof slabs that will allow us to sculpt the
| | 00:38 | drainage sloping for a flat roof.
| | 00:40 | There are kind of a lot of pieces
that need to fit together correctly in
| | 00:44 | order for this technique to work, so let's
sort of try and walk through this systematically.
| | 00:48 | If I select this roof right here, okay,
this is just a pretty typical flat
| | 00:55 | roof, it's called Insulation on Metal Deck and
there is no slope applied to it as you can see.
| | 01:00 | Compare that to this one, this one
is just a generic nine inch roof.
| | 01:04 | Now I want you to look right here at the
ribbon in particular when I select these.
| | 01:09 | This one obviously has a slope, and I
click it and I get just this single button
| | 01:13 | right here, Edit Footprint, but if I
click this one, in addition to Edit
| | 01:18 | Footprint I also get this Shape Editing panel.
| | 01:22 | So the first thing that has to be in
order for you to use the shape editing
| | 01:26 | tools is, you have to start
with a completely flat roof.
| | 01:30 | You can't even have one edge slope
defining, so that's the first thing.
| | 01:34 | The second thing is the way that
slope gets applied to a roof using shape
| | 01:39 | editing tools is by points.
| | 01:41 | There is actually three methods that
you can use to add those points, you can
| | 01:45 | add them individually point by point,
you can add lines where you draw a line
| | 01:49 | and then that actually has two points,
or you can actually do Pick Supports.
| | 01:55 | So for example, if I just did Add a Point,
you'll see that that takes me into a
| | 02:00 | kind of Sketch mode.
| | 02:01 | Now I should stress that this isn't
really the same Sketch mode. It does gray
| | 02:05 | out the screen, but it's not really the
same kind of mode that we looked at in
| | 02:09 | some of the previous movies,
so it really is its own thing.
| | 02:13 | But you can see right here that the
plane of the roof highlights in this green
| | 02:17 | dashed line, and I'm just
going to click a point right there.
| | 02:20 | The green stuff is the stuff that
Revit created, and that was created
| | 02:24 | automatically from the shape of the roof.
| | 02:26 | When I add a point you can see
it comes into that bluish color.
| | 02:30 | Now if I use this tool right here,
this is the tool that I need to use to
| | 02:35 | actually change the height of that point,
so if I click on it, I can click this
| | 02:40 | little blue point and it's currently at
zero, zero is measured relative to the
| | 02:44 | plane of the roof, and if I click in
that dimension I can change that to a
| | 02:49 | positive or a negative number to
move it up or down relative to the roof.
| | 02:53 | So I could put in maybe four
inches here and it kind of makes this
| | 02:58 | little pyramidal form.
| | 02:59 | If I add another point maybe over here,
modify that sub element, make that a
| | 03:06 | negative four inches, now you can kind
of see these gray lines are sculpting
| | 03:13 | to follow that shape.
| | 03:14 | So if you have a low point here and a
high point here, that's kind of what
| | 03:18 | the roof has to do.
| | 03:19 | Now I'm doing sort of a little
nonsense example there just to show you what
| | 03:23 | this looks like, but you can see that
when I cancel out of the command I have
| | 03:27 | in fact sculpted the shape of my roof
and it maybe easier to see here if I go
| | 03:32 | to a Section view, and if we look over
here my roof is now kind of twisted and
| | 03:38 | warped a little bit.
| | 03:39 | Now if that's the roof I had in
mind I could call it done, but if we
| | 03:44 | investigate this section a little bit
more closely we see a few things that we
| | 03:49 | might want to address.
| | 03:50 | First of all, I probably don't want
such a weird shaped roof. I'm not really
| | 03:53 | sure if that would be of much benefit,
and secondly, you can see that the entire
| | 03:58 | form of the roof is twisting with those points.
| | 04:03 | So there are two things I want to show you next.
| | 04:05 | I'm going to select this and I'm going
to actually reset the shape right here.
| | 04:09 | Then I'm going to go back to my 3D View
and use my Modify Sub Elements and I'm
| | 04:18 | going to take this point at the
corner, and I'm going to increase that to
| | 04:22 | about six inches, and then this point
at the corner, sometimes you've got to
| | 04:28 | make a little box around it if you can't select
it directly, and make that six inches as well.
| | 04:33 | So that's a really subtle change in
slope that I'm giving it right there.
| | 04:36 | Let me go down here and reopen the
Section and show you what that did.
| | 04:40 | So now you can see that it's a little
more rational, the plane is sloping.
| | 04:44 | Well, a lot of times with this kind of a
flat roof what actually will happen is
| | 04:49 | it's the rigid insulation on top of
the roof that's tapered and the actual
| | 04:53 | structure of the roof remains flat.
| | 04:55 | So if that's the kind of construction
that I want to emulate then I'm going to
| | 04:59 | select this roof object and I need to
do one last thing, and that is edit the
| | 05:05 | type over here on the Properties palette,
| | 05:07 | so I'm going to choose Edit Type. I can
Duplicate this type of I don't want to
| | 05:11 | modify the one that's here, or I can
edit it directly, just remember if you
| | 05:15 | edit it directly it's going to affect every
instance of this type throughout the entire model.
| | 05:20 | So sometimes it's a little safer to
duplicate it first and give it a unique
| | 05:24 | name, I'll just add the word
taper at the end and then Edit it.
| | 05:29 | And what we want is this
variable column over here on the right.
| | 05:33 | You can make one component in
the roof structure variable.
| | 05:36 | So here's my rigid insulation, it's
five inch thick right now, continuous five
| | 05:41 | inch thick, if I check this and click
OK, you're going to see that all of the
| | 05:48 | difference in taper gets applied
directly to the insulation and the remaining
| | 05:54 | part of the roof stays flat.
| | 05:55 | So the under edge is flat and the insulation
now is thin on the right and thick on the left.
| | 06:02 | So if you want to accurately represent
this flat roof with drainage sloping and
| | 06:08 | tapered rigid insulation, it actually
takes this sort of multi-stepped approach.
| | 06:12 | You have to start with a completely
flat roof, then you have to use the shape
| | 06:16 | editing tools to either add points or
lines and manipulate where the heights of
| | 06:21 | those points are, and then finally you
have to take your roof type structure and
| | 06:26 | turn on the Variable feature next to
the rigid insulation component to get the
| | 06:31 | tapered or apply just to the rigid insulation.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with slope arrows| 00:00 | There is one more way that we can
create slope in a roof or even in a floor
| | 00:04 | slab, and that's using
something called a slope arrow.
| | 00:07 | So I am in a file called Slope Arrows,
| | 00:10 | and slope arrows are typically used
when the slope that you want to define
| | 00:13 | doesn't run perpendicular to the edge.
| | 00:16 | So another way to state that is when we
used the Slope Defining check box in the
| | 00:20 | previous movies, it was turning that
edge of the sketch into a piano hinge.
| | 00:26 | So if I select this roof right here and
I edit the footprint, if I select one of
| | 00:31 | these edges and turn on Defines Slope,
it's kind of like this is a hinge.
| | 00:36 | But, I am going to turn that off.
| | 00:38 | What if the slope doesn't
run perpendicular to that edge?
| | 00:42 | It doesn't hinge on that edge,
it runs at another angle.
| | 00:45 | That's really where a slope
arrow can be a very handy thing.
| | 00:48 | With the slope arrow, you just simply
draw this arrow and the arrow has two points;
| | 00:54 | it's got a low point and a high point.
| | 00:56 | And you define what those points are
and then the slope of the roof will
| | 01:01 | follow along that arrow.
| | 01:02 | So all I have to do is click the slope arrow.
| | 01:05 | And in this example, I'm going to go
from corner to corner here, so I am going
| | 01:09 | to go from this corner of the building
over to this corner of the building using
| | 01:13 | my Object Snaps in both directions.
| | 01:15 | Let me zoom in just a
little bit here so we can see.
| | 01:19 | And with this arrow still selected,
if I look over here on the Properties
| | 01:23 | palette, there are two things we can specify;
| | 01:26 | we can either specify the height at
the tail or the slope along the arrow.
| | 01:31 | So if we do the Height features,
you get a low point and a high point.
| | 01:36 | So in the default, it saying it's
0 here, and it's 10 feet here.
| | 01:41 | So it starts at 0, slopes up to 10 feet.
| | 01:44 | If you switch this to Slope,
it turns off that feature.
| | 01:47 | It grays it out and then down here
you would actually put in a slope in the
| | 01:52 | traditional rise overrun format.
| | 01:53 | So the way you define the
slope is really up to you.
| | 01:56 | And this one, I'm going to do the
Height at Tail and I'm going to accept that
| | 02:01 | default 10 feet, apply that,
and I'm going to finish the roof.
| | 02:04 | Let's see what we get.
| | 02:05 | Now if we look at this, it's
best if you orbit in 3D here.
| | 02:10 | So I am going to hold my Shift key
and spin the wheel and you can kind of
| | 02:14 | start to see what it did.
| | 02:16 | So instead of the slope matching just
one of the edges of the roof, it actually
| | 02:20 | runs along the diagonal of the roof.
| | 02:22 | You can kind of see that very
clearly with this view here.
| | 02:24 | So the low point is way down at
this corner, high point up here.
| | 02:29 | All right, let's look at
another quick example over here.
| | 02:32 | I'm going to select
this one, edit the footprint.
| | 02:36 | I'm going to give myself a guideline here.
| | 02:38 | Sometimes, it's easier to do it that way.
| | 02:40 | I want to use the midpoint right here,
so you just have to make sure you erase
| | 02:44 | that guideline when you're done.
| | 02:46 | Let me draw a slope arrow, and this
slope arrow, I only want to go half way.
| | 02:50 | So I am going to snap to that midpoint,
and I'm going to change the height at
| | 02:55 | the arrowhead to 5 feet.
| | 02:58 | And then I'm going to keep that thing
selected, go to Mirror, and I am going
| | 03:02 | to mirror around this guideline that
I drew, and then of course, I need to
| | 03:06 | delete the guideline.
| | 03:07 | If I don't delete the guideline and
I try and finish, Revit will complain
| | 03:11 | because I haven't got a valid sketch right now.
| | 03:13 | So I have to click Continue and delete
the offending line, and now I should be
| | 03:17 | able to finish and watch
what kind of roof I get here.
| | 03:20 | Now your contractor is going to love
you if you do this roof because it's going
| | 03:24 | to be really difficult to frame.
| | 03:26 | But you know, it's not that unusual,
so you could maybe give that one a try.
| | 03:30 | And really the point is, is with a
combination of slope arrows and slope
| | 03:34 | defining edges, you can get
all sorts of interesting shapes.
| | 03:36 | In fact, that's exactly what I have right here.
| | 03:39 | Now what I am going to do to show you
this one is I am going to take this wall,
| | 03:42 | go down to my little sunglasses
here, my temporary Hide/Isolate.
| | 03:46 | We looked at this in a previous movie,
and I am going to hide that element.
| | 03:49 | Now that gives me the Temporary Hide
mode and it's just telling me, just get it
| | 03:52 | out of my way, it's temporarily hidden.
| | 03:54 | Let me orbit the 3D view just a
little bit here, and show you how these
| | 04:01 | So I am going to select this roof, edit
the footprint, and you can see that it's
| | 04:06 | a combination of slope defining edges.
| | 04:09 | This little short segment right here,
Defines Slope, and then these overlapping
| | 04:14 | slope arrows where the low point here is at 0
and the high point here is just at 6 inches.
| | 04:21 | So it's a very shallow slope.
| | 04:22 | Now if I select the slope arrow and I
kind of delete it, you'll see that there
| | 04:27 | actually is a sketch line underneath.
| | 04:29 | So let me undo that.
| | 04:31 | Now the important thing is that sketch
line underneath needs to have the Defines
| | 04:35 | Slope feature turned off.
| | 04:37 | You can't put a slope arrow and a
slope defining edge in the same spot.
| | 04:42 | Revit will argue with
you or complain about that.
| | 04:44 | Now how did I create this?
| | 04:46 | It was pretty simple.
| | 04:47 | I'll just do it over here on the other side.
| | 04:50 | I used my Split tool, and I split
that wall into a couple of pieces.
| | 04:54 | Then, I selected this line and I turned
off Defines Slope, so that gave me the
| | 04:58 | flat portion right there.
| | 04:59 | crickets were formed.
| | 05:00 | And then I drew a slope arrow and it
went from the endpoint to the midpoint.
| | 05:07 | So right there, and I defined how high
I wanted that, 6 inches, and then I can
| | 05:13 | either mirror it or just draw another one, and
I'll just draw the other one from here to here.
| | 05:19 | And again, make sure it goes to 6
inches like so, and let's finish the roof
| | 05:25 | and you could see that I have now
just defined another little cricket over
| | 05:29 | here on the other side.
| | 05:30 | So slope arrows are a way for you to
define slopes in your roofs that would be
| | 05:35 | difficult or impossible to
achieve with any of the other methods.
| | 05:39 | It would theoretically be possible to
use the shape editing tools that we looked
| | 05:43 | at in the last movie to
also model these same crickets.
| | 05:46 | So I encourage you to try both
techniques and see which one you like better.
| | 05:50 | But, slope arrows are a really great way
to do unusual shapes like the ones that
| | 05:54 | I had over here, and there really
wouldn't be too many other ways to define a
| | 05:58 | roof like that without a slope arrow.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding openings| 00:00 | Once you have the basic geometry like
walls, floors, and roofs in place in
| | 00:03 | your model, you'll begin the steady process
of refining the model as the design progresses.
| | 00:08 | In many cases, you will find the need to
cut holes in these elements like simple
| | 00:12 | passageways through walls, shafts for
floors, elevators and equipment in floors
| | 00:15 | and skylights and dormers in roofs.
| | 00:17 | In some cases, you'll find it easiest
to edit the sketch of the element in
| | 00:20 | question to represent such penetration.
| | 00:23 | This approach would work well for
floors which represent double volume
| | 00:26 | spaces for example.
| | 00:28 | In other cases, you might use an
opening object to actually cut through
| | 00:32 | the solid geometry.
| | 00:33 | So in this movie, we're going to
explore a few examples of opening objects, and
| | 00:37 | I'm going to start with a shaft
opening, and the file I have opened here on
| | 00:40 | screen is called Shaft.
| | 00:42 | Now the opening objects
are on the Architecture tab.
| | 00:46 | You can find them here on the Opening panel.
| | 00:48 | We're not going to do all five opening types,
but we are going to look at a couple of these.
| | 00:53 | And again, I'm going to
start with the shaft opening.
| | 00:54 | Now let me set the stage here first.
| | 00:57 | I'm in a view called Section 2 here
and this section is cutting through the
| | 01:03 | elevator shaft of my building.
| | 01:05 | Let's just get a closer look here.
| | 01:06 | Let me zoom in a little bit on
a couple of these floors here.
| | 01:11 | What you'll see is the floor slab here
goes all the way through on each level.
| | 01:18 | Clearly, that would make it a
little difficult for our elevator cab to
| | 01:20 | travel through there.
| | 01:22 | Our two options for dealing with that would
be to select the floor, go to Edit Boundary.
| | 01:29 | Because I'm not in a Floor Plan view,
Revit would alert me of that fact, and ask
| | 01:34 | me for a floor plan that I
wanted to open up like Level 2.
| | 01:38 | And then, in that floor plan, I would
have to draw the shape of the hole that
| | 01:44 | I wanted to cut through that space,
and I could do that with a simple
| | 01:47 | rectangle for example.
| | 01:52 | I'll just answer No for that question.
| | 01:54 | When I finish that and I go back to
the section, that would in fact cut the
| | 02:00 | hole in there, but the trouble is that only
worked for the one floor that I had selected.
| | 02:05 | So what I'm going to do here is reverse
all of that with my Undo command and I'm
| | 02:11 | going to instead use a shaft opening.
| | 02:13 | The advantage that the shaft opening
has is it's a separate sketch-based object
| | 02:17 | that we draw it once and then we
adjust the height of it, and it will cut
| | 02:22 | through every object in its path.
| | 02:23 | So let's go to the First Floor Plan
here to get started, Level 1, and I'm going
| | 02:32 | to zoom in on the elevator area.
| | 02:36 | And I want to create the shaft in that
area right there, so I'll click Shaft.
| | 02:40 | That takes me to Sketch mode, we've
talked about Sketch mode quite a bit already.
| | 02:44 | I can really draw this thing using any
of the methods, I could use Pick Walls or
| | 02:48 | just draw a rectangle.
| | 02:50 | In this case, I'm going to just draw a
simple rectangle and I'm going to start
| | 02:54 | right here at the intersection of
those two walls, and go over here to the
| | 03:00 | intersection of these two walls.
| | 03:02 | Now with these lock icons, I can even
lock this sketch, and the advantage of
| | 03:07 | that will be if any of those walls
move, this sketch will actually adjust.
| | 03:11 | The potential disadvantage of doing
that is if one of those walls moves in such
| | 03:15 | a way that the sketch can't stay
attached, it might generate an error message.
| | 03:19 | So just be careful about locking your sketches,
but in this case, I'll go ahead and do it.
| | 03:24 | I'm going to click Finish here.
| | 03:26 | And to see the result of that, I need to go back
to the Section view, I'll go to Section 2 here.
| | 03:33 | And interestingly enough, the shaft
actually ended up sort of in the middle
| | 03:38 | of the space there.
| | 03:39 | Either using the settings here on the
Properties palette, the level constraints
| | 03:44 | and heights or these little grips, I
can make adjustments to that height.
| | 03:48 | So what I'm going to do is make
the Base Constraint start at Level 1.
| | 03:52 | Let's apply that and see what that
does, you see how that will pull it down
| | 03:56 | there, and then the top
constraint here is already up to Level 3.
| | 04:00 | That seems to do the trick.
| | 04:02 | If I deselect the shaft, you can see the result.
| | 04:05 | We now have a nice clean space through
here, the walls pass through cleanly, and
| | 04:09 | the elevator can pass through that shaft there.
| | 04:12 | So the shaft opening is void opening and
it cuts through everything in its path.
| | 04:18 | I'd like to look at another example.
| | 04:20 | I'd like to look at the dormer example.
| | 04:22 | It is a similar kind of thing.
| | 04:24 | So I've got another file open
here in the background called Dormer.
| | 04:28 | It's just a really simple little building here.
| | 04:31 | I've got a hip roof, and then I've got
a small little gable roof here, and then
| | 04:36 | these three little walls right here
which make up the dormer assembly.
| | 04:40 | So the first step of creating a dormer
is to just build the actual geometry that
| | 04:44 | will represent the dormer.
| | 04:46 | What I want to do now is actually create a hole.
| | 04:49 | I'm going to select all of this
stuff and temporarily hide it with my
| | 04:53 | sunglass icon down here.
| | 04:54 | And you can see that there's
no hole in the roof beyond.
| | 04:59 | So let me reset the Temporary Hide/
Isolate and so that's going to be what this
| | 05:04 | dormer opening tool is going to do for me.
| | 05:06 | It is going to allow me to
build that hole in the other roof.
| | 05:10 | Now the first step is, this
roof is not touching the back roof.
| | 05:14 | So I want to join these two together.
| | 05:16 | There's a tool for that.
| | 05:17 | I'll go to the Modify Tab, and I
click on the Join/Unjoin Roof tool.
| | 05:23 | It's prompting me to select
an edge at the end of the roof.
| | 05:27 | I can pick either one of these, and then
the plane I want to attach it to, and it
| | 05:32 | will just extend that roof back and attach it.
| | 05:34 | Then I go to the Architecture Tab
and I can create my dormer opening.
| | 05:38 | So I'm going to click the tool and the
first question that it's asking me is
| | 05:42 | to select the roof that's going to be cut by
this opening, and it's going to be this roof.
| | 05:46 | Now that will take me into a kind of
Sketch mode, and this is similar to other
| | 05:50 | objects we've seen that it
has this Pick option right here.
| | 05:53 | I can pick the edges of roofs and walls.
| | 05:57 | So if I pick this roof, it
draws that little V-shape.
| | 06:00 | And if I pick these walls, you can
see that it will create those little
| | 06:05 | sketch shapes over here.
| | 06:06 | Now if I zoom in slightly, this sketch line
went to the inside face of the other wall there.
| | 06:14 | So I'm going to click my Modify tool
to cancel out of that mode, select this,
| | 06:18 | and I'm just going to flip it to the
other side, and then I'll use my Trim
| | 06:21 | command to trim up these corners.
| | 06:23 | So like other sketches, this
has to be an enclosed shape.
| | 06:27 | When I click Finish,
I'll get this error message.
| | 06:30 | Now this can be a little scary looking
message here, everything turned orange on
| | 06:33 | screen, and it says it can't continue.
| | 06:35 | But, what it's actually talking about is
not really the dormer at all, what it's
| | 06:39 | talking about is the wall out here,
the exterior wall that's attached to the
| | 06:43 | underside of the roof.
| | 06:45 | The remedy is listed right here.
| | 06:47 | I can unjoin the elements.
| | 06:48 | I'm going to go ahead and do that.
| | 06:50 | Now you could see the dormer is
nice and clean, it's all done.
| | 06:54 | If I select these elements here with
the window selection like we did a few
| | 06:59 | moments ago, and I do Hide Element, you
can see we've got our nice little hole
| | 07:03 | cut through the roof there. Let me reset that.
| | 07:06 | Where the trouble is, if I open up a
section that cuts through this dormer, I'm
| | 07:12 | going to open up Section 2, you
could see the dormer condition over here.
| | 07:16 | Let's zoom in on it.
| | 07:18 | This was really where the problem was.
| | 07:20 | So the wall up here is kind of in the
same general location as this wall over here.
| | 07:25 | So you could either join those walls
together or what I'm going to actually do
| | 07:29 | in here is I'm going to tab into this
wall and select it, and I'm just going to
| | 07:35 | use the temporary dimension
here to make that about 3 foot 9.
| | 07:38 | That will pull that wall back
slightly and then I can select this wall
| | 07:43 | and reattach it to the underside of the roof,
and it kind of takes care of the problem.
| | 07:47 | If you want to, you could adjust
the overhang of the roof, and so on.
| | 07:50 | So there's a couple of quick examples
of a few of the opening objects we have;
| | 07:55 | a shaft opening will cut through any
horizontal slab or roof that it finds in it path.
| | 08:01 | You can adjust the heights in
order to have its effect be more broad.
| | 08:04 | A dormer opening is a very specific
kind of opening specifically for cutting
| | 08:08 | dormers into roof slabs and I
encourage you to explore some of these other
| | 08:13 | openings on your own.
| | 08:14 | We've got simple vertical openings and wall
openings, they all kind of work the same way.
| | 08:18 | They're a void object that intersects
with the solid object and cuts the form away.
| | 08:23 | But, the really nice thing about these
void objects is because they're separate
| | 08:27 | objects, you can modify them later,
and they will reapply themselves
| | 08:31 | automatically to the surrounding geometry.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with stairs| 00:00 | In this movie we're going to look at stairs.
| | 00:02 | Stairs come in two varieties here in 2013,
we have a component-based stair which
| | 00:07 | is brand-new and we have the
traditional sketch-based stair.
| | 00:12 | The component-based stair can be
considered a little bit more advanced and it's
| | 00:15 | out of the scope of what we'll be
covering here in the Revit Essentials course.
| | 00:19 | So in this movie, I'm going to focus
on the traditional sketch-based stair.
| | 00:23 | I'm in a file here called Sketch
Stairs, and I'm in the Level 2 Floor Plan.
| | 00:28 | And I'm going to work down in the
lobby in the lower portion of the plan, so
| | 00:32 | I'm going to zoom in right here on this area of
the plan right here, and it's labeled Stair A.
| | 00:38 | Now if we go to the Architecture Tab,
we'll find the Stair tool, and if you
| | 00:42 | click the little dropdown, you can
see the two types that I just mentioned,
| | 00:45 | Stair by Component and Stair by Sketch.
| | 00:47 | So in this case, we're going to choose
our Stair by Sketch, and that will take me
| | 00:52 | into our traditional Sketch mode.
| | 00:53 | There's a few things we want to do before
we start clicking points in the stair sketch.
| | 00:59 | The first thing is there are a
couple of Draw modes like we've had in
| | 01:02 | other Sketch modes;
| | 01:03 | we've got Run, Boundary, and Riser.
| | 01:04 | Now Run is by far the easiest mode
because it will actually create all the
| | 01:08 | pieces that are required in the
sketch with just a few clicks.
| | 01:11 | So you typically want to try
and use Run wherever you can.
| | 01:14 | If you look at the tooltip that's
appeared on my screen there, you can see that
| | 01:18 | the sketch will come in three colors.
| | 01:20 | You'll have a green color which
represents the boundary lines, the outline of
| | 01:24 | the stair, and you are going to
have an outline on either side.
| | 01:26 | You will have a blue line which runs
down the middle of the stair, and that just
| | 01:28 | represents the path of the stair, and
then finally, you'll have some black lines
| | 01:32 | which represent the Riser lines.
| | 01:34 | So I want to make sure Run is chosen.
| | 01:37 | Next, I want to look over here on my
Properties palette and verify that the
| | 01:42 | settings here are correct and what I expect.
| | 01:44 | So I'm going to start at Level 2
because I'm in the Level 2 Floor Plan, and I
| | 01:47 | want the stair to go up to Level 3.
| | 01:49 | So those two settings are fine.
| | 01:51 | That will determine for me how
many risers Revit needs to create.
| | 01:57 | So because I'm going up to those two
floors, it does the math, it based that math
| | 02:01 | on the maximum riser height, and you
can see that right here the Actual Riser
| | 02:07 | Height is just shy of 7 inches.
| | 02:09 | Well, if we were to click Edit Type,
you can see here that the type for the
| | 02:14 | stair is 7 inch max, 11 inch tread.
| | 02:16 | If we were to click Edit Type, and
scroll down, what you would see here is that
| | 02:22 | under Risers, the Maximum
Riser Height is 7 inches.
| | 02:25 | So if I cancel out of here, it's just
simply doing the math, and trying to get
| | 02:29 | me as close to 7 inches as it can and it
came up with a number of risers of the 18.
| | 02:34 | Now you can actually modify that number
if you needed to, but you can't modify
| | 02:38 | to a point that makes the
riser taller than 7 inches.
| | 02:41 | If you do, Revit will generate an error message.
| | 02:44 | Now we have a Width parameter right here as
well, and I'm going to change that to 4 feet.
| | 02:49 | You can change it later but it's
usually easier if you remember to do it first
| | 02:53 | because then the size of the stair is a
little bit easier to control. So I've got that.
| | 02:58 | Then, I don't try and get my stair
in exactly the right spot first try.
| | 03:02 | What I usually do is I click nearby,
and just kind of build it nearby and then
| | 03:07 | I'll move it into place.
| | 03:08 | I find that a little bit easier.
| | 03:10 | Now I'm going to start moving my
mouse down and I want you to look very
| | 03:15 | carefully at the little message
that appears directly below my cursor.
| | 03:20 | So you can see that the message
currently says 9 Risers Created, 9 Remaining.
| | 03:25 | You want to pay attention to that
message because that's letting you know
| | 03:28 | basically when you need to click.
| | 03:30 | So what I'm going to do right now is
click my mouse and that creates the
| | 03:34 | first run of stairs.
| | 03:37 | Now you can create as many
runs in your stair as you need.
| | 03:41 | So each time you create a run, what
will happen is, when you create the
| | 03:44 | next run, Revit will create a landing
automatically for you to join the two runs together.
| | 03:50 | So when you're using this tool, you're just
drawing the run, you do not draw the landings;
| | 03:56 | Revit takes care of the landing.
| | 03:57 | So let me show you.
| | 03:58 | I'm going to move my mouse over here,
and keep it lined up with that one, click,
| | 04:03 | pull it straight up until it says 0
remaining, and then I'll click again.
| | 04:10 | You'll see here how it
created the landing sketch for me.
| | 04:14 | So you just draw the runs, you do
that with a few clicks, and Revit sort of
| | 04:18 | fills in the details.
| | 04:19 | Now once we have that, we can take this
entire sketch, and I'm just going to put
| | 04:24 | a window around the whole thing.
| | 04:26 | We can use our standard modification
tools like the Move tool, and I'm going to
| | 04:30 | move from this endpoint, and I'm going
to snap it right to that endpoint and
| | 04:34 | that gets it positioned at
the correct starting point.
| | 04:38 | Next, what I'm going to do is select
only this half of the stair because you
| | 04:44 | see this nice little gap over here to the wall,
I want to match that same amount over here.
| | 04:50 | Now I could do another move command,
but I'd have to know how far to move it,
| | 04:54 | and since I eyeballed my clicks,
I don't really know what that is.
| | 04:58 | But, if you recall in a previous movie,
we talked about this really handy tool
| | 05:01 | right over here called Activate Dimensions.
| | 05:03 | So make sure that you have just the
right-hand side of the stair selected, you
| | 05:07 | click on Activate Dimensions.
| | 05:09 | That will give you a series of
temporary dimensions and very useful locations
| | 05:13 | like this one right here, and I can
simply type in 4 inches there, and that
| | 05:19 | will move just that run of the stair over
so that it's 4 inches off of the inside wall.
| | 05:25 | If you want to make any additional
modifications like selecting this sketch line
| | 05:29 | for example, and maybe dragging this
witness line grip to here, and I could say
| | 05:35 | instead of a 4 foot landing, I
want to have a 5 foot landing.
| | 05:38 | It's really up to you.
| | 05:39 | So the last thing I want to do before I
finish this sketch is over here on the
| | 05:44 | ribbon, I want to click this Railing button.
| | 05:47 | And what this does is Revit creates railings
automatically on the stair for me on both sides.
| | 05:53 | Now if I want to, I can actually
change what railing it's going to use.
| | 05:58 | So if I wanted a particular type of
guardrail or a handrail or something like that.
| | 06:02 | So in this case, I'm going to just
choose a guardrail pipe, and I'm going to
| | 06:07 | assign it to the stringers,
and then I'm going to click OK.
| | 06:10 | And then finally, I come over here
and I click Finish Edit mode and that
| | 06:15 | will complete the stair.
| | 06:17 | If you look over here, we're seeing
just a portion of the stair going up, and
| | 06:22 | really the best way to see the stair
is to come down to the sections, open up
| | 06:27 | Section 1, zoom in, and you can see our
stair going up between levels 2 and 3.
| | 06:36 | Now if we look at Level 1, we
obviously need a stair down there.
| | 06:40 | So I'm going to scroll over here to my
Level 1 floor plan, and I have a slightly
| | 06:45 | larger lobby in this location.
| | 06:48 | So I might be able to get away with
just a straight run stair over here.
| | 06:52 | That's a lot simpler to create than a
switchback stair because it's really just two clicks.
| | 06:56 | Now I'm going to do this one also with
the Stair by Sketch, but I just want to
| | 07:01 | point out that you could easily do
this with Stair by Component as well.
| | 07:05 | Let's do Stair by Sketch.
| | 07:06 | I want to verify all my settings again.
| | 07:08 | You can see it remembered all the same settings.
| | 07:10 | I'll start right about here, and
I'll pull it all the way to the end.
| | 07:14 | So the only thing we do differently
this time is we use up all of the risers in
| | 07:19 | a single sketch, select everything,
activate the dimensions, make that 4 inches,
| | 07:27 | deselect, check my railing, it's still
Guardrail Pipe, and I'll click Finish.
| | 07:34 | Let's reopen our section,
and there's our result.
| | 07:40 | You can see that I'm a little off right
there, so I could just move that stair
| | 07:45 | to make it match up, but those are fine-tuning
results that you can fiddle with on your own.
| | 07:51 | So sketch-based stairs use the same
sketch-based methodology that we've looked
| | 07:55 | at in other movies like
floors and roofs, and so on.
| | 07:58 | You sketch the overall runs of the
stairs, and then from that sketch, Revit
| | 08:01 | creates the three-dimensional stair.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding railings to stairs| 00:00 | Railings usually are created
automatically when you create stairs, so that's
| | 00:04 | usually the most common way to work with them,
but you can also create railings yourself.
| | 00:09 | So I'm here in a file called Railings,
and I'm going to zoom in on this area of
| | 00:15 | the plan right here, and I have this
Open to Below space, and the stair comes up
| | 00:20 | to this little balcony here and walks around.
| | 00:23 | So obviously we would need some sort of a
guardrail over in this general location.
| | 00:27 | It's pretty easy to do.
| | 00:29 | It's just a simple sketch-based operation.
| | 00:32 | What we'll do is we'll go to the
Architecture Tab, and we'll click on the Railing tool.
| | 00:37 | Now all you have to do is click the
default tool, but if you open up the
| | 00:41 | dropdown, it's the Sketch Path that we're
going to use here for our guardrail.
| | 00:45 | And this takes me to Sketch mode and we can
draw railings in really any shape we want.
| | 00:50 | The one thing that's a little
different about this sketch than some of the
| | 00:53 | others that we've seen is you can
either draw an open or a closed path here.
| | 00:58 | In this case, we want an open path
because we just need to do an L-shaped
| | 01:01 | railing along this balcony.
| | 01:04 | But if you were doing an enclosed
space, you can do the railing all the
| | 01:07 | way around as well.
| | 01:09 | Now we could draw with any of these
other tools, but what I want to show you
| | 01:13 | here is the Pick Lines option because this
will make it a lot easier to create our sketch.
| | 01:18 | So I'm going to choose Pick Lines, and
I can pick right on the edges of this
| | 01:23 | balcony, but I'm going to
actually do it with a slight offset.
| | 01:27 | So I'm going to offset that about 2
inches away, and I'll just click somewhere
| | 01:32 | here in the plan view to make it the active
view and then go ahead and zoom in a little closer.
| | 01:38 | Watch what happens when I highlight this edge.
| | 01:40 | You see how I can either offset
the railing this way or this way.
| | 01:45 | So I'm going to offset it this way,
and then do it again right here.
| | 01:49 | Revit will automatically
clean up that intersection.
| | 01:53 | Let's go to the previous zoom
level, and zoom in down here.
| | 01:58 | I might need to fix this a little.
| | 02:00 | You notice that the line went a little too long.
| | 02:03 | So I click my Modify tool to cancel
out of there, select this line, and then
| | 02:07 | just simply drag this grip back.
| | 02:09 | I could snap it right to the wall if I
want, or I can back it up off of there a
| | 02:14 | little bit, and I can even use the
temporary dimension to say how much I want
| | 02:19 | that distance to be.
| | 02:21 | That's really all there is to it for the sketch.
| | 02:23 | Notice that the sketch can
be an open shape like I said.
| | 02:26 | The only other thing you want to pay
attention to is what kind of railing are you creating.
| | 02:31 | There are a few different types here
in the file that are loaded already.
| | 02:34 | So I'm going to use this
Guardrail Pipe right there.
| | 02:38 | I'll click the Finish button.
| | 02:39 | If we zoom in a little, we'll
see the railing right there.
| | 02:43 | There is a variety of ways we can look at this.
| | 02:45 | We could cut a section or do an
interior elevation, but actually, I'm going to
| | 02:50 | come up here to our 3D View button, and
click the dropdown right next to it, and
| | 02:54 | we can make a Camera View,
this is just a perspective view.
| | 02:58 | You click where you want to stand and
then you drag towards where you want to look.
| | 03:03 | So I kind of look right about there
and click again, and Revit will create a
| | 03:09 | camera that looks in at that
railing that we just created.
| | 03:13 | So you can see it right there.
| | 03:14 | Looks pretty good, sitting up
here on top of the floor slab.
| | 03:18 | So railings get created automatically
when you draw a stair, and that's probably
| | 03:22 | the most common way that
you'll get a railing in your models.
| | 03:25 | But you can always draw railings
for things like guardrails, or other
| | 03:28 | stand-alone railings by just
simply sketching out their path.
| | 03:32 | So you just sketch the path in a plan
view, it can be an open shape or a close
| | 03:37 | shape, then you apply a railing style to it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with ceilings| 00:00 | Ceiling elements are similar to floors.
They are horizontal planes set at a
| | 00:04 | certain height above the finished
floor and can include layers of material
| | 00:07 | in the construction.
| | 00:09 | You can choose from common types
like 2x4 grid, or drywall ceiling, or
| | 00:12 | even create your own.
| | 00:14 | The fastest way to create a ceiling is
to use the Auto Ceiling option. This tool
| | 00:18 | automatically creates a ceiling
from the walls that enclose the space.
| | 00:21 | In cases where you don't have walls or
where the ceiling shape is irregular, you
| | 00:25 | can sketch the ceiling using many
of the familiar sketch-based tools.
| | 00:28 | So I'm in a file here called Ceilings
and I'm in the Level 1 Floor Plan view.
| | 00:33 | And the first thing I want to talk about
is a common mistake that we've all made
| | 00:38 | when we first used ceilings, and that is,
to go to the Architecture tab and go
| | 00:42 | right to the Ceiling tool, I've got my
Automatic Ceiling and click a point and
| | 00:47 | an error will occur, and that is
because I'm still in a floor plan.
| | 00:52 | Ceilings don't display in a floor plan
view, naturally, so I'm going to escape
| | 00:57 | out of the command, couple of times, and I'm
going to undo the placement of that last ceiling.
| | 01:03 | And what I want to do first then is
scroll down over here and we've actually
| | 01:07 | got some ceiling plans here in the file, so I'm
going to open up the Level 1 Ceiling Plan view.
| | 01:12 | And you'll see it'll look pretty
similar to the floor plan but the cut plane in
| | 01:17 | this case is actually cut above the
doors and so we are looking a little higher
| | 01:20 | up, but it's still a reflected ceiling view.
| | 01:23 | So let's go to the Architecture tab,
click the Ceiling button, and this
| | 01:27 | time instead of just starting to click, let's
go ahead and look at some of the settings.
| | 01:31 | If I open up the Type Selector here on
the Properties palette, there is a few
| | 01:35 | different kinds of ceilings we can choose from.
| | 01:37 | And I'd like to start with this one here
the 2x4 Acoustical Tile Ceiling, so I'm
| | 01:42 | going to select that.
| | 01:43 | Now the Height Offset from level
defaults to 8 feet and I'm going to start in
| | 01:48 | the offices and I think that's a
pretty good height for offices.
| | 01:50 | And then finally I want to make sure
on the ribbon here that I've got the
| | 01:53 | Automatic Ceiling button selected, it's
already selected by default but you just
| | 01:57 | want to verify that.
| | 01:59 | So what you can see is that any
enclosed space will highlight with this red
| | 02:03 | outline, and all you have to do is
click and it will create the ceiling
| | 02:07 | plane within that space.
| | 02:09 | It's a very easy matter of simply
clicking in each of the office spaces, like so.
| | 02:16 | Now I can continue into some of the
other spaces but perhaps I want to use
| | 02:20 | different settings, so for example,
maybe I want to use a drywall ceiling in
| | 02:23 | my conference room, and perhaps I
want the height of that ceiling to be a
| | 02:27 | little bit taller than the
conference room space, so I'm going to set the
| | 02:31 | height to 9 feet, I'm going to the
drywall ceiling, and then I'm going to
| | 02:35 | pick in that space.
| | 02:36 | And maybe I want to go back down to the
8 foot level, but add a drywall ceiling
| | 02:41 | here in the toilet rooms.
| | 02:42 | And then possibly switch back to a 2x2
ceiling and put a 2x2 ceiling here in
| | 02:49 | the break room.
| | 02:51 | Those are the three kinds of ceiling
that are built in automatically, the 2x4,
| | 02:56 | 2x2 in the drywall ceiling.
| | 02:58 | Now out in this area here if I were
to just highlight, you see it actually
| | 03:03 | highlights the entire
lobby and the quarter spaces.
| | 03:06 | And if you recall the lobby in this
particular project is actually a double
| | 03:10 | volume space, so I don't really
want the ceiling plane right there.
| | 03:13 | I really only want the ceiling in
this area here. I can't really use the
| | 03:18 | automatic ceiling for this next one.
| | 03:21 | So what I'm going to do instead is
switch to the Sketch Ceiling mode, so I just
| | 03:25 | simply click that button, and that just
takes me into Sketch mode and now I can
| | 03:30 | create ceilings using all
of the familiar sketch tools.
| | 03:33 | So I'm going to start with my Pick Walls,
and I'll pick this wall here and this
| | 03:38 | one here, and this one here, and this one here.
| | 03:43 | Then we have another really handy
tool here which is called Pick Lines, and
| | 03:47 | I'm going to click that and I'm going to
pick this edge here of the balcony up above.
| | 03:52 | And then if I zoom in over in this area,
I need to make a line that goes across
| | 03:59 | here, and I'm just going to draw
that with a simple Line tool, like so.
| | 04:05 | Now as you can see, I've got some
cleanup to do, so while I'm zoomed in here,
| | 04:09 | I'll use my trim and extend to a corner,
and I'll cleanup that corner and that
| | 04:14 | corner, remember to pick the part you
want to keep, I'm using previous, trim
| | 04:18 | that one, and that one,
this one, and finally this one.
| | 04:24 | Cancel out of that, so there is the shape.
| | 04:27 | You need to make sure that it's enclosed.
| | 04:30 | Notice that I didn't go around the
columns. It's not really necessary that you
| | 04:33 | make your ceiling go around the columns.
You can if you want to, and as long as
| | 04:37 | those are enclosed shapes,
it will work just fine.
| | 04:40 | But in this case I'm going to let it
just pass right through the columns, I'm
| | 04:44 | not really concerned about
that, and I'll click Finish.
| | 04:46 | And when I deselect, you'll see that it
added a new ceiling plane in that location.
| | 04:51 | The next thing I want to show you is,
how you can actually start to manipulate
| | 04:55 | the ceilings a little bit.
| | 04:57 | For example, if we look over here at
these two offices, we'll notice that the
| | 05:01 | orientation of the grid match
the orientation of the office.
| | 05:04 | So that's just a default behavior but
we actually do have control over that.
| | 05:09 | You can select any one of these
gridlines, notice they all highlight
| | 05:12 | independently, what you're actually
seeing there is a surface pattern that's
| | 05:17 | part of the material that's applied to
that ceiling but you can actually select
| | 05:22 | the individual lines of that surface
pattern and you can move and rotate them.
| | 05:28 | Let me zoom in a little bit over here
and if I select this line, I can move it.
| | 05:34 | And let's say I move it about 6 inches,
notice that the entire grid pattern
| | 05:38 | moves along with it.
| | 05:39 | So even though I only selected one line,
it actually moves the entire pattern.
| | 05:43 | If I choose Rotate, I can reset my
center point maybe to right there, use this
| | 05:49 | is a start angle, and then rotate down
90 degrees, and so now I've rotated the
| | 05:56 | grid pattern in the other direction.
| | 05:58 | So very easy to modify whatever
the default is that it gives you.
| | 06:02 | Let's zoom back out.
| | 06:04 | In terms of making decisions like
that it's probably easier to make those
| | 06:07 | decisions once you have some items on
your ceiling plane, so light fixtures are
| | 06:12 | the most obvious object
that we want to apply there.
| | 06:15 | Once we have some light fixtures that
will tell us whether or not we need to
| | 06:19 | start shifting the grids or not.
| | 06:21 | To add light fixtures in a ceiling plan,
it's just simply the component tool
| | 06:25 | which we've already looked at
in some of the previous movies.
| | 06:28 | So I'm going to open up the list here and
see what I have loaded in the project already.
| | 06:33 | If we scroll down, we can see that
there is a Troffer Light Lens, light
| | 06:38 | fixture here, we've got several
different sizes, and I'm going to choose a 2x4
| | 06:42 | (2 Lamp) fixture right here, 120 Volts.
| | 06:47 | Notice that I get the little circle
with a line through it, this is similar
| | 06:51 | to what we saw with doors and windows,
that's because a light fixture is a
| | 06:55 | ceiling-hosted fixture and it's actually
telling me to click on a ceiling to place an instance.
| | 06:59 | And so if move into the space you
can see the light fixture appear.
| | 07:03 | So I'm just going to zoom in
a little bit in this office.
| | 07:07 | What I usually do is I just kind of
get it close by, then I cancel out.
| | 07:11 | And to get it precisely placed, I usually
go to the Modify tab and use my Align tool;
| | 07:17 | remember, the shortcut for Align is AL.
| | 07:20 | So I'm going to use the edge of the
grid and align the light to that, and the
| | 07:26 | grid line again, and align the light to
that, and that brings the light fixture
| | 07:30 | up and into the proper bay.
| | 07:33 | I'm going to cancel out of there,
select it, and I'll use my Copy command to
| | 07:38 | make additional copies throughout the office.
| | 07:41 | The Copy command actually has a
multiple feature right here, so if I check that
| | 07:45 | box, that's going to allow me to set my
base point once and then say place one
| | 07:50 | here, place one here, place another
one here, I'll cancel out of that.
| | 07:56 | I'm going to select all four, go to
Copy and let's place some here, let's
| | 08:03 | place some here.
| | 08:06 | Now naturally if I cancel out of here,
this is where we might want to start
| | 08:11 | rethinking the centering of those grids now.
| | 08:14 | But now I have a very clear
understanding of how much the grid needs to shift by
| | 08:19 | in order to accommodate the
lighting pattern that I'm after.
| | 08:22 | If I select one of these gridlines
and I want these light fixtures to be a
| | 08:26 | little bit more centered, I can simply
move it and I can go down maybe half a
| | 08:29 | tile, so about 1 foot, and you'll see
that we'll re-center the light fixtures.
| | 08:34 | In other words, the light fixtures are
attached to that ceiling host, and so if
| | 08:39 | the ceiling host adjusts, it takes
the light fixtures along with it.
| | 08:43 | So let me repeat in the other direction,
I'm going to select the grid over here,
| | 08:47 | go to the Move command, and I'll
shift it over half a tile in the other
| | 08:52 | direction. That's pretty good right
there and I want these other offices to be
| | 08:56 | similar, all I have to do is use my
Align command there and I'm going to select
| | 09:01 | this and align this office,
select it again and align that office.
| | 09:05 | And you can see how once you get the
basic objects placed in and you kind of get
| | 09:10 | in the swing of things, it's
all going to move very quickly.
| | 09:13 | Creating ceiling objects is quick and
easy to do with the Auto Ceiling feature.
| | 09:18 | In the case where you have ceilings
that are a little irregular, you can just
| | 09:21 | sketch them out manually
using familiar sketch tools.
| | 09:24 | When you start placing light fixtures
and other ceiling-hosted fixtures in the
| | 09:27 | ceiling, you can then use commands
like Move, Rotate and Align to adjust the
| | 09:32 | grid patterns on the ceiling and
fine-tune your ceiling plan layout.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding extensions to railings| 00:00 | Revit 2013 introduces a new
railing extensions feature.
| | 00:04 | We can take our railing objects, and
we can build in top rails and handrails,
| | 00:09 | and these top rails and handrails can
have automatically generated extensions.
| | 00:14 | Those extensions will allow us to
build in code requirements, such as the
| | 00:18 | distance of an extension that's
required by the building code or adding a tread
| | 00:22 | depth, and so on, to the extensions of
our railings and have it take place
| | 00:26 | automatically when we draw them.
| | 00:28 | So I'm in a file here called Railing
Extensions, and I'm going to zoom in
| | 00:33 | down here at the bottom.
| | 00:34 | I've got two different railings here.
| | 00:37 | And so to set this up, what I want
to do is actually build two different
| | 00:41 | railing styles so that we can do one
that does returning back to the post of
| | 00:45 | the railing, and we'll do another example
with the other one that returns to the wall.
| | 00:49 | I am going to select this railing
right here, and go to Edit Type, and
| | 00:55 | duplicate it, and I'll call this one
Handrail Pipe and I'll just add the word
| | 01:00 | Post at the end, click OK.
| | 01:02 | Then, I'm going to select this one, go
to Edit Type, duplicate it, and I'll add
| | 01:08 | the word Wall at the end.
| | 01:11 | Normally, that would be enough, and we
could modify both of these railings and
| | 01:16 | each one would behave a little differently.
| | 01:18 | But, if you look at either one of these
and edit the type, they both reference
| | 01:22 | the same top rail object.
| | 01:25 | So right here, it says Top Rail and
Type, and it says Circular 1 1/2 inch.
| | 01:30 | And if I select this one and I go to Edit
Type, it also says Circular 1 1/2 inch.
| | 01:37 | So what I want to do is I actually want
to build a copy of that type that I can
| | 01:42 | use two different sets of settings on.
| | 01:44 | I'm going to do that on the Project Browser.
| | 01:46 | So if we scroll down here, looking
under Families, we are going to expand that,
| | 01:52 | and then under Families, we're going to
look for the Railing category and expand that.
| | 01:57 | Now what you'll see here is a
Handrail Type and a Top Rail Type.
| | 02:03 | For these two railings, that's the top
rail that we're talking about, and here
| | 02:07 | is the Circular 1 1/2 inch type.
| | 02:10 | I'm going to right-click
that, and choose Duplicate.
| | 02:14 | That creates 1 1/2 inch 2.
| | 02:16 | I'm going to right-click that and choose Rename.
| | 02:19 | I'm going to rename it Post Extension.
| | 02:23 | That's the one that I'm going
to use over here on this railing.
| | 02:26 | Now while I'm here, I'm going to
scroll up a little bit, and notice that the
| | 02:31 | Handrail Type also has a type
called Circular 1 1/2 inch.
| | 02:35 | This can be a little confusing because
they both have the same name, and you may
| | 02:39 | get confused as to which one you're editing.
| | 02:41 | I'm going to duplicate this one as well
and right-click the Duplicate and rename
| | 02:47 | it, and I'm going to call this Wall Extension.
| | 02:49 | These may not be the best names but
they'll serve our purposes because it will
| | 02:55 | clarify which one we're working on.
| | 02:56 | If I come over here and I select this
railing, edit its type again, I can now
| | 03:02 | change the top rail that's being
used here to use the post extension;
| | 03:06 | notice that that's now
available on the list. Let me clarify.
| | 03:10 | Wall Extension is not on the list because Wall
Extension is not a top rail, it's a handrail.
| | 03:17 | So if we added a handrail to this type,
there is where wall extension would be.
| | 03:22 | Once I've got that, I'm going to click
OK, and it's an awful lot of set up, but
| | 03:28 | nothing has actually happened yet.
| | 03:29 | So now we're finally ready to
actually turn on the extension and it's
| | 03:33 | actually fairly easy to do.
| | 03:35 | Let me deselect the thing, hover over
the top rail of this railing, press the
| | 03:39 | Tab key and notice that it
will highlight that top rail.
| | 03:43 | I'm going to click it to select it.
| | 03:45 | Notice over here, it says that's
Post Extension but it's grayed out,
| | 03:49 | but I have access to the Edit Type button.
| | 03:52 | So I'm going to click that and now we can
change the settings of the Post Extension.
| | 03:58 | I want to choose what kind of
extension style I want this to have.
| | 04:01 | I can do a different one at the beginning
or bottom and another one at the end or top.
| | 04:07 | So here at the beginning or bottom,
because we are at the bottom of the stair,
| | 04:11 | I'm going to choose a Post Extension.
| | 04:13 | I'm going to give it a distance.
| | 04:16 | That's not enough, if I just click
Apply on that, nothing will happen because
| | 04:20 | all I'm telling it is I want a post
extension but I haven't told it how far to extend.
| | 04:25 | Maybe I want to extend by 1 foot.
| | 04:27 | So I'm going to click Apply, and
you'll see it extend out 1 foot, and then
| | 04:32 | return back to the post.
| | 04:33 | That's what they mean by a post extension.
| | 04:36 | If I check this box, then it will
project out even further because it will add
| | 04:42 | a tread depth to the extension, so
it's a tread depth plus 1 foot and then
| | 04:47 | finally it returns back.
| | 04:49 | If you wanted to, you could
even do a floor extension.
| | 04:54 | And when I click Apply, now it will return
down to the floor instead of back to the post.
| | 05:00 | Now I'm not going to show you the wall
extension here, I'll show you that on the other railing.
| | 05:05 | Choose whichever one you want here, I'll
go ahead and set this back to Post,
| | 05:09 | click OK, and that completes that one.
| | 05:11 | So now we want to do something similar
over here, but we have one more bit of
| | 05:15 | setup to do on this railing.
| | 05:17 | I'm going to do the wall extension
with a handrail instead of a top rail.
| | 05:20 | So I need to edit this type.
| | 05:22 | Now remember, we previously
renamed it to Handrail-Pipe Wall.
| | 05:26 | So I need to edit that type,
and let's move this box over here.
| | 05:31 | I'll make this slightly narrower so we can see.
| | 05:34 | Down here for Handrail 1, under the
Type, I'm going to choose the Wall
| | 05:39 | Extension, remember that's the name we
just gave it down on the Project Browser.
| | 05:43 | And where do I want it positioned?
| | 05:45 | This is important because if you
just say Wall Extension, nothing happens
| | 05:50 | because you've told it what type you want to
use, but you haven't told it where to put it.
| | 05:54 | If I open up this list here,
we've got a few choices;
| | 05:57 | it can be on the left, the right, or the center.
| | 06:01 | I'm a firm believer in the 50-50 rule.
| | 06:03 | I don't have any idea if it's left or right.
| | 06:05 | I'm going to take a guess;
| | 06:07 | choose Left, click Apply.
| | 06:09 | I've got a 50% chance of being correct.
| | 06:11 | If I'm wrong, I know
exactly what it should be now.
| | 06:14 | I'll just change it to the other one.
| | 06:16 | If you don't have 50-50 odds, I might
be a little more scientific about it.
| | 06:20 | Anyhow, we've got it on the left, it
created it here on the inside, we're using
| | 06:25 | Wall Extension, that's as much
as we can do in the railing style.
| | 06:30 | But now I click OK, deselect it, and
again I have to tab in and select the
| | 06:35 | handrail, go to Edit Type, that's
the Wall Extension I'm editing now.
| | 06:40 | You can see it back there in the
background, and now it's the same kind of
| | 06:43 | settings that we did on the other one over here.
| | 06:46 | This time, I will choose the Wall option;
| | 06:50 | put in a number, click Apply, it extends
out 1 foot, and returns back to the wall.
| | 06:56 | If I add a tread depth, it just extends out a
little bit longer and returns back to the wall.
| | 07:03 | As you can see, the new railing
extension feature is a little complex, but once
| | 07:08 | it's set up, it's a pretty powerful
feature that allows us to build in the
| | 07:12 | automatic parameters to control
whatever our code requirements tell us we need
| | 07:17 | for an extension at the bottom of our railings.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. Complex WallsCreating a custom basic wall type| 00:00 | We've seen many different kinds of
walls so far in this course, some were
| | 00:03 | generic walls showing only one layer
of material; some show brick, or steel
| | 00:07 | studs, or drywall, or even concrete.
| | 00:09 | Would you be surprised to learn that all
of these walls belong to the same family?
| | 00:13 | Walls are a system family, and all of
the walls mentioned here are part of the
| | 00:17 | basic wall system family.
| | 00:19 | System families are built into the system.
| | 00:21 | They're built into Revit.
| | 00:22 | Most major building components
are actually system families.
| | 00:25 | This includes walls, floors, roofs,
ceilings, and a variety of other objects.
| | 00:31 | This means you and I cannot
change the system family itself.
| | 00:35 | We cannot rename it, we can't delete it,
or we can't add a new one; however, we
| | 00:39 | can manipulate the family
types for any system family.
| | 00:43 | So when we have one wall made out of
brick and another one made out of concrete,
| | 00:47 | they both belong to the basic wall
family, but they're two different types.
| | 00:52 | So in this movie we're going to explore
how to make our own type of basic wall.
| | 00:56 | And so I'm in a file here called Basic
Walls, and I'm going to zoom in on the
| | 01:03 | toilet room area right here.
| | 01:05 | And I want to start off by showing you
that each of the walls that we have here
| | 01:10 | in the file are actually basic walls.
| | 01:11 | So if I highlight this exterior wall, you
can see the tooltip says that it's Basic Wall:
| | 01:17 | Exterior - Brick on Metal Stud.
| | 01:19 | If I highlight this one,
it says that it's Basic Wall:
| | 01:23 | Interior 4 7/8" Partitioned.
| | 01:25 | So you notice that both of them are basic walls.
| | 01:29 | This one here in the center is
also Basic Wall 4 7/8" Partitioned;
| | 01:33 | in fact, most of these are that wall type.
| | 01:36 | So what I want to do here is I'm
looking at this thin little wall here and I'm
| | 01:39 | thinking that's a little too
insubstantial for a wet wall between those
| | 01:44 | plumbing fixtures, so I need
something with a little bit more thickness and
| | 01:48 | room to run all the plumbing.
| | 01:50 | So what I'm going to do is create my own
custom wall type to use in that location.
| | 01:55 | So I select the wall and over here on
the Properties palette I'm going to click
| | 02:00 | the Edit Type button.
| | 02:01 | Now when I do that, that will bring
up the Type Properties dialog, and we've
| | 02:04 | actually been here before. And what I
want to caution you on is make sure that
| | 02:09 | you don't dive right in and start making edits.
| | 02:11 | For example, suppose I went to edit here
and I'm going to do something that will
| | 02:14 | be really noticeable.
| | 02:15 | I'm going to change the thickness
of this component here to 2 feet.
| | 02:18 | I'm going to click OK.
| | 02:20 | And I'll click OK in any error
messages that appear, and one more time.
| | 02:25 | And that's probably not quite the
modification that I had in mind.
| | 02:29 | It's pretty dramatic and unless I'm
going for the medieval-castle look, it's
| | 02:32 | probably not quite what I had intended.
| | 02:35 | So I'm going to undo that. You can click
the Undo button up here or go to Ctrl+Z.
| | 02:39 | And I'm going to re-select this wall
and go to Edit Type. And so what you always
| | 02:44 | want to make sure that you do first is
that you duplicate that wall before you
| | 02:48 | start making changes, so let's do that.
| | 02:51 | And most firms have some sort of an
office standard for naming, so I encourage
| | 02:55 | you to follow whatever that
standard is in your own company.
| | 02:58 | For this example I'm just simply going
to use a descriptive name, so I'm going
| | 03:01 | to call it Plumbing Wall, click OK.
| | 03:03 | And then where I really want to focus
my attention is in the structure of the
| | 03:07 | wall because that's where
all the components take place.
| | 03:09 | So I'm going to click Edit structure
button. We've been in here before, but I
| | 03:13 | want to kind of recap a
lot of the settings here now.
| | 03:16 | So the first thing I'm going to do is
down here at the bottom, I'm going to
| | 03:17 | click the Preview button.
| | 03:19 | The Preview button is a really
handy tool because it allows me to see a
| | 03:23 | graphical preview of the structure of the wall.
| | 03:26 | Now over here we have our layers.
So each component of the wall is
| | 03:31 | actually considered a layer.
| | 03:33 | You recall that we have an exterior side.
| | 03:35 | We have an interior side.
| | 03:36 | Now it might be a little easier to read
these layers if I move this dialog over
| | 03:40 | a little and widen it up, like so.
| | 03:43 | Believe it or not, this is actually a
new feature here in 2013, and one that I
| | 03:47 | personally am quite pleased about.
| | 03:50 | Now we've got our core boundary here
and as you may recall, the core boundary is
| | 03:55 | just simply the separation between
the structural part of the wall and the
| | 03:59 | nonstructural part of the wall,
| | 04:00 | So what's holding up the wall versus the
finishes that are applied to either side.
| | 04:05 | Now in this case layer 3
is our only core component.
| | 04:08 | That's the only component that's in
the core, and then we have layer 1 and 5
| | 04:13 | which are on the outside of the core.
| | 04:15 | Now if you look at the preview over
here, these green lines indicate the core
| | 04:19 | boundary, so that's a nice
graphical way of seeing that.
| | 04:22 | Now what I want to do is add a
couple of layers to this wall.
| | 04:26 | I want an additional metal stud
layer and then I want an airspace between
| | 04:30 | the two metal studs.
| | 04:31 | So I'm going to select layer 3 and click Insert.
| | 04:34 | When you select the layer and you
insert, the new layer goes above the one
| | 04:38 | that you had selected.
| | 04:39 | So notice that I get a new layer
that's using the By Category material. It's 0
| | 04:43 | thickness and it went in
above the structural layer.
| | 04:47 | So what I want to do here is actually
change the thickness of that layer to
| | 04:51 | match the metal stud down below.
| | 04:53 | Now I can type this manually if I want to.
There is a bunch of ways we can do that.
| | 04:57 | I can do 0 feet 3 inches 5/8ths of an
inch, so I did 0, space, 3, space, 5/8.
| | 05:05 | I'm going to enter that.
| | 05:07 | You can also do 3.625 and use the Inch
symbol, or you can use any combination
| | 05:12 | really of the above.
| | 05:14 | But that gives me that second
component that's at the same thickness and you
| | 05:17 | could see it over here in the preview.
| | 05:19 | Now over here in this far
column it says Structural Material.
| | 05:22 | This is a new feature in 2013 as well.
| | 05:25 | We can say which of these stud materials
is actually going to be the structural one.
| | 05:29 | Now you can check one or the other,
but only one component can actually be
| | 05:33 | designated as the structural
component, and your structural engineer would
| | 05:36 | actually run his
calculations from that component.
| | 05:39 | So in this case I'm just
going to leave the default one.
| | 05:41 | Now in the Material column we get to
designate what this component is actually
| | 05:45 | made of. And By Category is more
generic, so what I want to do is make this one
| | 05:50 | match the Metal Stud layer below.
| | 05:53 | So I just simply click here and that
makes a little Browse button appear, and
| | 05:57 | I'm going to click on that.
| | 05:59 | This will open up the Material Browser.
| | 06:02 | Now, the Material Browser has a bunch of
materials that are built into this file.
| | 06:08 | All I want to do here is locate
the Metal Stud layer and click OK.
| | 06:13 | And you see it will apply that
same material to the previous one.
| | 06:17 | Now, let me direct your attention up
here to some of this information here.
| | 06:21 | Currently, our total thickness is 8 1/2 inches.
| | 06:24 | That's just the sum total of these four
physical components. Obviously the core
| | 06:28 | boundary is 0, so that's
not part of the calculation.
| | 06:32 | Beneath that we have the R value, the
Resistance value of the wall, and the Thermal Mass.
| | 06:36 | These two are new features here in 2013.
| | 06:39 | In order to take advantage of these
features, the materials that we choose from
| | 06:44 | off the Material list have to have
these thermal properties assigned to them.
| | 06:48 | And because I'm using an out-of-the-box
template that came with Revit 2013, I've
| | 06:54 | got those values already
assigned to my materials.
| | 06:56 | If you're upgrading a project from a
previous release, those values might not be
| | 07:00 | filled in and therefore this
information might not be calculating. But this is
| | 07:04 | really handy to have this information
because if you later do energy analysis on
| | 07:08 | your building model, you'll have all of
that data at your fingertips, so it's a
| | 07:12 | really nice feature here in 2013.
| | 07:15 | Let's go ahead and select layer 4 and
insert again. Remember, the layer you
| | 07:19 | select, it gets inserted above that.
And I'm going to change that material.
| | 07:24 | And this one is going to be a
miscellaneous airspace layer, so there it is
| | 07:28 | right there. Select that.
| | 07:31 | I'm going to make the thickness of this
5 1/2 inches, so I can do 5, space,
| | 07:36 | 1/2 inches, or I could do
5.5 inches. It's up to you.
| | 07:40 | It's not a structural material.
| | 07:42 | And then over here you'll see that all
three of these layers I'll say that their
| | 07:47 | function is structure.
| | 07:49 | Now if you click there, that's a
dropdown list. And what is included on that
| | 07:53 | list is built into the system,
| | 07:55 | so there are five numbered
functions and a membrane layer.
| | 07:59 | The numbered functions are in order of
their importance, or their priority, so
| | 08:03 | Structure has the most importance, so the
most priority, and Finish 2 has the least.
| | 08:08 | Where this comes into play is when
the two walls intersect one another and
| | 08:13 | how the different layers in the two walls that
are intersecting will interact with one another.
| | 08:17 | So anything that you assign to
structure will interrupt or pass through a layer
| | 08:22 | that's a lower number.
| | 08:23 | Well, in this case I don't want the air
gap to have the same amount of priority
| | 08:27 | as the structure, so I'm going to drop
it down here to a Thermal/Air layer and
| | 08:31 | that's going to give it a priority number 3.
| | 08:34 | When I click OK, and OK again, you are
going to see immediately that the wall
| | 08:40 | increases in thickness.
| | 08:41 | Okay, so that's the first
immediate effect that we see here.
| | 08:45 | Now I'm going to go to the zoom here and
I'm going to zoom in a little closer on
| | 08:49 | this intersection. Because
we're in a coarse level of detail,
| | 08:52 | we're not seeing any of
those internal components yet.
| | 08:54 | But I can just come down here to the
view control bar, click on the level of
| | 08:58 | Detail pop-up and choose either Medium
or Fine, and that will display all those
| | 09:03 | internal components.
| | 09:05 | So what you can see here is this is
the metal stud layer of the exterior wall
| | 09:10 | and that is joining in and cleaning
up nicely with the metal stud layers of
| | 09:15 | this intersecting wall, but the air gap
has a line here because it has a lower
| | 09:20 | priority. So that's where we witness
what we just changed in the previous dialog.
| | 09:25 | Now the other thing that I want to point
out from the previous dialog is, if you
| | 09:28 | highlight an existing wall and look at
the tooltip either onscreen or down at
| | 09:32 | your status bar--remember
that Walls is the category:
| | 09:36 | Basic Wall, that's the family:
| | 09:38 | Plumbing Wall. That's the type that we
just named it, and then the final value
| | 09:43 | says R42. That is actually telling you
this R value that was calculated here at
| | 09:51 | the top of the screen.
| | 09:52 | So if your wall has an R value, you'll
be able to tell what it is just by simply
| | 09:57 | hovering over the wall.
| | 09:58 | So basic walls are built into the system.
| | 10:01 | They are a system family. All walls
are a part of a system family, and basic
| | 10:05 | walls are just simply layered walls,
walls with multiple layers of material.
| | 10:09 | We can easily create our own
layered walls by going to the Edit Type,
| | 10:13 | duplicating, and then adding and
modifying the layers that we need.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding stacked walls| 00:00 | As we've already discussed, walls are
a system family, and system family just
| | 00:04 | means that it's built into the
system and it has fixed parameters.
| | 00:08 | Now, there are three wall families;
| | 00:09 | there's the basic wall, the
stacked wall, and the curtain wall.
| | 00:13 | We looked at the basic wall in the
previous movie, and as you recall, it's a
| | 00:18 | basic wall because it has the same
material throughout its construction.
| | 00:21 | If you look at it horizontally or vertically,
you are going to see the same set of layers.
| | 00:25 | A stack wall is slightly more complex
because while it's the same material along
| | 00:30 | its length, it actually varies along its height.
| | 00:33 | Now, all it takes to create a stack
wall is to simply take two or more basic
| | 00:38 | walls and literally stack
them up on top of one another.
| | 00:41 | So, in this movie we're going to look
at the stacked walls, and we'll address
| | 00:45 | curtain walls in a later movie.
| | 00:46 | So I have here a file called Stacked
Walls, and it's just a simple file and we
| | 00:50 | are going to use it to demonstrate
how the Stacked Walls feature works.
| | 00:54 | Now, most of the work is going to take
place down here on the Project Browser.
| | 00:57 | So, if I go to the Project Browser and I
scroll to the bottom, we'll have a Families branch.
| | 01:01 | I'm going to expand that.
| | 01:04 | And beneath that branch, you'll see
all the various categories in the system.
| | 01:08 | I'll go down and I'll locate the
Walls category and expand it, and then
| | 01:12 | finally, I'm going to
expand the Basic Wall category.
| | 01:15 | Now, even though we're talking about
the stacked wall here in this movie, we
| | 01:19 | are going to start by looking at
three basic walls that I've created and
| | 01:22 | included in this file.
| | 01:24 | Each of them begins with the
letters R-E-T for Revit Essential Training.
| | 01:28 | You'll find that that's a pretty
common best practice that firms like to do.
| | 01:32 | They use their initials or some other
designation at the start of each name of
| | 01:36 | anything they've customized so that
members of the firm will know where the
| | 01:40 | customized objects are and
which ones they want to use.
| | 01:43 | So it's a pretty typical thing to do.
| | 01:45 | So, the first one I'm going to show you
is the RET_Foundation -14-inch Concrete.
| | 01:50 | So, I'm going to right-click on
that and choose Type Properties.
| | 01:54 | Now, that will load up the Type
Properties dialog that we've seen before, and
| | 01:57 | there's really nothing special
about this wall. If we click on the Edit
| | 02:01 | Structure button, you can see that it's
nothing more than a 14-inch-thick layer of concrete.
| | 02:06 | So this is by far the simplest of the three.
| | 02:09 | So I'm going to cancel out of here, click OK.
| | 02:11 | And the next one I want to look at is the one
at the top here, RET_Exterior - Brick on CMU.
| | 02:17 | I'm going to right-click it
and go to its Type Properties.
| | 02:21 | And this time, what I want to do is
down here for view, we can actually change
| | 02:25 | the View Direction from a Floor Plan to
a Section, and that will make it a little
| | 02:30 | bit more obvious what we're seeing
here in this particular wall type.
| | 02:34 | I'm going to choose Edit Structure
again. And we have all our various layers:
| | 02:38 | here is our Brick Finish layer,
here's our Air Gap, here is our Rigid
| | 02:42 | Insulation, there's a Membrane, and
then finally, the Concrete Structure.
| | 02:46 | If you click over here in the
Preview, you can actually zoom in here.
| | 02:50 | So, I'm going to roll my wheel, and
there's this additional component right
| | 02:54 | here: there's the soldier course brick, and
that's actually controlled here under Sweeps.
| | 02:58 | Now we're going to talk about Sweeps
in a later movie, so I'm not to going to
| | 03:01 | get into the details of it right now.
| | 03:03 | Let me go ahead and OK out of here
two times without making any changes.
| | 03:07 | And then the final one is the one here
in the middle, Exterior - Brick Parapet.
| | 03:10 | Look at its Type Properties.
| | 03:12 | We're in the section cut. It also has
a sweep at the top and as you can see,
[00:03:1 6.13]
it's got three wythes of brick
and an air gap here in the middle.
| | 03:20 | So what we're going to do now--let me
cancel out of there--is we are going to
| | 03:25 | come down here to the Stacked
Wall family beneath Walls, expand it.
| | 03:29 | And every family has to have at least one type.
| | 03:32 | So you'll see here that there's
already a type here in this project.
| | 03:36 | This is just the generic one
that comes with the template.
| | 03:38 | I want to duplicate this and customize
it so we can build our own stacked wall.
| | 03:42 | So I'm going to right-
click on that and duplicate it.
| | 03:46 | That's going to create
Exterior - Brick Over CMU Metal Stud 2.
| | 03:50 | So I'm going to select that, right-
click again, and rename it. And I'll do RET,
| | 03:55 | for Revit Essential Training,
underscore, and I'll just call this Exterior
| | 04:00 | Wall, and press Enter.
| | 04:03 | I'm going to right-click that
again and go to its Type Properties.
| | 04:08 | That takes us to a similar Type Properties,
but as you can see it's a little bit simpler.
| | 04:12 | When you click the Edit Structure
button over here, all you really have to do
| | 04:16 | now is tell it which walls you want to stack up.
| | 04:19 | Now I'm going to move the dialog over
here a little bit and I'm going to widen
| | 04:22 | it up so that I can get a
better look at the names right here,
| | 04:27 | so I can make adjustment here to these
column widths in order to read the names
| | 04:32 | a little bit better.
| | 04:33 | Now, I'm going to start at the bottom
with my lowermost wall here, and that wall,
| | 04:38 | I want to use my RET_
Foundation - 14 inch Concrete,
| | 04:43 | so I'm going to choose that there.
| | 04:45 | Now it shifts a little bit, and
let's not worry about that yet.
| | 04:47 | We'll come back and fix that in a few minutes.
But I want to just get the walls established first.
| | 04:52 | The next one up in the stack is going
to be the RET - Brick on CMU, and then I'm
| | 05:00 | going to click the Insert button.
| | 05:02 | That will create one above it.
And again, it looks a little weird over here
| | 05:05 | because it's using the same wall type
again, and I am going to change that one
| | 05:10 | to the Brick Parapet.
| | 05:13 | We clearly need to make a few adjustments.
| | 05:16 | So let's look at the Height column next.
| | 05:18 | Each component can have its own height.
| | 05:21 | One of the components will have a variable
height, and the others will all have a fixed height.
| | 05:26 | So, we've got a three-component wall.
| | 05:27 | That means two of them have a fixed height.
| | 05:30 | So, I'm going to start with those. All right!
| | 05:31 | So I'm going to select my parapet wall
at the top, and I'm going to come over
| | 05:34 | here to the Height column and I'm going
to just make that 3 feet instead of what
| | 05:37 | it was defaulting to.
| | 05:39 | Now, for my component down at the bottom,
I'm going to click there and I'm going to make that 4 feet.
| | 05:44 | Now, you'll see the component in
the middle is the variable one.
| | 05:47 | That leaves us having to deal
with these alignment issues.
| | 05:49 | So, if I click over here and I zoom
in a little bit, obviously we've got a
| | 05:53 | problem there, and then if we pan
down here, I'm just using my wheel mouse,
| | 05:57 | you can see that this one
shifted a little bit here.
[00:06:00.0 4]
I'm going to stay zoomed
in on this one right here.
| | 06:02 | We have a few different
ways we could deal with this.
| | 06:04 | We could certainly come in and calculate
the offsets and try and fix it that way
| | 06:08 | by shifting the walls laterally.
| | 06:10 | Before you use the offsets, it's a good
idea to look here at the Location Line choices.
| | 06:17 | Whatever you choose here is where
these offsets will be measured from.
| | 06:21 | So if we can find a better common
edge that we can use, it might save us a
| | 06:27 | little bit of trouble in
calculating the offsets.
| | 06:29 | And in this case, I think the most
logical choice to measure the offsets from is
| | 06:34 | the exterior face of the core.
| | 06:37 | When I choose that, you're going to
see it shift a little bit right here, but
| | 06:41 | notice that the brick now
lines up nicely with the CMU.
| | 06:45 | Now, I'm going to roll my wheel to
zoom back out, and it didn't really solve
| | 06:50 | the problem down here,
| | 06:52 | but at least now I only have to shift the
offset in one of the walls instead of both of them.
| | 06:57 | Now, if you do the math and you make
the calculation, it turns out that 6 3/8th
| | 07:02 | of an inch here for the offset will do
the trick, and it will shift this wall
| | 07:06 | over and line it up where it needs to go.
| | 07:09 | You can use a positive number or a
negative number in that Offset field.
| | 07:14 | So, we'll just scan everything and make
sure we're satisfied with it, zoom back out
| | 07:18 | over here. It looks pretty good.
| | 07:19 | Let's click OK, OK again, and now
all that remains is to apply that new
| | 07:25 | wall type to the model.
| | 07:26 | So, I'm going to highlight one of my
walls, press the Tab key, and click--
| | 07:31 | that's our chain selection--open up
the type selector list here, scroll down,
| | 07:37 | and there is my new RET_Exterior Wall.
| | 07:40 | I'll choose that, and then I'll
deselect so we can see what we've got, and you can
| | 07:45 | see that it applies our new
stacked wall type to all of the walls.
| | 07:50 | So, creating a stacked wall involves
having two or more basic walls that you
| | 07:56 | want to stack on top of one another,
| | 07:58 | either use existing walls that you
already have in your library or you can
| | 08:01 | create them from scratch. And then you
simply create a stacked wall, assemble
| | 08:05 | the parts on top of one another, and fix
any offsets for any lateral shifts that
| | 08:09 | you need to do and then
apply the wall to your model.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding curtain walls| 00:00 | Curtain walls are the third and most
complex form of the wall system family.
| | 00:03 | Curtain walls can vary in any
direction and even form complex patterns within
| | 00:07 | their structure using a series
of grids, mullions, and panels.
| | 00:11 | In this movie, I'll get you started
with the essentials of the Curtain Wall
| | 00:14 | object, and then we'll dig a little
deeper into the specifics of grids and
| | 00:18 | mullions and panels in the next movie.
| | 00:20 | So I am in a file here called the
Curtain Wall. On the Architecture tab we are
| | 00:24 | going to use the Wall tool again
to access the Curtain Wall object.
| | 00:28 | So remembering that the Curtain Wall
object is just another wall family, then we
| | 00:33 | actually use the Wall tool to access it.
Just scroll down and you'll see the
| | 00:38 | Curtain Wall object is listed here as
the family, and then the template that we
| | 00:42 | started which has three types: Curtain
Wall, Exterior Glazing, and Storefront.
| | 00:47 | Feel free to explore each one, but in
this movie I'm just going to look at the
| | 00:51 | Storefront design because of
the three, it's the most detailed.
| | 00:54 | To start off with it, I am going draw
it outside the building, maybe toward the
| | 00:57 | back here, and I am just going to draw
it at maybe about 20 feet long.
| | 01:02 | Now let's start off
looking at that in Plan view.
| | 01:04 | I am going to zoom in, using my Zoom in
Region command, and what you'll see right
| | 01:09 | away is there is a repetition
along the length of the wall.
| | 01:12 | Now when you move your mouse near the
curtain wall, you'll see a dashed line
| | 01:17 | appear with two little sort of end caps,
sort of like a long I shape.
| | 01:21 | That's the curtain wall itself.
| | 01:23 | But if you press the Tab key, it's
actually possible to reach into the curtain
| | 01:27 | wall and highlight individual parts and pieces.
| | 01:30 | So we've got mullions in both the
horizontal and the vertical direction.
| | 01:35 | We've got panels here representing
glass panels in this particular case, and
| | 01:40 | there's even some gridlines, which we
can see right there as just a small line.
| | 01:46 | Now we are going to talk about all these
little parts and pieces as we go along,
| | 01:49 | but let's take a look at this in another view.
| | 01:52 | I am going to go to our Default 3D View
icon here in the Quick Access toolbar,
| | 01:56 | the little birdhouse icon, and I'll use
my View Cube to use the back axon here,
| | 02:02 | so I just sort of spin the whole model around.
| | 02:05 | And then we can actually hold down the
Shift key and drag to orbit to a more
| | 02:10 | favorable view if we like. And finally,
I'll roll the wheel to zoom in a touch.
| | 02:14 | Now what we'll notice in this direction
is that in addition to the repetition we
| | 02:19 | were seeing in plan, there is also some
repetition running vertically as well.
| | 02:23 | Now here if you highlight the overall
curtain wall, you get sort of a dashed box
| | 02:27 | that appears around the entire thing,
and then if you Tab, you can still reach in
| | 02:32 | and see the individual pieces there.
| | 02:35 | I move my mouse away here to kind of
reset and I'll move it back again, and I am
| | 02:39 | going to select the entire curtain wall.
And I am going to use this little grip
| | 02:43 | here at the top and just start to drag it up.
| | 02:46 | Notice that at this point it's just
stretching the top bay, but at some point,
| | 02:52 | right about there, it will add a new bay.
And then again if I continue to stretch,
| | 02:56 | I'll get short bay at the top, and so on.
| | 02:59 | Contrast that to this behavior.
| | 03:00 | If I grab this little grip down here at
the bottom and start to drag it this way
| | 03:06 | and let go, notice that I
still get equally spaced base.
| | 03:09 | If I make it shorter, it went to four,
but they're still all equally spaced; if
| | 03:15 | I go longer it went to six in this case,
but they're still all equally spaced.
| | 03:19 | So let's figure out
what's causing that behavior.
| | 03:23 | Like other walls, if you come over to the
Properties palette, you have an Edit Type button.
| | 03:27 | I am going to click on that. And the
Curtain Wall type is controlled by a
| | 03:32 | vertical and a horizontal grid pattern,
and you can see the settings right here.
| | 03:36 | Now in the vertical direction, we have a
Maximum Spacing, so the vertical lines
| | 03:41 | of this Curtain Wall are a
maximum of 5 feet apart.
| | 03:45 | They can be less than 5 feet, but they
can't be more, and that's why we're seeing
| | 03:48 | equally spaced base.
| | 03:50 | However, in the Horizontal direction,
the horizontal lines are at fixed distance
| | 03:55 | of 8 feet, and so that's why we're
seeing a standard-size bay, a standard-sized
| | 03:59 | bay, and then a shorter one at the top.
| | 04:01 | So there's a dropdown here and if you
wanted to, you could change the behavior to
| | 04:06 | a variety of other choices: Minimum
Spacing, Maximum Spacing, and so on.
| | 04:09 | So feel free to
experiment with that on your own.
| | 04:12 | I do encourage you, if do experiment, to
remember to use the Duplicate option and
| | 04:16 | create a copy of Storefront so that you
can do your variations in a copy and not
| | 04:20 | change the original.
| | 04:22 | Now there are a few other
settings here I want to point out to you.
| | 04:24 | You notice we were getting mullions
as we're building the curtain wall.
| | 04:27 | That's all controlled down here.
| | 04:29 | You can see there are actually six
settings for this, so you can control what
| | 04:32 | kind of mullion you get around the
perimeter of the curtain wall, both left and
| | 04:36 | right side, both top and bottom side, and
then what kind of mullion you are going
| | 04:40 | to get on the interior lines,
both horizontally and vertically.
| | 04:43 | And then finally at the top,
I want to show you this setting next:
| | 04:46 | Automatically Embed.
| | 04:47 | You can see here it's got a check
mark in there, and it's easiest to show
| | 04:51 | you that onscreen.
| | 04:52 | So what I am going to do is OK out of here.
| | 04:54 | This curtain wall here, I am going to
delete it, and I'm going to return to my
| | 04:57 | Level 1 Floor Plan, and I will
zoom in over here on the stair area.
| | 05:04 | Now, we've got a big blank wall right
over here, and I'm going to go back to the
| | 05:08 | Wall command, make sure Storefront
is still selected, and I am going to
| | 05:11 | highlight the centerline of the wall.
Revit will do that automatically just by
| | 05:15 | moving my mouse there.
| | 05:16 | I am going to click right about here
and draw it out to maybe about there, 17
| | 05:22 | foot 6 in this case, but the exact distance
is not terribly important, and click again.
| | 05:27 | Notice how the curtain wall actually
cut right into the wall and made a space
| | 05:32 | for itself. And if we scroll down here
and look at the North elevation and if I
| | 05:39 | zoom in, you can see again that it went
to the standard height, but we still have
| | 05:45 | a curtain wall here.
| | 05:46 | We could tab in. And this time if I
change the height of this curtain wall, you'll
| | 05:51 | see that it adjusts the hole in the wall.
| | 05:55 | You can kind of see here from
highlighting the wall how there is a hole
| | 05:57 | going all the way around.
That's the Automatically Embed feature.
| | 06:01 | So that's a pretty handy feature of
the curtain wall. It's kind of nice.
| | 06:04 | It makes the curtain wall
behave almost like a door or a window.
| | 06:06 | Now let's say that I did want this
height to be taller like I've done here, let
| | 06:12 | a little bit more light in the stairwell,
but it does get a little tight in this location here.
| | 06:15 | So I am going to show you one more
feature that we can do that's actually not
| | 06:19 | limited to just curtain walls.
| | 06:20 | You can do this with any kind of wall, and
that is you can highlight and then click.
| | 06:25 | You can select the Curtain Wall and
then you can use this Edit Profile
| | 06:29 | feature right here.
| | 06:31 | Now when I do that, it's actually going to
take me to Sketch mode for this curtain wall.
| | 06:35 | So now what I'm sketching is actually
the vertical shape of the wall. And I can
| | 06:40 | use any of my standard shapes
over here to make this modification.
| | 06:43 | Now what I'm going to do is use this Pick
Lines feature, because this is really handy.
| | 06:47 | This allows you to select existing
geometry and use that as the basis for the
| | 06:51 | line you are drawing.
| | 06:52 | Now if I just use that, it would put the
line right here at the roof. I want to
| | 06:56 | be parallel to the roof, so what I'll
do instead is I'll put in a number over
| | 07:00 | here in this Offset field--maybe about
5 feet ought to do the trick--and now
| | 07:04 | notice that when I highlight the edge
of the roof, it's actually giving me a
| | 07:07 | dashed line 5 feet away.
| | 07:08 | I'll click, click my Modify tool to
cancel, and now all I need to do is clean it up.
| | 07:15 | So I'll just use my Trim command, and
remember pick the side you want to keep.
| | 07:18 | Don't pick it here because you'll get
the wrong thing. Click here and then the
| | 07:21 | side I want to keep, this side and
this side, and that kind of knocks off that
| | 07:27 | angled corner there.
| | 07:28 | And when I click Finish, notice the
way the curtain wall adjusts itself
| | 07:32 | automatically and the mullions
conform to the new shape, so that's a pretty
| | 07:36 | handy little feature there.
| | 07:38 | So this is just a quick
overview of the curtain wall.
| | 07:41 | You can see that curtain walls
are more complex wall objects.
| | 07:44 | They contain a series of mullions and
grids and panels, in this case we are
| | 07:49 | looking at glass panels and aluminum
mullions, but we can actually change
| | 07:53 | that if we want to.
| | 07:54 | You can customize the shape and behavior
of the curtain wall, and so in the next
| | 07:58 | movie, we'll take a look at some
of those features that we can do.
| | 08:01 | We can manipulate the grid lines and the
mullions and we'll look at all of that.
| | 08:04 | But using the type-based curtain
walls that we've seen here, you can set up
| | 08:08 | repetitive spacings so that you just
simply draw out the curtain wall and you
| | 08:12 | get the same standard spacing along the
length and height of the curtain wall.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding curtain grids, mullions, and panels| 00:00 | In this movie we are going to look
at manually created curtain walls.
| | 00:03 | In the previous movie we looked at the curtain
wall object and we saw how it was the series
| | 00:06 | of grids and mullions in a pattern,
and those were driven by the type.
| | 00:11 | Here we are going to look at how we can layout
the grid pattern manually so that we can have
| | 00:15 | a little bit more freedom and
flexibility with the design.
| | 00:18 | So I am in a file called Grids and Mullions,
and I'm going to zoom in here on the front
| | 00:24 | entry, and you can see I
just have a blank wall here.
| | 00:26 | So I am going to go to my Wall tool, open
up my Type Selector, and make sure that I'm
| | 00:31 | choosing the Curtain Wall type from the
Curtain Wall family, so they both say Curtain Wall.
| | 00:37 | And this is the most generic curtain wall;
| | 00:39 | it doesn't have any mullions
or grids in it whatsoever.
| | 00:42 | Now like we did in the previous movie, I am
going to highlight the exterior wall here
| | 00:46 | and click my first point.
| | 00:47 | Now I am about one foot off the corner, and
it's kind of important that you back up off
| | 00:51 | the corner a little bit here because if you
get too close to the corner Revit will try
| | 00:54 | and snap to the corner, so if that
happens, just undo and try again.
| | 00:58 | So I'm about one foot off the corner, and I'm
going to go down here to about 15 feet, and
| | 01:05 | when it snaps to 15 feet, I'm going to
click. And I'll get an error message.
| | 01:09 | And the reason I'm getting this error message
is if I do Edit Type, you'll remember in the
| | 01:12 | previous movie we talked about this
Automatically Embed, well here, this particular curtain wall,
| | 01:17 | that feature is turned off.
| | 01:19 | You'll also see that everything is set to
None here, so we're seeing that borne out
| | 01:23 | here in the curtain wall that there are no
grids or mullions, and that's what we are going
| | 01:26 | to be addressing here shortly.
| | 01:27 | So let's take care of the error message first.
It tells me here I can use the Cut Geometry
| | 01:32 | command to fix the problem.
| | 01:34 | So that's right here on the Modify tab.
| | 01:37 | I choose Cut Geometry. And then the first
click is the wall that I want to cut, and then
| | 01:43 | the second click is what I want to do the
cutting with, and that's going to be my Curtain
| | 01:47 | Wall, and now it will
embed itself in the wall.
| | 01:49 | So you can always manually embed two walls
in one another, even if that Automatically
| | 01:54 | Embed feature is not turned on.
| | 01:55 | All right, so let's make sure
that we cancel out of there.
| | 01:58 | The next step is to start laying out the grids,
and the easiest place to do that is going
| | 02:02 | to be in an elevation view.
| | 02:04 | So I'm going to scroll down here on my Project
Browser and open up the South Elevation and
| | 02:10 | zoom in on the front of the building.
| | 02:13 | And you'll see our curtain wall right there,
and I might have to tab if I wanted to actually
| | 02:18 | select it. There it is right there,
and it's just a big empty plain glass.
| | 02:22 | On the Architecture tab,
we have a Curtain Grid tool.
| | 02:24 | I am going to start with that. And the way
this works is if you highlight the edges of
| | 02:30 | the curtain wall you can create either vertical
or horizontal grids. So I am going to create
| | 02:35 | some vertical and horizontal grids that are
close to the edges. Notice that I'm not
| | 02:40 | really paying too much
attention to where I am placing them.
| | 02:43 | I am just sort of placing them wherever.
And we've done this before in other places in Revit.
| | 02:48 | Now I'm also going to add three more vertically
running down the middle, and then I'll cancel
| | 02:52 | out of the command.
| | 02:53 | So everything is kind of randomly placed.
| | 02:56 | Now as we've seen in other places in Revit,
I can easily select a grid, highlight the temporary
| | 03:02 | dimension, type in a number like 2 feet that I want
to use there, and it will make that modification.
| | 03:09 | We could certainly do it that way--I could
repeat it up here, make this one 2 feet--but
| | 03:13 | I want to show you an alternative way that I
like to do that I think is sometimes a little
| | 03:17 | bit preferable, and that is
to use a permanent dimension.
| | 03:21 | So up here on the Quick Access toolbar, I am
going to go to my Aligned Dimension command,
| | 03:26 | click that. So I am going to select my
gridlines, and I actually want to include the outside
| | 03:35 | edge here and the outside edge here as well.
| | 03:39 | Sometimes if you start with the outside edge,
it doesn't let you pick the grid, so do the
| | 03:42 | internal grids first and then go to the
outside edges, and it should work pretty well.
| | 03:47 | I'm going to pan slightly, just to give
myself some room up here at the top, and click to
| | 03:52 | place the dimension.
| | 03:53 | Remember to place the dimension,
you have to click in the empty whitespace.
| | 03:56 | I am going to cancel out of that command.
| | 03:59 | Now, the reason I did it that way is because
if you select one of these grids now, notice
| | 04:04 | that even though that's a permanent dimension,
the two numbers that apply to this particular
| | 04:09 | grid activate as temporary dimensions and I
can put in a value like one and a half feet.
| | 04:16 | I can select the next grid over, and you could
see both of these activate, and I can put in
| | 04:21 | my value. And then I just keep working my
way from left to right or right to left.
| | 04:26 | So it doesn't really matter which way you start,
but just keep going in the same direction.
| | 04:29 | Remember to select the
object that you want to move.
| | 04:33 | If I had this one selected and I change it
to 3 feet then I come over here and I change
| | 04:37 | this one to 3 feet, it's just going to
keep moving the same grid back and forth.
| | 04:41 | So remember that you move one and then you
change selection to the next one and then
| | 04:45 | you move it and when you're done, you should
have 1' 6 at both ends and you should have
| | 04:50 | 3 for all the middle base.
| | 04:52 | So that's my basic layout and even a layout
as simple as that we could not achieve in
| | 04:57 | the Type dialog, because in the Type dialog
we get one set of spacings vertically and
| | 05:01 | another set horizontally. That's it.
| | 05:03 | So to do even a simple custom spacing like this, you
need to manually layout the grids like we've done.
| | 05:09 | Now I want to put a doorway here.
Obviously, I've got some grids in the way.
| | 05:12 | So the way that we deal with that situation
is you select the gridline, and up here on
| | 05:17 | the Ribbon we have this feature that allows
us to add and remove segments of the grid line.
| | 05:22 | So I am going to click on that, and then you
just simply touch the part of the gridline
| | 05:26 | that you want to remove. And I can do that
there, and there and when I deselect you'll
| | 05:31 | see that I'm left with just
this part of the grid line.
| | 05:34 | Now you see the rest of it is still there.
It's just invisible.
| | 05:37 | So let's do it again.
| | 05:38 | Let's select this one, Add/Remove Segments,
and I'll take out this middle segment here.
| | 05:43 | I am going to deselect that.
| | 05:45 | Now what I've got is, if I put my mouse near
the grid, it highlights the curtain grid.
| | 05:49 | If I press the Tab key, it will go out and
it will highlight the whole curtain wall.
| | 05:53 | If I tab one more time, what you'll see
is it will then highlight the panel.
| | 05:58 | Now at the moment this says its
Curtain Panel System panel Glazed.
| | 06:02 | So it's just a piece of
glass like everything else.
| | 06:04 | I am going to select that piece of glass,
and over here on the Properties palette I can
| | 06:09 | change that to something else.
| | 06:11 | Now, doors and curtain walls
are a little bit special.
| | 06:14 | You can't just place a door and
pick a curtain wall; it doesn't work.
| | 06:18 | So what you have to have instead is a
specially created curtain wall door, and that curtain
| | 06:23 | wall door is actually a curtain panel.
| | 06:25 | And so if I scroll up here, you can see I
have one such door loaded in this project.
| | 06:30 | This one comes with the software, so you should
have it available to you with your Revit for
| | 06:34 | other projects, but it's
already loaded here in this project.
| | 06:37 | And if I click it here, Storefront Double Door--and
then let's deselect it so we can see it better--
| | 06:43 | you can see that it loads
a door in there for me.
| | 06:45 | Again, it's a little bizarre because I can't
just place a door, so I have to have these
| | 06:49 | specially formulated curtain panel doors.
| | 06:52 | Now I am going to put my mouse over here,
tab a few times until I get the lower panel.
| | 06:58 | Right-click this time instead of left-click.
| | 07:00 | The reason is under Select panels on the right-
click menu, I can select Multiple panels at the same
| | 07:06 | time so I could either do on the vertical grid,
the horizontal, or the entire curtain wall.
| | 07:11 | I am going to do it along the horizontal grid, and
you'll see it'll go cross and highlight all of these.
| | 07:16 | Now naturally I've already got the door the
way I wanted, so I don't want that one to
| | 07:20 | be selected. Hold down the Shift key,
and I'm going to remove that, like so.
| | 07:25 | With the remaining panel selected, I'll come
up here to the dropdown. It's currently a
| | 07:30 | System Panel Glazed, and I am going to
change that to a System Panel Solid.
| | 07:36 | Now if I deselect, it doesn't look any
different in this view, and that's because we are in
| | 07:40 | Hidden-Line display right now.
| | 07:42 | Down at the bottom of the screen on the View
Control Bar, I am going to click the Visual
| | 07:46 | Style pop-up and change to Shaded.
| | 07:49 | Now, the blue is awfully bright, but that represents
glass. And then you could see these gray panels here.
| | 07:57 | That's our spandrel glass.
That's our solid panels now.
| | 08:00 | So you can see clearly there
is a different material there.
| | 08:02 | Now it might be easier to see this if we
went to 3D, so let me go to my default 3D view/
| | 08:08 | And I'll use my Shift key and my Wheel and
spin this around a little bit so I can get
| | 08:14 | a better look there, and then zoom in, like
so. And what you'll see is even in hidden
| | 08:21 | line in 3D, the glass is transparent, and then
of course if you want to switch to shading
| | 08:27 | you'll see that the blue is a little
bit less overpowering in this view.
| | 08:30 | So you can continue to work
right here in 3D if you want.
| | 08:33 | You can work in shading or hidden line, and all
that remains for us to do is to add some mullions.
| | 08:38 | Now, I am going to click the Mullion tool here
on the Architecture tab, and I am just going
| | 08:42 | to work with the default
mullions that are here on the list.
| | 08:45 | You can actually create your own, but the 2.5" x 5"
Rectangular Mullion is what I am going to use.
| | 08:50 | And over here under Placement we have a few
different options. So we can place on the
| | 08:55 | entire grid line, and I'll do that
for some of the verticals here.
| | 09:00 | We can place on an individual Grid Line Segment
and I'll do that for this one here above the
| | 09:05 | door, and for these guys down here.
And you could even do the entire grid.
| | 09:12 | That'll do everything that's left, but that'll
place them in places where I don't want, so
| | 09:15 | I am going to go back to the grid line feature
for that and just add them in the locations
| | 09:20 | where I need them.
Cancel out of there.
| | 09:23 | If we zoom in slightly, you can kind of tell
that the mullions have a preferred direction.
| | 09:28 | You can see that the vertical
takes precedence over the horizontal.
| | 09:31 | We can control that.
| | 09:33 | So if I select this mullion right here for example,
you could see these small little grips there.
| | 09:37 | Now it might be easier to see if I go back to
hidden line. You could see I am right there, OK.
| | 09:42 | And if I click that, that
toggles that join condition there.
| | 09:45 | So we can do that on additional ones if we
wanted to, but there is actually a faster way.
| | 09:50 | I am going to highlight one of these mullions,
right-click again, and just like we had select
| | 09:55 | options for the panels, we have similar ones
for the mullions. And I can say in this case
| | 10:00 | On Gridline, and that will
highlight them all the way across.
| | 10:04 | You can right-click a second time to get to
this next command, but it's also right here
| | 10:08 | on the Ribbon. We could
say make that continuous.
| | 10:11 | So I'll choose that and you see
it does it all the way across.
| | 10:14 | Feel free to continue to fine-tune it some more
if you like and make additional adjustments,
| | 10:19 | but as you can see, by manually laying out a
series of grids and mullions and swapping
| | 10:24 | in and out different kinds of panels, you can
make a more custom curtain wall design than
| | 10:29 | you would be able to achieve
using the type-driven curtain wall.
| | 10:32 | So both curtain walls give us interesting
possibilities and help us to create more complexity
| | 10:38 | in our design, but we've really
only scratched the surface here.
| | 10:41 | In the Advanced modeling course here at lynda.com
I've covered many other curtain wall techniques,
| | 10:47 | including sloped glazing and curtain systems
and the conceptual modeling environment with
| | 10:52 | patterned surfaces,
| | 10:53 | so when you're done with essentials I
encourage you to take a look at that course and see
| | 10:57 | some additional techniques over there.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating wall sweeps and reveals| 00:00 | In this movie we'll look at sweeps and reveals.
| | 00:02 | A sweep is material that you add to a wall,
and a reveal is material that you carve away.
| | 00:06 | Both use a two-dimensional family type
called a Profile, which determines the
| | 00:10 | shape of the material that you're
either adding or removing, and then that
| | 00:14 | material is pushed along either
the length or the height of the wall.
| | 00:17 | We can apply these at the type level,
in which case it would apply to all
| | 00:21 | instances of the type, or we can
actually apply them wall by wall.
| | 00:25 | So let's get started here in a file
called Sweeps and Reveals. And I am going
| | 00:30 | to select one of the exterior walls and
go to its Edit Type button here on the
| | 00:34 | Properties palette.
| | 00:35 | Now we've been here before.
| | 00:37 | We are going to choose Edit Structure.
And if you look down here, where we need to
| | 00:42 | go is this Sweeps button, but it's
grayed out. And the mystery here is that it
| | 00:47 | says Modify Vertical Structure is
available only in the Section Preview.
| | 00:51 | So you have to click the Preview button
here, and then you have to change this to
| | 00:56 | Section and that will
make the buttons available.
| | 00:59 | So it's a little obscure, but that's
how you get there. And then we'll click
| | 01:04 | on the Sweeps button.
| | 01:06 | Now what I recommend you do is
position your screen so that you can see this
| | 01:10 | preview in the background, because it
will be really helpful as you work in this
| | 01:13 | dialog because otherwise you don't
really have that much feedback here.
| | 01:16 | So the first thing we need to do is add a sweep.
| | 01:19 | Now you also have a Load Profile button here.
| | 01:21 | It turns out that this file includes
lots of profiles, and in this case I'm just
| | 01:25 | going to use this one at the bottom
here, the Wall sweep-Brick Soldier Course:
| | 01:29 | 3 Bricks, and that will do the job just fine.
| | 01:32 | But if you wanted a different profile
than the ones that were listed there, you
| | 01:36 | could click Load Profile and go find one.
| | 01:38 | So there is my profile.
| | 01:40 | Now if I just simply click Apply down
here, you'll see that sweep get applied
| | 01:45 | down at the bottom of the wall.
| | 01:46 | So it's probably not quite
where we wanted it to go.
| | 01:48 | So we are going to look at
some of these other settings here.
| | 01:51 | The first thing is I want it to
actually look like a Brick Soldier Course, so
| | 01:55 | I'm going to click on the Material
button and that will launch the Material
| | 01:58 | Browser, and I will scroll down and
look for an appropriate material.
| | 02:03 | Masonry - Soldier Course, and I'll
select that. And this is just a brick material
| | 02:08 | that has the bricks running
vertically instead of horizontally, so I'll go
| | 02:12 | ahead and click OK. That takes care of that.
| | 02:14 | Distance, this is going to actually
move that sweep up or down in the height of
| | 02:18 | the wall, and it's
measured from this location here.
| | 02:21 | We can measure it from the top or the bottom.
| | 02:22 | So I am going to keep it set to Base, and I am
going to set the Distance here to about 6 feet.
| | 02:27 | Now let's apply that.
| | 02:29 | So you can see that move up, but it's
still kind of hanging off the wall and
| | 02:33 | typically a Soldier course would be
embedded in the wall so I can use the Offset
| | 02:37 | feature right here to control that.
| | 02:39 | Now a standard brick is about two
and two-thirds inches, so I can use
| | 02:44 | that offset if I want.
| | 02:45 | So I'll due 2 2/3". Press Enter.
| | 02:50 | When I apply that though you are
going to see it pop out from the wall.
| | 02:53 | So it turns out that I need a negative
in front, and then I Apply again and you
| | 02:58 | see it kind of bumps back in. It looks
like this is slightly thicker than that,
| | 03:01 | so if you want to fiddle
with that, number you can.
| | 03:03 | Setback is actually at the ends of the
wall, so I am going to leave that zero.
| | 03:06 | I don't want to do that.
| | 03:07 | Cuts Wall is kind of a nice feature
because you can see here that this profile
| | 03:12 | is actually going to cut a little
pocket for itself into the wall.
| | 03:15 | And then finally, I want to
check this Cuttable box here.
| | 03:18 | What that's going to do is if I have
any windows or doors that interrupt this
| | 03:22 | Soldier course, which is pretty likely at
6 feet off the floor, those windows and
| | 03:27 | doors will be able to interrupt this material.
| | 03:29 | So let's click OK, let's click
OK again, and see the result.
| | 03:33 | And what you'll see here is--
let me deselect that wall--
| | 03:37 | that band now wraps all the way around
the building everywhere that that wall
| | 03:42 | type was used, including
this location right up here.
| | 03:47 | So what I've done in the file ahead of
time was I just made a duplicate of that
| | 03:52 | wall type that I called No Sweep and we
can apply that one there and it's just
| | 03:57 | basically a copy of the original to
remove that sweep, because it's probably not
| | 04:00 | appropriate at that location.
| | 04:02 | So in your own projects you might
want to remember to do stuff like that.
| | 04:05 | Now, that's creating a sweep
that goes at the type level.
| | 04:09 | We can also create reveals.
| | 04:11 | You would create reveals in
exactly the same way as sweep, so in this
| | 04:14 | next example I am going to do a reveal, but
I am going to do it at the instance level.
| | 04:19 | But I just want you to know
that the two are interchangeable.
| | 04:21 | So if you want to add a reveal at the
type level, you can go back to Edit Type
| | 04:25 | and do it exactly the way we just
did for the sweep, and vice versa.
| | 04:28 | If you want to do a sweep applied wall
by wall, you can do it the same way we are
| | 04:33 | about to do here for reveals.
| | 04:35 | You use the dropdown under the Wall
tool and you scroll down here and here's
| | 04:40 | Wall sweep and here's Wall reveal.
| | 04:41 | Now if I pause for a minute and look
at the tooltip, you can kind of see the
| | 04:45 | illustration sort of shows
what a reveal is going to give me.
| | 04:48 | It's going to carve away from the wall.
| | 04:50 | So we are going to choose that and from
the list here there is only one choice.
| | 04:54 | It just says reveal, so I am just
going to accept that default, but if you
| | 04:57 | wanted to, you could choose Edit
Type and you could load in a different
| | 05:00 | profile and so forth. But for now I am
just going to accept that default there.
| | 05:05 | Here you can place it
either horizontally or vertically.
| | 05:08 | So let's go with Horizontal and I am
just simply going to click right here and
| | 05:13 | let's zoom in on that location.
And you can kind of see how that's sort of
| | 05:20 | embedded in the wall.
| | 05:21 | Now notice that I can add additional walls.
| | 05:23 | Now I am going to just add those two walls and
click Modify so that we can see what that did.
| | 05:27 | You see how that actually carved into the
wall and kind of made this very deep recess.
| | 05:33 | That's what the reveal does.
| | 05:34 | Now if we repeat the command,
we can also run these vertically.
| | 05:38 | You can't do that with the sweeps that we added,
or the reveals that we added, at the type level.
| | 05:43 | So you can only do this if you're
adding it at the instance level.
| | 05:47 | You can also say Restart, and that's what
allows you to go add it somewhere else.
| | 05:52 | So if you don't click Restart,
it just kind of continues from the one that
| | 05:56 | you were working on.
| | 05:57 | So each time you want to start a
new one you click Restart and then you
| | 06:00 | can click a new wall.
| | 06:02 | And so that's how you add
them at the instance level.
| | 06:05 | So both sweeps and reveals allow you
these opportunities to start customizing
| | 06:09 | the form of your walls with horizontal
bands and other treatments that give them
| | 06:14 | a little bit more architectural interest.
| | 06:16 | You can add them at the type level
like we did with the sweep or you can add
| | 06:20 | them at the instance level like we
did with the reveal. Both techniques are
| | 06:23 | interchangeable for both kinds of objects.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exploring model lines| 00:00 | In this movie, we're going
to look at model lines.
| | 00:02 | Model lines can be used for a variety of
things, and they are really a very simple object.
| | 00:06 | They are actually a two-dimensional object,
but as their name implies, they are considered
| | 00:11 | part of the model.
| | 00:13 | So even though it's two-dimensional linework,
it's going to show in any 3D view because
| | 00:18 | Revit thinks of it as part of the model.
| | 00:20 | So imagine that you're actually painting lines
on the wall and you have a pretty good idea
| | 00:25 | of what a model line is intended for.
| | 00:28 | The example I'm going to show you is using
a model line instead of actually modeling
| | 00:32 | three-dimensional geometry.
| | 00:33 | In the movie where we looked at sweeps and
reveals, we saw that a reveal could carve
| | 00:37 | away from the form of a wall. And it may be
tempting to use reveals for smaller-scale
| | 00:43 | details, things like control joints and
very small indentations in the wall.
| | 00:48 | And while it seems like a pretty good idea
at the time, on a small project you might be
| | 00:52 | able to get away with it, but in a larger
project the overhead that you start to introduce
| | 00:56 | to your model can really become a detriment,
because every time you create that three-dimensional
| | 01:02 | form in your model it's actually increasing
the overall size of the model and therefore
| | 01:08 | having the impact on the overall performance.
| | 01:10 | Furthermore, when it comes time to print
something like that, let's say I made a really small
| | 01:15 | reveal that was only about half an inch in size,
at an eighth-inch scale or even a quarter-
| | 01:19 | inch scale drawing,
| | 01:21 | those two edges of the reveal are going to be
so small and so close together that they're
| | 01:25 | going to just bleed together and appear like
one big fat line, and so you probably wouldn't
| | 01:29 | be satisfied with the graphics either.
| | 01:31 | So for those reasons, in situations like control
joints and other kinds of small-scale details,
| | 01:36 | you might want to consider using a model
line instead, and that's what we're going to do
| | 01:39 | here in this movie.
| | 01:40 | So I'm in a file called model lines, and if I
zoom in slightly, you can see that this is
| | 01:46 | just a brick wall.
| | 01:48 | Now the first thing I want to address is
you can see over here that the brick pattern
| | 01:53 | just sort of starts randomly. So I can fix
that easily enough with the Align command.
| | 01:57 | And I'm just going to pick the edge of the
wall here and then highlight any line on the
| | 02:01 | pattern, and that will shift
the entire brick pattern.
| | 02:04 | So that will help me get my control joints
placed a little bit more precisely, so that
| | 02:09 | shifts my brick pattern.
| | 02:10 | Now you can use this same technique to start
shifting the doors and windows if you want
| | 02:14 | to, to get them to all fall in the brick
dimension. I'll leave that up to you.
| | 02:18 | I'm going to go to the Architecture tab and
look for the Model Line tool right here.
| | 02:22 | And when I click on it, the first thing that
Revit will ask me is for a Work Plane.
| | 02:26 | Because I'm working in a non-plan view,
it can assume which plane I want to draw on,
| | 02:31 | so it's asking me where do you want to draw
these two-dimensional, basically, model lines?
| | 02:35 | So I'm going to use that Pick a plane option
that's it offering me here, click OK, and I
| | 02:39 | could just pick anywhere
on the face of this wall.
| | 02:43 | Now over here we get our
standard Draw toolbox.
| | 02:45 | You can draw model lines
in any shape you want.
| | 02:48 | In addition to that, you can assign a line
style, so you can make these dashed lines or
| | 02:52 | hidden lines, or really thin lines.
| | 02:54 | Now this default one just called Lines is
actually going to show up in green, so I'm
| | 02:58 | going to with that so that these become
really obvious. And you can change the line style
| | 03:02 | later if you want to.
| | 03:03 | I want to check all my other settings here.
| | 03:05 | I actually don't want Chain in this case, so I'm
going to turn that off, and I don't want an offset.
| | 03:10 | And what I'll do is just find one of my brick
pattern lines here and click, and click.
| | 03:16 | And it's just as simple as that, take this
temporary dimension, start dragging it, press the Tab
| | 03:21 | key to highlight the outside face.
| | 03:24 | That gives me the dimension right here.
And then maybe I want these control joints every 20 feet.
| | 03:29 | So I can put in 20 feet. That hit
the window, so let's go with 18 feet.
| | 03:34 | Now I can just copy it, pick my start point,
go another 18 feet, and I could keep going
| | 03:41 | down the face of the building.
| | 03:42 | Now as I said, I'm going to leave these with
the green line style right now, but you can
| | 03:47 | simply select them later and change the line
style if you have a different style. Perhaps
| | 03:51 | you might even create a line
style called Control Joints.
| | 03:54 | But what I want to show you is if you switch
to another view, those lines still display.
| | 03:59 | So that's the advantage of using a model line
is that it's still considered part of your
| | 04:04 | 3D model; however, if we zoom in nice and
close, it's really just a line painted on
| | 04:10 | the surface of the wall.
| | 04:11 | It didn't actually change the structure of
the wall in any way, and so it tends to be a
| | 04:16 | little bit lighter on the overhead department
than if you actually use a reveal or something.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Visibility and Graphic ControlsUsing object styles| 00:00 | As you work through your projects in Revit,
you will find times when you wish to change
| | 00:03 | the way that various elements
display onscreen and in your output.
| | 00:08 | There are various tools available in the
software to make such changes, both globally across
| | 00:12 | the entire project and in more
specific and isolated ways.
| | 00:15 | Each of the movies in this chapter we will explore
the topic with progressively more specificity.
| | 00:22 | We'll begin here in this movie with the global
project wide settings known as object styles.
| | 00:27 | So I'm in a file called Object Styles, and I'm
looking at a section cut through the building.
| | 00:31 | This is the longitudinal section.
| | 00:36 | Now I'm going to zoom in over here where the
floor slab meets the exterior wall, and what
| | 00:44 | you'll see here is this floor slab is using
kind of a light line weight and the exterior
| | 00:49 | wall is using a heavier, bolder line weight.
| | 00:52 | We could go in, in a variety of ways and
start to modify how that line weight is applied,
| | 00:58 | but if we opened up a different section, what we
would see is if we look at a similar condition,
| | 01:05 | we have exactly the same issue.
| | 01:07 | So the first place you want to look when making
changes to the graphics onscreen is, is there
| | 01:13 | a way that I can apply the change so that
it will apply everywhere and I won't have
| | 01:18 | to do it over and over again?
| | 01:20 | And it turns out that your overall Line
Weight settings are one of the few places that we
| | 01:24 | can do globally. Most settings in Revit are
actually view by view, but this particular
| | 01:28 | setting we can do globally.
| | 01:30 | So I'm going to go back to my Longitudinal
section, go to my Manage tab, and we're looking
| | 01:35 | for the Object Styles command.
Find the button right here.
| | 01:40 | In Object Styles you get a list of all of the
categories in your Revit project. And they're
| | 01:46 | grouped into a few different tabs, so we have our
model Objects tab and then several other tabs.
| | 01:51 | We're going to obvious focus here on Model
Objects, and here are all the model categories.
| | 01:56 | Now this is our floor element right here.
| | 01:59 | You can see that there's a Line Weight column
and that branches into two separate columns:
| | 02:03 | Projection and Cut.
| | 02:04 | And you can see that for floors we're using
the same Line Weight for both Projection and
| | 02:09 | Cut, a Line Weight 2.
| | 02:10 | Line Weight 2 is relatively fine, as you can see;
Line Weight 1 is our smallest line weight;
| | 02:15 | and then it goes up to actually Line Weight 16,
but it's rare that you would ever go that high.
| | 02:20 | You could see here that if you scroll through
this window, that about the thickest line weight
| | 02:25 | that's used is a pen weight 5, so that gives
you some idea of how rare it would be to go
| | 02:30 | to the higher numbers.
| | 02:32 | Now if I look down here at the wall item,
you can see that in Projection--now Projection
| | 02:37 | is when you're looking at
something, OK--and then you've got Cut.
| | 02:41 | That's when you're
actually slicing through it.
| | 02:43 | Now we're slicing through it here in the
background, so you could see that in Projection it's a
| | 02:48 | Pen weight 2, just like the Floor, but in Cut
it's using a much heavier pen weight, a pen
| | 02:52 | weight 4, and that's why we're seeing the bolder line
here. And we're still seeing a thin line for the floor.
| | 02:59 | So all I'm going to do here is scroll back up
to the Floor object and just simply change
| | 03:06 | its line weight to match what
we were doing with the wall.
| | 03:10 | Now while I'm here, I'm going to look at the Ceiling
object, and it really has kind of the same problem.
| | 03:15 | In fact, if I look over at this side,
you could see that there is a tiny little bold
| | 03:20 | element there, two little lines that are bold.
| | 03:23 | That's actually a very small wall. And so
that wall is cutting with a pen weight 4,
| | 03:27 | and the ceiling and the floor that it's
attached to are both using the pen weight 2 because
| | 03:32 | if we look at our Ceiling object,
it's got the same settings as the Floor.
| | 03:36 | So why don't we change that
one to a pen weight 4 as well?
| | 03:39 | Now when I make both of those changes and I
click OK, suddenly the outline of the floors
| | 03:45 | and ceilings looks a lot bolder,
| | 03:46 | it has a lot more punch, and it seems to fit in
a lot better with the surrounding geometry.
| | 03:51 | The nice thing about the Object Styles
feature is, if I go back to the transverse section,
| | 03:57 | it's already applied here as well.
| | 03:59 | So anytime you can get away with doing something
at the object styles level it's always preferable
| | 04:04 | because that change gets applied
globally throughout the project in every view.
| | 04:09 | So everything starts with object styles
and then we start modifying from there.
| | 04:14 | And in the next several movies, we'll look
at a variety of ways that we can modify from there.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with visibility and graphic overrides| 00:00 | There are many instances when you'll have a need
to control the way things display onscreen.
| | 00:04 | In the previous movie we looked at the
Object Styles command, which allowed us to change
| | 00:08 | global settings like the line weight, or we
could change actually the color or the Line
| | 00:13 | styles in that dialog as well, but
surprisingly, we can't use that method to actually hide
| | 00:18 | and show objects.
| | 00:19 | Now there are plenty of times when you might
actually just want to hide something. Maybe
| | 00:23 | I need to show a furniture plan and that's
going to show one set of objects, and then
| | 00:28 | I need to show a separate power or equipment plan
and it's going to show some different objects.
| | 00:33 | So to turn things on and off, I actually have
to use a different method, and so in this movie
| | 00:37 | we're going to look at the Visibility Graphic
Overrides feature. And this is a view-specific modification,
| | 00:43 | so any changes I make here won't be global.
| | 00:45 | They will actually apply only to the view
that I am in. And I'm in a file here called
| | 00:49 | Visibility/Graphics, and I'm
looking at Level 1 floor plan.
| | 00:53 | So when I demonstrate this, we will see that any of
these changes will only apply here in level 1.
| | 00:58 | Let's take a quick look.
| | 00:59 | I'm going to come up here on the View tab
and click the Visibility/Graphics button, and
| | 01:04 | you'll see it has a shortcut--V+G--and often people
will actually refer to this as the V+G dialog,
| | 01:09 | because it's used so frequently.
| | 01:11 | Let's do a really simple example here.
| | 01:12 | I'm going to kind of move
this box out of the way.
| | 01:14 | You can see I have a few
doors here in the background.
| | 01:16 | This box looks a lot like the Object Styles.
| | 01:19 | It has the same tabs.
It has the same categories listed here.
| | 01:22 | Obviously, there is more columns, and we'll
look at some of those, but the checkbox over
| | 01:26 | here was not present in Object Styles, and
this allows us to check and uncheck the various
| | 01:32 | objects that we want to hide and show.
| | 01:34 | So for example, if I decided to uncheck the
doors and click the Apply button right here,
| | 01:39 | what you'll see is all the doors in
the background there disappeared.
| | 01:41 | Now I can't think of too many good reasons why
I'd want to hide the doors in a floor plan,
| | 01:46 | so that was really more of an example.
| | 01:47 | So I'm going to check the box again and
click Apply again to turn them back on.
| | 01:52 | Maybe I want to do
something a little more practical.
| | 01:54 | If you look over on this side of the plan,
you can see here in the background I have
| | 01:57 | some furniture and I have
some electrical outlets.
| | 02:01 | So perhaps I have a need to show the furniture
sometimes and other times to show the electrical outlets.
| | 02:06 | Well, I could hide my Electrical Fixtures
category, print out my drawing, I could come
| | 02:11 | back, turn those back on again, hide my
Furniture category, come back print the drawing.
| | 02:16 | That would be kind of an
inefficient way to work.
| | 02:18 | What we typically do instead in Revit is we
typically duplicate the view and then set
| | 02:24 | up two different views two different ways,
and this is leveraging the feature that I
| | 02:27 | mentioned to you moment ago that anything
we do in Visibility/Graphics only affects
| | 02:32 | the current view.
So let me demonstrate.
| | 02:34 | So here is Level 1 floor plan.
| | 02:35 | I'm going to right-click it right on the
project browser, and I am going to go to Duplicate
| | 02:39 | View. And we actually have three
different ways that we can do that.
| | 02:42 | I'm going to demonstrate the first two; these
are the ones you're going to use most frequently.
| | 02:47 | If we choose just duplicate, we get a version of
the view that removes all of the view-specific
| | 02:54 | elements: all the text, all
the dimensions, all the tags.
| | 02:58 | So you could see here all I see is geometry.
| | 03:00 | If I go back to Level 1, notice I have the door
tags and the room tags and the dimensions still.
| | 03:07 | Right-click it again and I
do Duplicate with detailing.
| | 03:10 | This time I'll get an exact copy of
this view, including all the annotation.
| | 03:15 | Now I'm going to right-click that Copy (2)
of Level 1 and I'm going to rename it, and
| | 03:21 | I'm going to remove the Copy (2) portion, leave it Level
1, and I'm going to write Furniture Plan at the end.
| | 03:28 | So this is my Level 1 Furniture Plan.
| | 03:30 | So what I want to do in this particular plan is I
want to configure it to show me only furniture.
| | 03:36 | Now you're going to deal with the annotation
elements in a view differently than you are
| | 03:40 | going to with the model elements.
| | 03:41 | We're going to use VG, Visibility Graphics,
to control the model elements and annotation
| | 03:46 | elements, you're just going to
delete and add them as necessary.
| | 03:49 | So what I'm going to do here is make a window
selection around the entire floor plan. That
| | 03:54 | highlights everything.
Go up to my Filter selection.
| | 03:58 | I'm going to click Check None, because you
can see I have quite a few categories selected.
| | 04:02 | And I'm going to select only the door tags,
the dimensions, and the window tags.
| | 04:09 | So I'm going to select those
three categories. Click OK.
| | 04:13 | You'll notice it only highlights those
elements, and I'll just simply delete those.
| | 04:17 | Now I'm getting a message here about a
constraint that's applied to one of my dimensions.
| | 04:21 | It's offering to either unconstrain
them or I can just simply click OK.
| | 04:25 | I don't actually want to
remove the constraint,
| | 04:27 | so I'm just simply going to click OK.
| | 04:29 | Now even though I deleted the dimensions and
the tags from this view, if I go back to Level
| | 04:35 | 1 floor plan, you'll see they're still here.
| | 04:37 | It's very important to understand
that each view has its own annotation.
| | 04:41 | So that takes care of the annotation
aspect, but what about the visibility?
| | 04:45 | As we've said, perhaps the furniture plan doesn't
want to see things like these electrical outlets.
| | 04:50 | Maybe I want to just limit
it to just the furniture.
| | 04:53 | So to do that I need to
use Visibility Graphics.
| | 04:57 | So I'm going to go to VG.
| | 04:58 | I just type VG on my keyboard, and I need to
locate those categories that I don't want
| | 05:02 | to see here in this furniture plan.
| | 05:05 | So I'm going to Uncheck electrical fixtures,
and let's click Apply, and you'll see that
| | 05:10 | all of the outlets in the
light switches disappear.
| | 05:14 | So that's the effect I was looking for.
| | 05:15 | I'll click OK and that
completes my furniture plan.
| | 05:19 | Now I can take this furniture plan and I
can use it to generate a second copy.
| | 05:24 | I am going to duplicate again, again with
Detailing, but this time I'm duplicating from
| | 05:28 | my furniture plan.
| | 05:30 | So I'll do Duplicate with Detailing.
| | 05:33 | Select it and rename it.
| | 05:35 | This one is going to be
Level 1 Power Plan. Click OK.
| | 05:42 | The difference I want here is now I want to
see the electrical fixtures and maybe I don't
| | 05:48 | want to see the furniture.
| | 05:49 | So I'm going to go to VG, turn back on the
electrical fixtures, and I can turn off the furniture.
| | 05:56 | Now when I do that,
maybe that's the view I'm after.
| | 05:59 | You could see that it's a
little bit cleaner there.
| | 06:01 | Of course, going back to Level
1, everything is still here.
| | 06:04 | So this doesn't remove things from the model;
| | 06:06 | it just simply hides them in that view.
| | 06:09 | Maybe I change my mind in the power plan
and I actually want to see the furniture;
| | 06:12 | I just don't want it as intense.
| | 06:13 | So I show you one more feature here.
| | 06:16 | We've been limiting our discussion here to
the Visibility column, but there's lots of
| | 06:19 | other columns over here.
| | 06:21 | I'm not going to go through every one, but if
we look over here at the far right, we have
| | 06:25 | a column here called Halftone.
| | 06:27 | So perhaps instead I want to turn the
furniture back on, but I want a halftone instead.
| | 06:33 | This will be the effect that I'll get.
| | 06:35 | The furniture will redisplay, but it'll
display much lighter so that it's maybe not quite
| | 06:40 | so overpowering for the power plan.
| | 06:42 | So you have a few different ways that you can
decide to set things up, but the Visibility
| | 06:46 | Graphics command is this powerful command
that's going to allow you to create very focused
| | 06:51 | and specialized views that are
specific to the needs at hand.
| | 06:55 | So using it, I can turn things on and off or
change the way they graphically display, keeping
| | 07:00 | in mind that those changes
only apply to the active view.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using view templates| 00:00 | So Visibility Graphics gives us a way to
modify what we're seeing on a view-by-view basis,
| | 00:05 | and as we saw in the previous movie, it can be a
very powerful way for us to manage different
| | 00:09 | kinds of views. But what do you do in a
situation where you have a project that has lots of
| | 00:14 | views that are similar to one another?
| | 00:15 | Maybe you're not in a one-storey
building; maybe it's a ten-storey building.
| | 00:18 | So whatever changes you make to the level
one floor plan you might want to see similar
| | 00:22 | changes in levels two and three and four.
| | 00:24 | Likewise, if you have a furniture plan for
level one, you might want the furniture plans
| | 00:28 | on the upper levels to display the same way.
| | 00:30 | In cases like that, we have a feature called
View Templates. And all a View Template does
| | 00:35 | is it captures all of the settings you've
applied to a view, saves them under a name,
| | 00:40 | and then you can apply those
settings to other similar views.
| | 00:43 | So let's have a look.
| | 00:44 | I'm here in a file called View Template,
and I'm looking at the level one floor plan.
| | 00:48 | I'm going to zoom in just a little bit.
And what I've got here is the type that's being
| | 00:54 | used for the floor slabs has been changed to a
four-inch concrete slab, and as a consequence,
| | 01:00 | it's now showing all of this
concrete stipple pattern on the floor.
| | 01:05 | Now, that might be appropriate if you were
looking at the concrete in an elevation view,
| | 01:09 | but when you look at it in a floor plan that
usually makes things a little too busy, and
| | 01:13 | probably it's not desirable.
| | 01:14 | So what I want to do is I want
to hide that stipple pattern.
| | 01:17 | Now, I don't want to change the material of the
floors, because they're made out of concrete
| | 01:23 | and if I change the material, it's going to
change everywhere and it's going to throw
| | 01:26 | off calculations.
| | 01:27 | I don't want to actually hide floor slabs,
because as you'll see, you see this patio out here,
| | 01:32 | I want to see the edge still.
| | 01:34 | So if I go to Visibility Graphics--I'm going
to type VG for that--and if I tried to hide
| | 01:39 | the floor slab, that's not to do the trick,
because it's going to actually hide the entire
| | 01:44 | floor slab, and that's not what I want.
| | 01:46 | So I'm going to turn the floors back on again.
| | 01:48 | So I need a different approach here.
| | 01:50 | Well, when we select a category here in
Visibility Graphics, there is lots of columns in between
| | 01:56 | that we can manipulate here.
| | 01:57 | There's lots of other settings
other than just on and off.
| | 02:00 | We've got Projection and we've got Cut.
| | 02:03 | When you're looking at an object you're seeing
Projection settings; when you're cutting through
| | 02:07 | it you're seeing the Cut settings.
| | 02:08 | In this case I'm looking at the floor slabs,
so it's the Projection settings I'm interested in.
| | 02:14 | I can modify the Lines, the
Patterns, or the Transparency.
| | 02:18 | So in this case it's the pattern I'm
interested in, because I'm looking at the stippling.
| | 02:22 | So I'm going to click the Override button
here in the Patterns column, and it turns out
| | 02:26 | they have a visibility check
box just for the pattern.
| | 02:31 | So I'm going to click that to turn
that off, click OK, and then apply that.
| | 02:36 | So that does exactly the trick.
| | 02:38 | So now the stipple pattern is hidden and you could
see it here; it's confirmed with the word hidden.
| | 02:43 | Let's click OK. Now the trouble is, if I go up to level
two, we still see the stipple pattern.
| | 02:48 | So I could repeat the same steps and it wasn't
that hard to do, but let's just say for the
| | 02:53 | sake of argument that I had done several
settings here in level one, and I've got lots of floor
| | 02:58 | plans and I don't want to have to keep
doing the same settings over and over again.
| | 03:01 | So this is where my View
Template comes into play.
| | 03:04 | So I go to the View tab and I locate the View
Templates dropdown, and I'm going to create
| | 03:09 | a view template from the current view.
| | 03:12 | It'll ask for a name.
| | 03:13 | I'll call this standard floor plan. Click OK.
| | 03:19 | The View Templates dialog will appear,
and on the right-hand side you can see there is
| | 03:23 | a vast list of items that are
being captured in this View Template,
| | 03:27 | so it's not just the Visibility Graphic overrides
that we applied to the model--that's right here;
| | 03:32 | it's everything about this view.
| | 03:34 | It's scale, it's display
settings, and so on--everything.
| | 03:38 | So I'm going to click OK, and now I want
to apply that view template to level two.
| | 03:44 | So I'll double-click level two and if you
look over here on the Properties palette--and
| | 03:49 | make sure you don't have anything selected
so that you're seeing floor plan at the top
| | 03:52 | and make sure it says Level
2 Floor Plan. Scroll down.
| | 03:56 | There is the View Template setting right there
under Identity Data. Click that None button
| | 04:01 | and assign that to a standard floor plan.
| | 04:04 | Click OK and the stipple hatch disappears.
| | 04:07 | So that's a really simple example.
| | 04:09 | Let's do one more.
Suppose I had my power plan from a previous movie.
| | 04:15 | So here we were talking about creating a special
set of settings specifically for power plans.
| | 04:20 | So let's create a view template from this.
| | 04:21 | So I'm going to Create, and I'm going to
call this type Power Plan. Click OK, verify all
| | 04:30 | the settings, click OK again, scroll down here,
assign that to this view, and I've created
| | 04:39 | a power plan here for Level 2.
Apply the view template.
| | 04:46 | Now that I look at this a little more carefully
and it dawns on me, wait a minute. I was supposed
| | 04:49 | to halftone my furniture
here in my power plan.
| | 04:52 | One of the major advantages of the View Template--
and this is new in 2013--is that we can go
| | 04:57 | in and edit the view template and the changes will
immediately apply to any view that uses that template.
| | 05:04 | So I'm going to go here to the View tab, go
to the View Templates dropdown, and choose
| | 05:09 | Manage View Templates.
| | 05:11 | Scroll down. Locate my typical power plan.
| | 05:14 | I can modify any of the settings I
like over on the right-hand side.
| | 05:18 | In this case, it's the visibility graphic
overrides for model that I'm interested in,
| | 05:22 | so I'll click the Edit button, locate my
furniture, and I want to check that halftone box.
| | 05:29 | Really simple change. Let's click OK.
| | 05:31 | I'm going to click OK again, and you're going
to see that immediately applies not only here
| | 05:36 | in Level 2, but if I go back to Level 1,
it's applied here as well, because both of those
| | 05:41 | views are using that same view template.
| | 05:44 | So if I had a 30-storey building and I made that
change, I've already applied it across all 30 storeys.
| | 05:50 | So that's the real benefit and
utility of the View Templates.
| | 05:54 | I've provided a furniture plan
for you to experiment with,
| | 05:57 | so feel free to continue on in this file and
play around with this a little bit more.
| | 06:01 | But the View Template command is a very powerful
tool that allows us to start managing our
| | 06:06 | settings across multiple views throughout
the project, and it's really handy as your
| | 06:11 | projects begin to grow in size.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Hiding and isolating objects in a model| 00:00 | As your models become more complex, it can be
difficult to see and edit certain elements
| | 00:03 | from time to time.
| | 00:05 | In a previous movie, we saw that we can use
visibility graphic overrides to hide elements
| | 00:09 | at the category level.
| | 00:10 | Sometimes, however, you simply need to hide
elements temporarily, or you want to hide individual
| | 00:16 | particular elements in a certain view.
| | 00:18 | So in this movie we're going to look
at two ways that we can hide stuff:
| | 00:21 | we can hide things using the temporary Hide
command or we can hide things in a more permanent
| | 00:26 | fashion, but we can do them object by object.
| | 00:29 | So again, in our exploration of visibility
settings, moving our way from the most global
| | 00:34 | down to the most specific, we're starting to now
hone in on things that are much more specifically
| | 00:39 | focused on very particular situations.
| | 00:41 | So I'm in a view here called Hide Isolate,
and I'm going to start with the temporary
| | 00:46 | Hide Isolate command.
| | 00:48 | Let's say that I want to do some
work down in the foundation level.
| | 00:50 | You can see that if I move my mouse around
here, I can get those walls to highlight, but
| | 00:55 | it's going to be a little difficult to work on them
because I've got this big site plan in the way.
| | 01:00 | This is a great job for
the Temporary Hide command.
| | 01:03 | All I have to do is select this object--and
of course the entire object selects because
| | 01:07 | it's a linked Revit model--and down here on
the View control bar there is this little icon
| | 01:12 | that looks like sunglasses.
| | 01:14 | We have actually looked at this in a few
other movies. And there are several options here.
| | 01:19 | I can hide just the element I have
selected and it will do just that.
| | 01:22 | In this case, it will hide the linked file.
Or I can actually hide the category, and I
| | 01:28 | could show you an example of that in just a
moment. But let's do the Hide Element first,
| | 01:32 | and what you'll see is the object disappears.
| | 01:35 | You get this cyan-colored border around your
screen, and it tells you that you're in temporary
| | 01:40 | Hide Isolate mode.
| | 01:42 | This is a temporary mode, meaning that if
you close the file right now and reopen it,
| | 01:47 | it will reset all the temporary Hide Isolate.
| | 01:49 | If you were to print out this view or any
other view, the effect would not be applied;
| | 01:53 | it would restore any hidden elements.
| | 01:56 | So the intention of this mode is simply for
you to be able to go in here; get a better
| | 02:01 | look at the geometry that you want to work on so
that you can select it, make your modifications;
| | 02:06 | and then when you're done you choose reset
Temporary Hide Isolate and the objects come back.
| | 02:11 | Let me just show you a couple of other quick
examples using the other options on that menu.
| | 02:16 | Here is a column right here.
| | 02:18 | If I select it and I go to Hide
Element, it only hides the one column.
| | 02:23 | Let me undo that.
| | 02:24 | If I use the Hide Category instead then it
does exactly that: it hides the entire category.
| | 02:31 | But again, this is a
temporary hide that I've just done.
| | 02:34 | It only applies in the current work session.
| | 02:37 | Let's go to the sunglasses and reset that.
| | 02:41 | Isolate is the opposite.
| | 02:43 | So if I had the same column selected and I use
either Isolate Element or Isolate Category--
| | 02:50 | let's do Isolate Category--
| | 02:52 | it hides everything that's not a column.
| | 02:56 | So whatever you have selected is the only
thing that displays, and everything else gets
| | 03:00 | hidden. And again, it's a temporary.
| | 03:02 | So let's reset that.
| | 03:04 | So those are temporary Hide Isolate modes.
| | 03:06 | You can do that when you just need to get a
better look. And you'll actually find yourself
| | 03:09 | using that quite a bit. Sometimes something is just
in the way and you just need to get some work done.
| | 03:14 | So I'm going to come over to the project
browser and I'm going to go to the Level 21 Floor
| | 03:17 | Plan--open that up--and let me show you an
example where you might want to hide something
| | 03:21 | individually, but you want to do it on a
permanent basis instead of a temporary basis.
| | 03:25 | You see how I have several
section lines on the screen.
| | 03:29 | We could use the Visibility Graphics command
that we looked at in a previous movie and
| | 03:32 | we could hide the section lines if
we wanted to. Easy enough to do.
| | 03:36 | The trouble is they'll all be hidden.
| | 03:38 | Well, I've got this one section line here at
the front of the building that I was using
| | 03:42 | just to draw my curtain wall, and I don't
want that to be there in my drawings kind
| | 03:46 | of cluttering things up, or I
certainly don't want it to be printed.
| | 03:49 | So I want to hide that, but I
don't want to hide the others.
| | 03:53 | So this is an example where if you have an
individual object like this section line that
| | 03:57 | just for whatever reason needs to be hidden in
this view, you can hide just it. And unlike
| | 04:03 | the temporary hide,
this will be a permanent hide.
| | 04:06 | So you select the object, and up here on the
Modify tab there is little light bulb icon.
| | 04:11 | And if I choose Hide Category,
that's just another way to get to VG.
| | 04:16 | So instead of going to VG and
unchecking the box, this will do it for me.
| | 04:20 | And if I chose that, you can see
all the section lines go away.
| | 04:22 | So let me undo that.
| | 04:23 | What I'm going to do instead is go to the
light bulb and say I want to hide just this element.
| | 04:29 | Now that element will disappear
and all the other sections remain.
| | 04:33 | Let me show you another example.
| | 04:34 | Here is a foundation plan.
| | 04:35 | Now I'm looking at this. It looks OK, but I
see that there this is little thing here
| | 04:40 | in the middle. I'm not
quite sure what that is.
| | 04:42 | Let me zoom in just a
touch here. What is that?
| | 04:45 | How did that get there?
| | 04:46 | Well, you know, if I investigate further,
I find out that that is actually this opening
| | 04:52 | object here in the break room, and for whatever
reason, based on some other settings or what
| | 04:57 | have you, it's showing
here in the foundation plan.
| | 04:59 | Now I have a few ways I could deal with that.
| | 05:01 | I could go investigate that family and try
and figure out why it's showing, or look at
| | 05:04 | some other settings, but sometimes it's easier
to just say that doesn't need to be here in
| | 05:10 | the foundation plan view,
| | 05:11 | so I'm simply going to hide it.
| | 05:13 | So I go to the Hide Element again, choose
that, and just like that, it disappears, and
| | 05:19 | it didn't take a lot of effort to do that.
| | 05:21 | Now in either case, the only potential danger
here is, how do you know something is hidden?
| | 05:26 | How do I get it back if I
wanted to get it back again,
| | 05:28 | if for whatever reason I want to get that opening
back? Or let's say that I changed my mind here
| | 05:32 | on Level 1 and I decided that I
want to print that section after all.
| | 05:38 | So down here on the view control bar, right
next to the sunglasses, is this little
| | 05:42 | tiny light bulb, and this
is Reveal Hidden Elements.
| | 05:45 | I'm going to click that. And instead of the cyan
border this time I get a reddish-color border.
| | 05:50 | It says Reveal Hidden Elements, and anything
that's previously been hidden will display
| | 05:54 | here in that same reddish color.
| | 05:56 | I can select it, and up here on the ribbon
I could say I want to unhide that element.
| | 06:01 | And then using either this button here or
the light bulb again, I can turn off the Reveal
| | 06:06 | mode, and the object comes back.
| | 06:08 | So in both cases when you do the
permanent hide, it's exactly that;
| | 06:13 | it's a permanent hide.
| | 06:14 | The object stays hidden until you go to
Reveal mode and bring it back again.
| | 06:19 | It won't print and if you close
the project, it'll come back again.
| | 06:22 | Contrast that to any of the
ones on the sunglasses pop-up.
| | 06:26 | Those are all temporary.
| | 06:27 | They only apply in the current work session.
| | 06:29 | You typically use those when you just want
to get something out of the way so that you
| | 06:33 | can get some work done and then
you'll turn them back on again.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding view range| 00:00 | Orthographic views in Revit are generated
from the 3D model using a variety of rules
| | 00:04 | derived from conventional
architectural drafting.
| | 00:06 | When it comes to plan views, architectural
drafting convention treats a plan as basically
| | 00:10 | a horizontal section, cutting the building
at a predetermined height above the floor
| | 00:14 | and looking down into the model.
| | 00:15 | Naturally, there are many other rules and
abstractions applied to the graphics to achieve
| | 00:19 | an acceptable floor plan;
| | 00:21 | however, the concept of the cut plan
is used quite literally in Revit.
| | 00:24 | In this movie we're going to look at the View
Range feature, which incorporates the cut plane
| | 00:28 | and a few other settings. And I'm in a file here
called View Range in order for us to do that.
| | 00:33 | So I'm looking at the Level 1 Floor Plan view, and it has
all of the default View Range settings applied to it.
| | 00:40 | Now let's start with where we
can find the View Range settings.
| | 00:43 | So if you look at your Properties palette
and make sure it says Floor Plan over here
| | 00:48 | and scroll down, and under the Extents
grouping, you will find the View Range with an Edit
| | 00:54 | button. Click that, and what you'll
see is a series of four settings here.
| | 01:00 | Now at the top of the dialog it says the
primary range and then below that it says you've got
| | 01:04 | the view depth, and we're going to
focus on the primary range for right now.
| | 01:08 | You can see that the cut plane is
established at four feet above the floor.
| | 01:12 | Now, all of these are set to the current level,
| | 01:15 | so these are all associated to level one,
which seems pretty standard, pretty acceptable.
| | 01:20 | The bottom of the view range is at 0,
| | 01:23 | so we're only seeing down to the floor itself,
Level 1 floor itself, and we can potentially
| | 01:28 | see up as high as 7'6" foot above the floor.
| | 01:32 | Now let me show you this another way.
| | 01:34 | I'm going to cancel out of there, and I'm going
to open up the east elevation. And I'm going
| | 01:40 | to zoom in over here.
| | 01:41 | I've drawn some lines here, just to kind of
illustrate. And these lines are actually drawn
| | 01:45 | relative to the second floor, because
we're going to look at an example up there.
| | 01:49 | So here's the situation
where we have a tall wall.
| | 01:52 | This is the second-floor level,
and there is that line right there.
| | 01:57 | That big heavy line represents that four
feet above that we just saw in the dialog.
| | 02:01 | So that represents where the cut plane is.
| | 02:03 | So that's going to capture
these two windows right here.
| | 02:06 | Revit kind of says this is the
primary range, in this area.
| | 02:09 | This reddish color line, there is the 7'6",
which means we wouldn't see anything
| | 02:13 | above that point, which means these three
windows here are not being seen at all.
| | 02:18 | They are outside of the view range.
| | 02:21 | Now I've draw another line here at 12 feet.
| | 02:24 | So what I want to illustrate is, if we start
modifying the settings in the view range, we
| | 02:28 | can actually tell Revit that rather than
cutting through these windows, I'd rather have it
| | 02:32 | cut through these.
| | 02:34 | So let's open up the
floor plan that shows this.
| | 02:37 | That's actually Level 2. And we're in this
general area over here, and you can see that
| | 02:45 | we're cutting through those two slider windows
right now that we just saw in the elevation,
| | 02:48 | because we're cutting at 4 feet.
| | 02:50 | So let's scroll down over
here, locate the View Range.
| | 02:54 | Let's move this out of the way a little bit.
And I'm going to change this to 12, like we
| | 03:00 | just saw in the illustration.
| | 03:01 | Now I should point out one other thing.
| | 03:03 | If I try and click OK here, I'll get an error
message that says I've got an error that the
| | 03:08 | top of the clip plane is below the cut plane.
| | 03:10 | These numbers have to be in order.
| | 03:12 | So let me close that.
| | 03:14 | This is your highest number;
this is your lowest number.
| | 03:16 | Now notice they can be the same,
but they just can't get out of order.
| | 03:20 | So that means that my top of view range has to be
at lease 12 feet, or it could be taller than that.
| | 03:25 | So in this case I'll just
go ahead and make it 14.
| | 03:27 | I'm just making up a number. And let's
click Apply and you'll see what happens.
| | 03:32 | Notice that we're now cutting through
those smaller windows that are up above.
| | 03:36 | Now I can't zoom while this box is open,
| | 03:38 | so let me OK out of there and kind of move
around here. And notice that that may have
| | 03:43 | taken care of the windows, but it kind of
caused some trouble elsewhere in the plan,
| | 03:47 | where we're not seeing the doors anymore,
we're not seeing any of these other windows,
| | 03:51 | because at a 12-foot cut height we're just
much too tall now to see any of these objects.
| | 03:56 | There is stuff in the way.
These walls are in the way and other things.
| | 04:00 | So I'm to undo that change, like so,
to get back to a more suitable floor plan.
| | 04:05 | If I actually wanted to see those windows up above
and still maintain the rest of the floor plan,
| | 04:12 | then I have a feature here called a
plan region that I can use instead.
| | 04:17 | So I'm going to come over here to the Modify tab,
click on the dropdown, and create a plan region.
| | 04:24 | Now when I create this, you've got some different
shapes, and I'm just going to do a simple rectangle.
| | 04:29 | And I'm going to do it, just trying remember
exactly where those windows are. I think they
| | 04:32 | are right about there, just about
like that. And I'm going to finish that.
| | 04:37 | So I got an error.
| | 04:38 | Revit is telling me that I have boundaries
overlapping, and you might notice here in orange
| | 04:42 | the offending boundary.
| | 04:44 | So I actually already had a plan region in
this file, and the two can't overlap is what
| | 04:49 | this message saying.
| | 04:50 | So I can either delete the element or what
I'm going to do is cancel, because delete
| | 04:54 | doesn't seem like a very good thing to do.
And I'll just modify this slightly so that
| | 04:59 | they're not overlapping
anymore, and click Finish.
| | 05:02 | Now what this does right here is it gives me a View
Range button that applies just within that rectangle.
| | 05:09 | So I'm going to click that.
And it's the same exact settings.
| | 05:13 | so let's go with 14 feet, let's go with 12
feet, let's click OK, and now you'll see that
| | 05:19 | we get the smaller windows, but it's only
in that small, little area right there.
| | 05:23 | Now it looks I've got some fine-tuning to do,
because it's kind of cutting this wall
| | 05:26 | in a funny way, but notice I get some grips
here, so I can just go. Oh, let's just do that,
| | 05:30 | and that looks a little bit better.
| | 05:32 | Then with respect to these overlapping ones,
if you really needed to see it here, you just
| | 05:37 | have to be a little bit more careful
about how you draw your sketches.
| | 05:40 | Now, why do I have this one over here?
| | 05:42 | Well, if we zoom out over here,
this one surrounds the lower roof.
| | 05:47 | Here is the lower roof and if I didn't have
this here--let me just delete it--you'll notice
| | 05:52 | the way the roof looks.
| | 05:53 | It's actually being cut through, because the
four-foot cut plane hits partway through the roof.
| | 05:58 | So I'm going to undo that, select this, look
at its view range, and you could see that
| | 06:03 | by raising the view range just around the roof
area, I can get it to display up above the ridge.
| | 06:10 | If we look at the east elevation,
that might be a little bit more clear.
| | 06:14 | So let's zoom out a little bit.
| | 06:15 | Here's the 4 feet.
| | 06:17 | So if we left it alone, you can see how it
cuts through the roof, and that's why the roof
| | 06:22 | didn't display so well. But when we move it
up above, then we're looking down on the roof
| | 06:26 | when we see it more correctly.
| | 06:28 | So that's the primary reason you would go into
either View Range or Plan Region, is because
| | 06:33 | you want to manipulate this Cut Plane feature.
| | 06:37 | So most of the time you'll be using the View Range
dialog to manipulate the cut plane in some way.
| | 06:42 | There are, however, a few
other settings in there,
| | 06:45 | so we'll save those for the next movie.
| | 06:47 | You use the Cut Plan feature in the View
Range dialog to determine where your floor plans
| | 06:51 | are being cut from.
| | 06:53 | If you can't find a setting that works for
the entire floor plan, then we have our Plan
| | 06:58 | Region feature, which allows us to create a
small, little specialized area of the floor
| | 07:02 | plan that has a different cut plane
than the rest of the floor plan.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Displaying objects above and below in plan views| 00:00 | Continue our exploration of the View Range
dialog, in the previous movie we focused on
| | 00:04 | the Cut Plane and how we could manipulate that.
| | 00:08 | But we often want to customize our floor plans
and control the way that objects either above
| | 00:13 | or below display.
| | 00:15 | So in this movie I'd like to look at how we
can ensure that objects above the view range
| | 00:21 | or below the view range
display in the way that we'd like.
| | 00:24 | Now, I'm going to start in this file called
Above Below, and I'm going to start in the
| | 00:30 | kitchen area, the break room area over here,
and just do a really common example of something
| | 00:37 | that occurs up above.
| | 00:39 | The rules of the View Range say that if you
are either intersecting the cut plane or below
| | 00:46 | the cut plane, that you'll display as long as you're
above the bottom of the View Range. Let me explain.
| | 00:54 | Scroll down. Click on the View Range button.
| | 00:58 | Essentially, what I've just said is, any object
that appears between here and here will display.
| | 01:05 | You could see that that's actually a
pretty thin slice through our floor plan.
| | 01:08 | In this case it's only a little 4-foot
slice through the floor plan that will capture
| | 01:13 | all the objects we're seeing.
| | 01:15 | Now, the object doesn't have to
completely be contained within that 4 feet.
| | 01:20 | It just simply has to intersect that band.
| | 01:23 | So if an object starts a little bit below 0
but intersects the range, or starts somewhere
| | 01:29 | here and goes taller than 4 feet, that's OK;
| | 01:33 | in fact, we call that cut.
| | 01:35 | So if you think about all of your walls,
all of our walls are much taller than 4 feet,
| | 01:40 | but we're seeing them bold because they
happen to be cut through at 4 feet.
| | 01:45 | If a wall was completely above 4 feet--so if
I took this wall and I took its base offset
| | 01:53 | and maybe I put that at 6 feet or something--
that wall will disappear, because it's completely
| | 02:01 | outside of that 4-foot slice that was allowed.
| | 02:04 | I'm going to undo that.
| | 02:06 | Now, there are a few exceptions to this.
| | 02:09 | There are three categories in particular in
Revit that will actually display in this range
| | 02:18 | up here, between 4 foot and 7'6".
| | 02:22 | Those three categories are
generic models, casework, and windows.
| | 02:28 | I'll show you a quick example with casework,
because that's a pretty common occurrence.
| | 02:31 | Let's say I wanted to hang some
cabinetry on this wall over here.
| | 02:34 | I'm going to go to the
Architecture tab, go to the Component tool.
| | 02:39 | Right here I've got an upper
cabinet double wall loaded.
| | 02:43 | You can choose whatever size you want.
| | 02:44 | It doesn't really matter.
I'll pick a 36-inch-wide size.
| | 02:47 | This is a wall-based component,
so I have to highlight a wall.
| | 02:51 | But notice that when I highlight this wall
and place it, I see the element. But if I were
| | 02:58 | to open up this section, that element
is clearly taller than the 4 feet.
| | 03:05 | So it's clearly above the cut plane--
| | 03:12 | there is our cut plane--but it's
within that 7'6" range right there.
| | 03:19 | Now if I took one of these cabinets and I moved it up--
and I'm going to move it up just about there--
| | 03:26 | so you could see the ceiling is in the way,
but it's still in the room, but it's just
| | 03:30 | above that 7'6", then it will fail to
display, unless of course I went into my View
| | 03:37 | Range and increased the height of
the top and then it would redisplay.
| | 03:44 | So two things have to happen for
objects to display above the cut plane.
| | 03:48 | They have to be one of those three categories--
generic model, window, or casework--and they
| | 03:54 | have to be within that zone up above.
| | 03:57 | Now, what about the other direction,
| | 03:59 | down here? Currently, it says 0 and 0.
| | 04:02 | So really this zone in here is kind of a
moot point, because there is no zone there;
| | 04:07 | both of the numbers are the same. But if you
change those numbers such that you end up
| | 04:10 | with a zone there, there is another very
specific set of rules that apply, and the best way
| | 04:16 | I can describe this--I'm
going to cancel out here.
| | 04:18 | I'm going to open a different view.
| | 04:19 | I'm going to go here to my foundation view.
| | 04:22 | Now I happened to be zoomed into the same part
of the floor plan, but you could see I've
| | 04:25 | got foundation wall here and
I've got a footing down below.
| | 04:30 | Now, if we took a look at a section here--
| | 04:35 | let's reopen this section--
you can kind of see that.
| | 04:38 | Here's the foundation wall,
and here's the footing down below.
| | 04:41 | Now it's pretty common to want to see this
outline of this footing to be a dashed line,
| | 04:47 | to indicate that that's down below.
| | 04:49 | So you can see it's displaying,
but it's not displaying dashed.
| | 04:53 | So let's look at the View Range
settings in this floor plan, right here.
| | 04:57 | I've changed them slightly. The cut plane is
little lower because we're in the foundation,
| | 05:01 | and the bottom of the view range is at -5,
but I've changed the view depth to -10.
| | 05:10 | So I've created this 5-foot zone
which includes all of the footings.
| | 05:15 | Now if you create that zone, if you change
those numbers like that, then the trick you
| | 05:20 | need to know is, those objects are now
displaying using a special line style in Revit.
| | 05:26 | It's a built-in line style called Beyond.
Where you configure that Beyond is on the Manage
| | 05:32 | tab, and then go to Additional Settings,
and we want to look at Line Styles.
| | 05:37 | I'm going to expand Lines.
| | 05:41 | There is my Beyond line style.
| | 05:43 | It's currently displaying as a pen
Weight 1, Black, and a solid-line pattern.
| | 05:48 | So all I have to do is change this
to some sort of a dashed pattern.
| | 05:52 | I'm going to choose this Dash 1/16 of an inch,
click OK, and now you'll see all of the footings
| | 05:59 | show as a dashed line.
| | 06:00 | It doesn't matter that they're foundations.
| | 06:02 | It doesn't matter the category.
| | 06:04 | I didn't make a change to that category;
I made a change to that Beyond line type.
| | 06:08 | So anything that occurs in that -5- to
-10-foot range would display this same way.
| | 06:15 | The two other settings in the View Range dialog--
the zone above and the zone below--they can
| | 06:21 | be a little bit esoteric.
| | 06:22 | They can be a little bit difficult to understand.
But they offer very powerful means to control
| | 06:27 | very specifically what you want to see in
your floor plan for items that either occur
| | 06:32 | way below or items that
occur above over your head.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Linework tool| 00:00 | So far in this chapter we have seen global
object-style settings and view-specific overrides
| | 00:05 | at both the category and the object level.
| | 00:07 | Sometimes none of these methods is sufficient to get
just the right graphical treatment for a drawing.
| | 00:12 | In such situations, we have the Linework
tool, our last line of defense if you will.
| | 00:16 | With this tool, we can actually modify the
individual edges that make up an element, and
| | 00:20 | vary them as required.
| | 00:22 | For example, we could make one side of a
wall bolder or we could change a roof overhang
| | 00:26 | to a dashed line in certain areas of the plan.
| | 00:29 | The Linework tool can be just what you need
to add the finishing touch to your work, but
| | 00:33 | again, please remember to use it sparingly.
| | 00:36 | So I'm in a file here called Linework,
and I'm going to zoom in on the double volume
| | 00:41 | space over here where we
have our lobby down below.
| | 00:45 | This is the second floor plan,
the Level 2 Floor Plan.
| | 00:48 | Right here I have a floor object that provides a
balcony, and then there's a railing right here.
| | 00:53 | And it would be pretty common to want to see
some indication that we have this balcony
| | 00:58 | in the floor plan down below, but if I go
to the Level 1 floor plan, you can see that
| | 01:01 | there's really no such indication.
| | 01:03 | So there are a few different
ways you could approach this.
| | 01:05 | I mean we could just draw some drafting lines
and simulate that there was an item overhead
| | 01:10 | by putting some dash line work, but we want to do
something that's a little bit more tied to the model.
| | 01:14 | If you do drafting lines, they are no |
|
|
